Download Language Arts - Marshall County High School

Curriculum Planning Manual
Language Arts
3LIT5000
7506 N. Broadway Extension
Oklahoma City, OK 73116
800.222.2811 www.amered.com
Table of Contents
Language Arts Curriculum Planning Manual
Teachers’ Guides and Scope and Sequences
Please note: Courses are listed in grade level sequence.
Building Vocabulary I - VIII ........................................................................................................................................ 7
Language Usage I - VIII............................................................................................................................................ 36
Learning Letter Sounds ............................................................................................................................................. 58
Storybook Phonics I and II ........................................................................................................................................ 65
Reading I - VIII ....................................................................................................................................................... 77
English Literature IX - XII ....................................................................................................................................... 107
English Skills IX - XII.............................................................................................................................................. 162
Writing I - XII........................................................................................................................................................ 178
Language Arts Keyboard Companion I - VI ................................................................................................................ 209
i
Language Arts
Grade Levels K - 12
The A+LS™ Language Arts courses include comprehensive, completely integrated courses for grades K-12. The Language Arts
titles are designed to reinforce skills in vocabulary, grammar, language, writing, literature, and reading comprehension in many
forms and levels of learning. The Language Arts courses provide an extensive e-learning solution ideal for schools that want to
use technology to improve their instructional process.
•
Language Arts is presented as a collection of
year-long courses.
•
All lessons contain an integrated study guide and
essay or constructed response.
•
Lessons include a variety of essay types such as
descriptive, persuasive, expository, and letter
writing.
•
Most Language Arts lessons are certified by
MetaMetrics® with Lexile® scores.
•
A+® VIP Bundle customers receive access to
Encyclopædia Britannica® Online School Edition
(EB) workspaces which contain learning
materials. Learning materials may contain
articles, games, images, maps, and/or videos.
Clearvue (CV) video clips may be included as
well.
1
Language Arts
Grade Levels K - 12
•
The content in these courses is designed to meet and exceed the requirements of the National Council of Teachers of
English (NCTE) for the Standards of English Language Arts.
•
Students learn to identify and correctly use nouns, verbs, modifiers, and the other parts of speech. They also learn the
importance of sentence construction and identifying sentence parts including simple and complex subjects and
predicates, verbs, and phrases as well as capitalization and punctuation guidelines.
•
The Writing titles emphasize six aspects of writing including ideas, organization, voice, word choice, fluency, and
conventions. Students will learn varieties of writing formats that include personal narratives, journals, newspaper
writing, and descriptive writing.
•
The Literature lessons provide a broad exposure to literature, enabling the student to acquire the necessary skills to
understand and appreciate literature by exploring universal themes through study guides and later in the questions on
literary terms, devices, and forms.
•
Due to the interactive nature of the A+ VIP Bundle, there are a few specific software requirements:
o
EB requires a web browser, the following are recommended:
ƒ Microsoft Internet Explorer® versions 6.0 or higher
ƒ Safari® versions 2.0 or higher
Note: EB requires cookies enabled.
o
EB interactive activities require a web browser equipped with the Adobe® Flash® and Shockwave plug-ins.
Available at: www.adobe.com (select Get ADOBE FLASH PLAYER and Get Shockwave Player).
2
Language Arts
Grade Levels K - 12
o
•
EB video clips are offered in Windows Media® and MPEG-4 formats. You’ll need to have a media player installed
that will support these formats:
ƒ Quicktime® - available at: www.apple.com/quicktime/download
ƒ Windows Media® Player - available at: www.microsoft.com/windows/windowsmedia/
download
Numerous links to the Internet are provided in the A+ VIP Bundle. An Internet connection is not required for completion
of this course, but it is required to utilize the EB components of the A+ VIP Bundle.
The A+ VIP Bundle includes the Encyclopædia Britannica Online
School Edition, which has teacher resources and student
learning materials. The materials include a wide range of
interactive lessons, research projects, animations, and
worksheets that support the Writing courses.
•
•
Writing contains EB workspaces.
Each workspace may contain an article, diagram, study
guide, video, or interactive media.
3
Language Arts
Grade Levels K - 12
The Writing courses each contain a variety of lessons and differ in length, grade level, and available features. Listed below are
the courses found within the curriculum planning manual.
Course
Name
Number of
Lessons
Length of
Course in
Semesters
Grade
Levels
Lexile
Measure
Building Vocabulary I
57
1
640L
Building Vocabulary II
49
2
780L
Building Vocabulary III
49
3
630L
Building Vocabulary IV
43
4
790L
Building Vocabulary V
43
5
830L
Building Vocabulary VI
47
6
820L
Building Vocabulary VII
48
7
820L
Building Vocabulary VIII
48
8
830L
Language Usage I
33
1
470L
Language Usage II
44
2
510L
Language Usage III
40
3
600L
Language Usage IV
47
4
620L
Language Usage V
45
5
640L
Language Usage VI
44
6
750L
Language Usage VII
38
7
800L
Language Usage VIII
45
8
760L
4
Language Arts
Grade Levels K - 12
Course
Name
Number of
Lessons
Length of
Course in
Semesters
Grade
Levels
Lexile
Measure
Learning Letter Sounds
69
K
Storybook Phonics I
15
K-2
Storybook Phonics II
15
1-2
Reading I
43
1
500L
Reading II
45
2
580L
Reading III
43
3
620L
Reading IV
43
4
700L
Reading V
45
5
790L
Reading VI
48
6
810L
Reading VII
40
7
840L
Reading VIII
42
8
870L
English Literature IX
42
2
9
1010L
English Literature X
56
2
10
980L
English Literature XI
52
2
11
960L
English Literature XII
33
2
12
1040L
English Skills IX
40
2
9
930L
English Skills X
38
2
10
960L
English Skills XI
36
2
11
990L
English Skills XII
34
2
12
1030L
5
Language Arts
Grade Levels K - 12
Course
Name
Number of
Lessons
Length of
Course in
Semesters
Grade
Levels
Writing I
30
1
Writing II
34
2
Writing III
34
3
Writing IV
38
4
Writing V
45
5
Writing VI
45
6
Writing VII
45
7
Writing VIII
45
8
Writing IX
41
2
9
Writing X
44
2
10
Writing XI
46
2
11
Writing XII
46
2
12
Language Arts Keyboard Companion I
89
3-5
Language Arts Keyboard Companion II
65
3-5
Language Arts Keyboard Companion III
39
6-8
Language Arts Keyboard Companion IV
40
6-8
Language Arts Keyboard Companion V
45
9-12
Language Arts Keyboard Companion VI
32
9-12
6
Lexile
Measure
Building Vocabulary I - VIII
Grades 1 - 8
A+LS Building Vocabulary I - VIII introduces students to a
variety of topics including:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
three key skills (phonemic awareness, phonics, and
vocabulary development
extensive tutorial and instructional narration in
grade levels 1-3
core vocabulary words
multiple exposures to the use of words and word
sounds
utilizing words in context
language development exercises
phonics skills of syllabication
recognition of blends, digraphs, and diphthongs
developing sight vocabularies
dictionary and thesaurus skills
synonyms, and antonyms
connotation and denotation
Latin and Greek root words
prefixes and suffixes
special vocabularies including vocabulary common
to standardized tests
multiple meaning words
foreign terms and phrases
promotion of language fluency
7
Building Vocabulary
Grade Levels I – VIII
A+LS™ Building Vocabulary is a scientific, research-based, comprehensive, and completely integrated curriculum for grade
levels 1-8. Building Vocabulary I, II, and III have tutorial and instructional voice support. A sequence of eight titles provides an
extensive e-learning solution ideal for schools that want to use technology to improve their instructional process.
•
All lessons contain a study guide, a practice
and mastery test, and an essay or constructed
response.
•
Many lessons include a variety of essay types
such as descriptive, persuasive, expository,
and letter writing.
•
The A+LS program consists of an Internetbased instructional management system with
student assessment tools built in, and
educators can test students on national, state,
district, or local objectives because any set of
standards can be added to the system.
8
Building Vocabulary
Grade Levels I – VIII
•
The Basic Vocabulary courses provide instruction in basic phonemic principles (phonemic awareness), phonetic (phonics)
and visual introduction to new words and word sounds, and multiple exposures to the use of words and word sounds.
•
The student is provided an opportunity to use words in context and in language development exercises (vocabulary
development).
•
Emphasis is placed on phonics skills of syllabication, pronunciation, word definition, recognition of blends, digraphs,
diphthongs, letters that have more than one sound, and sight vocabulary development at each grade level.
•
Dictionary and thesaurus skills are enhanced through vocabulary exercises that include word recognition skills, multiple
meaning words, synonyms, antonyms, connotation and denotation, Latin and Greek root words, prefixes and suffixes,
foreign terms and phrases, core vocabulary words, and special vocabularies common to standardized tests.
•
The A+LS program uses three key skills (phonemic awareness, phonics, and vocabulary development) identified by the
National Reading Panel as it directs students from beginning reading levels to more advanced reading skills utilizing a
Four-Step Approach in each title series.
9
Building Vocabulary
Grade Levels I – VIII
•
An Internet connection is not required for completion of this
course but may be useful for students who wish to pursue
further learning opportunities in Building Vocabulary.
•
Students are required to complete the essay section for
lesson mastery. This setting must be enabled on the “Settings
for Assignment of A+LS Lesson” dialog box. The default
setting does not require the completion of the essay for
assignment mastery. The circled item in the figure at right
shows the Essay option has been enabled.
10
Building Vocabulary
Grade Levels I – VIII
The Building Vocabulary titles develop skills in practical
situations by utilizing a Four-Step Approach: Study Guide,
Practice Test, Mastery Test, and Essay modules are used to
define the instructional environment.
•
The Study Guide module provides text- and graphicsbased delivery of material that is reinforced by pictures
and diagrams supported by a wealth of content. Study
Guides teach the concepts and skills associated with
each lesson. A number of the Study Guide pages have
specific, interactive feedback that will assist the student
in solving problems or understanding concepts.
•
The Practice Test module allows the student to practice
skills learned in the Study Guide section. The student
has instant access to the study material for reference.
•
In the Mastery Test module, the student takes a scored examination, electronically submits the test, and the results are
recorded in the A+LS Management System.
•
The Essay module allows the student to compose individual, free-form answers to a wide variety of questions and
problems.
11
Building Vocabulary I
Grade 1
Lesson Title
1
Sound Recognition
2
Sound Sequence
3
4
5
6
7
8
Loud and Soft
Sounds
Nonsense Sounds
Sequencing Three
Sounds
Similar Sounds
Introduction to
Sounds 1
Introduction to
Sounds 2
9
The Short /a/ Sound
10
The Short /e/ Sound
11
The Short /i/ Sound
12
The Short /o/ Sound
13
The Short /u/ Sound
14
The Long /a/ Sound
15
The Long /e/ Sound
16
The Long /i/ Sound
Lesson Content
Phonemic Awareness
Students are asked to identify many sounds that would occur in public, at
home and in school. The recognition of these sounds will help the students
understand their everyday world.
Students listen to a variety of sounds and identify the order of a two sound
sequence
Essays & Media
Students identify various sounds according to the volume of the sound
Students are asked to correctly identify the correct source of a sound
Students listen to a variety of sounds and identify the order of a three sound
sequence
Students determine the difference between similar two sequence and three
sequence sounds of everyday objects and animals
Sounds
Students are introduced to all sounds, the definition of vowels and consonants
Students are introduced to all sounds, the definition of vowels and consonants
Students identify short /a/ sound in examples: consonant/vowel/consonant
concept in creating short vowel sound
Students identify short /e/ sound in examples: consonant/vowel/consonant
concept in creating short vowel sound
Students identify short /i/ sound in examples: consonant/vowel/consonant
concept in creating short vowel sound
Students identify short /o/ sound in examples: consonant/vowel/consonant
concept in creating short vowel sound
Students identify short /u/ sound in examples: consonant/vowel/consonant
concept in creating short vowel sound
Students identify long /a/ sound in examples: vowel/consonant/vowel concept
in creating the long vowel sound
Students identify long /e/ sound in examples: vowel/consonant/vowel concept
in creating the long vowel sound
Students identify long /i/ sound in examples: vowel/consonant/vowel concept
in creating the long vowel sound
12
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Building Vocabulary I
Grade 1
Lesson Title
17
The Long /o/ Sound
18
The Long /u/ Sound
26
The Long /oo/
Sound
The /er/ /ir/ /ur/
Sounds
The /ar/ Sound
The /or/ Sound
Y as a Vowel
The Diphthong /ou/
& /ow/
The Diphthong /oi/
& /oy/
Silent Vowels
27
Initial Consonants 1
28
Initial Consonants 2
29
Initial Consonants 3
30
Initial Consonants 4
31
Initial Consonants 5
32
Initial Consonants 6
33
Initial Consonants 7
34
Initial Consonants 8
35
Initial Consonants 9
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Lesson Content
Students identify long /o/ sound in examples: vowel/consonant/vowel concept
in creating the long vowel sound
Students identify long /u/ sound in examples: vowel/consonant/vowel concept
in creating the long vowel sound
Essays & Media
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Students identify the long sound of /oo/
Essay: Written Response
Students identify words that have the /er/, /ur/, and /ir/ sounds
Essay: Written Response
Students identify words that have the /ar/ sound in words
Students identify words having the /or/ sound
Students identify words using /y/ as a vowel sound
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Students work with spellings ow and ou representing the diphthong /ou/
Student work with the spellings oi and oy representing the diphthong /oi/
Essay: Written Response
Students identify silent vowels in words; second vowel is usually silent
Students identify words that begin with the letters b, f; sound of the letters
/b/, /f/
Students identify words that begin with the letters d, g; sound of the letters
/d/, /g/
Students identify words that begin with the letters h, j; sound of the letters
/h/, /j/
Students identify words that begin with the letters k, c; /k/ and /c/ sometimes
make the same sounds
Students identify words that begin with the letters l, m; sound of the letters
/l/, /m/
Students identify words that begin with the letters n, p; sound of the letters
/n/, /p/
Students identify words that begin with the letters q, r; sound of the letters
/q/, /r/
Students identify words that begin with the letters s, c; sound of the letters
/s/, /c/
Students identify words that begin with the letters t, v; sound of the letters /t/,
/v/
Essay: Written Response
13
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Building Vocabulary I
Grade 1
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
Lesson Title
Initial Consonants
10
Final Consonants 1
Final Consonants 2
Final Consonants 3
Final Consonants 4
Final Consonants 5
Final Consonants 6
Like and Unlike
Letters
Like and Unlike
Words
45
Initial Blends 1
46
Initial Blends 2
47
Initial Blends 3
48
49
Beginning Digraphs
1
Beginning Digraphs
2
50
Final Digraphs 1
51
Final Digraphs 2
52
53
54
55
56
57
Basic Sight Words 1
Basic Sight Words 2
Syllables
Word Families
Root Words
Compound Words
Lesson Content
Students identify words that begin with the letters w, y, z; sound of the letters
/w/, /y/, /z/
Students identify words that end with k, b; sounds of ending /k/, /b/
Students identify words that end with x, m, f; sounds of ending /x/, /m/, /f/
Students identify words that end with t, p; sounds of ending /t/, /p/
Students identify words that end with d, b; sounds of ending /d/, /b/
Students identify words that end with n, g; sounds of ending /n/, /g/
Students identify words that end with l, r; sounds of ending /l/, /r/
Students identify letters with similar features; (c, e, o), (b, p, q, d), (v, w, u),
(j, i), (g, y, j, p), (m, n, w, v, r)
Students identify words that look similar to other words; (on, no, so), (an, am,
and), (if, it, is, in)
Definition of a blend; students identify examples of blends; (pl, pr, fl, fr, br, tr,
scr, sk, sn)
Definition of a blend; students identify examples of blends; (gr, dr, cr, cl, gl,
st, sc, sw, squ)
Definition of a blend; students identify examples of blends; (sl, sp, bl, cl, sm,
spl, spr, thur, str)
Definition of a digraph; example of digraph; students complete words using
digraphs ch, gh and ph
Students identify words with sh and th; two sounds of /th/
Location of digraphs in words; students complete words with correct digraphs:
ch, ph, ck, and sh
Location of digraphs in words; students complete words with correct digraphs:
th, gh, and ng
Identify, use, and correctly spell basic sight words
Identify, use, and correctly spell basic sight words
The identification and use of closed, open, and accented syllables
Building vocabulary through the use of word families and rhyming words
Recognizing and using root words to build vocabulary
Recognizing and forming compound words
14
Essays & Media
Essay: Written Response
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Written
Written
Written
Written
Written
Response
Response
Response
Response
Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Activity
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Written
Written
Written
Written
Activity
Written
Response
Response
Response
Response
Response
Building Vocabulary II
Grade Level 2
1
2
Lesson Title
Letters and Sounds
1
Letters and Sounds
2
3
The Short /a/ Sound
4
The Short /e/ Sound
5
The Short /i/ Sound
6
The Short /o/ Sound
7
The Short /u/ Sound
8
The Long /a/ Sound
9
The Long /e/ Sound
10
The Long /i/ Sound
11
The Long /o/ Sound
12
The Long /u/ Sound
13
14
15
16
17
18
The Short/Long /oo/
Sound
The /Er/ /Ir/ /Ur/
Sounds
The /ar/ Sound
The /or/ Sound
Y as a Vowel
The Diphthong /ou/
& /ow/
Lesson Content
Essays & Media
Students are introduced to all sounds, the definition of vowels and consonants
Students are introduced to all sounds, the definition of vowels and consonants
Students identify short /a/ sound in examples: consonant/vowel/consonant
concept in creating short vowel sound
Students identify short /e/ sound in examples: consonant/vowel/consonant
concept in creating short vowel sound
Students identify short /i/ sound in examples: consonant/vowel/consonant
concept in creating short vowel sound
Students identify short /o/ sound in examples: consonant/vowel/consonant
concept in creating short vowel sound
Students identify short /u/ sound in examples: consonant/vowel/consonant
concept in creating short vowel sound
Students identify long /a/ sound in examples: vowel/consonant/vowel concept
in creating the long vowel sound
Students identify long /e/ sound in examples: vowel/consonant/vowel concept
in creating the long vowel sound
Students identify long /i/ sound in examples: vowel/consonant/vowel concept
in creating the long vowel sound
Students identify long /o/ sound in examples: vowel/consonant/vowel concept
in creating the long vowel sound
Students identify long /u/ sound in examples: vowel/consonant/vowel concept
in creating the long vowel sound
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Students identify the long and short sounds of /oo/
Essay: Written Response
Students identify words that have the /er/, /ur/, and /ir/ sounds
Essay: Written Response
Students identify words that have the /ar/ sound in words
Students identify words having the /or/ sound
Students identify words using /y/ as a vowel sound
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Students work with spellings ow and ou representing the diphthong /ou/
Essay: Written Response
15
Building Vocabulary II
Grade Level 2
20
Lesson Title
The Diphthong /oi/
& /oy/
Silent Vowels
21
Initial Consonants 1
22
Initial Consonants 2
23
Initial Consonants 3
24
Initial Consonants 4
25
Initial Consonants 5
26
Initial Consonants 6
27
Initial Consonants 7
28
29
30
Final Consonants 1
Final Consonants 2
Final Consonants 3
31
Final Consonants 4
19
32
33
Like and Unlike
Letters
Like and Unlike
Words
34
Initial Blends 1
35
Initial Blends 2
36
Initial Blends 3
37
Beginning Digraphs
1
Lesson Content
Essays & Media
Student work with the spellings oi and oy representing the diphthong /oi/
Essay: Written Response
Students identify silent vowels in words; second vowel is usually silent
Students identify words that begin with the letters b, d, f; sound of the letters
/b/, /d/, /f/
Students identify words that begin with the letters c, k, s; sound of the letters
/c/, /k/, /s/
Students identify words that begin with the letters g, h, j; sound of the letters
/g/, /h/, /j/
Students identify words that begin with the letters l, m, n; sound of the letters
/l/, /m/, /n/
Students identify words that begin with the letters p, q, r; sound of the letters
/p/, /q/, /r/
Students identify words that begin with the letters t, v, w; sound of the letters
/t/, /v/, /w/
Students identify words that begin with the letters y, z; sound of the letters
/y/, /z/
Students identify words that end with k, b, x; sounds of ending /k/, /b/, /x/
Students identify words that end with m, t, p; sounds of ending /m/, /t/, /p/
Students identify words that end with d, s, n; sounds of ending /d/, /s/, /n/
Students identify words that end with g, l; sounds of ending /g/, /l/ Students
identify words that end with r, f; sounds of ending /r/, /f/
Students identify letters with similar features; (c, e, o), (b, p, q, d), (v, w, u),
(j, i), (g, y, j, p), (m, n, w, v, r)
Students identify words that look similar to other words; (on, no, so), (an, am,
and), (if, it, is, in)
Definition of a blend; students identify examples of blends; (pl, pr, fl, fr, br, tr,
sk, sn)
Definition of a blend; students identify examples of blends; (gr, dr, cr, cl, gl,
st, sc, sw, squ)
Definition of a blend; students identify examples of blends: sl, sp, bl, cl, sm,
spl, spr, thr, str
Definition of a digraph; example of digraph; students complete words using
digraphs ch, gh and ph
Essay: Written Response
16
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Building Vocabulary II
Grade Level 2
38
Lesson Title
Beginning Digraphs
2
39
Final Digraphs 1
40
Final Digraphs 2
41
42
43
Basic Sight Words 1
Basic Sight Words 2
Syllables
44
Dictionary Skills
45
46
47
48
49
Prefixes/Suffixes
Word Families
Root Words
Compound Words
Special Vocabulary
Lesson Content
Essays & Media
Students identify words with sh and unvoiced th
Location of digraphs in words; students complete words with correct digraphs
ch, ph, ck, and sh
Location of digraphs in words; students complete words with correct digraphs
th, gh, and ng
Identify, use, and correctly spell basic sight words
Identify, use, and correctly spell basic sight words
The identification and use of closed, open, and accented syllables
How to use a dictionary to determine the syllabication, pronunciation,
definition, and correct spelling of words
Using prefixes and suffixes to determine word meaning
Building vocabulary through the use of word families
Recognizing and using root words to build vocabulary
Recognizing and forming compound words
Enrichment
17
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Building Vocabulary III
Grade Level 3
1
2
Lesson Title
Introduction to
Sounds 1
Introduction to
Sounds 2
3
The Short /a/ Sound
4
The Short /e/ Sound
5
The Short /i/ Sound
6
The Short /o/ Sound
7
The Short /u/ Sound
8
The Long /a/ Sound
9
The Long /e/ Sound
10
The Long /i/ Sound
11
The Long /o/ Sound
12
The Long /u/ Sound
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
The Long /oo/
Sound
The /oo/ Sound
The /er/ /ir/ /ur/
Sounds
The /ar/ Sound
The /or/ Sound
Y as a Vowel
The Diphthong /ou/
& /ow/
Lesson Content
Essays & Media
Students are introduced to all sounds, the definition of vowels and consonants
Students are introduced to all sounds, the definition of vowels and consonants
Students identify short /a/ sound in examples: consonant/vowel/consonant
concept in creating short vowel sound
Students identify short /e/ sound in examples: consonant/vowel/consonant
concept in creating short vowel sound
Students identify short /i/ sound in examples: consonant/vowel/consonant
concept in creating short vowel sound
Students identify short /o/ sound in examples: consonant/vowel/consonant
concept in creating short vowel sound
Students identify short /u/ sound in examples: consonant/vowel/consonant
concept in creating short vowel sound
Students identify long /a/ sound in examples: vowel/consonant/vowel concept
in long vowel sound
Students identify long /e/ sound in examples: vowel/consonant/vowel concept
in long vowel sound
Students identify long /i/ sound in examples: vowel/consonant/vowel concept
in long vowel sound
Students identify long /o/ sound in examples: vowel/consonant/vowel concept
in long vowel sound
Students identify long /u/ sound in examples: vowel/consonant/vowel concept
in long vowel sound
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Students identify the long sound of /oo/
Essay: Written Response
Students identify the three sounds of /oo/
Essay: Written Response
Students identify words that have the /er/, /ur/, and /ir/ sounds
Essay: Written Response
Students identify words that have the /ar/ sound in words
Students identify words having the /or/ sound
Students identify words using y as a vowel sound
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Students work with spellings ow and ou representing the diphthong /ou/
Essay: Written Response
18
Building Vocabulary III
Grade Level 3
21
Lesson Title
The Diphthong /oi/
& /oy/
Silent Vowels
22
Initial Consonants 1
23
Initial Consonants 2
24
Initial Consonants 3
25
Initial Consonant
Review
26
Final Consonants 1
27
Final Consonants 2
28
Final Consonants 3
20
29
30
Like and Unlike
Letters
Like and Unlike
Words
31
Initial Blends 1
32
Initial Blends 2
33
Initial Blends 3
34
35
Beginning Digraphs
1
Beginning Digraphs
2
Lesson Content
Essays & Media
Student work with the spellings oi and oy representing the diphthong /oi/
Essay: Written Response
Students identify silent vowels in words; second vowel is usually silent
Students identify words that begin with the letters b, d, f, g; sound of the
letters /b/, /d/, /f/, /g/; Students identify words that begin with the letters c,
k, s; sound of the letters /c/, /k/, /s/
Students identify words that begin with the letters h, j, l, n; sound of the
letters /h/, /j/, /l/, /n/; Students identify words that begin with the letters n, p,
q, r; sound of the letters /n/, /p/, /q/, /r/
Students identify words that begin with the letters t, v, w; sound of the letters
/t/, /v/, /w/; Students identify words that begin with the letters y, z; sound of
the letters /y/, /z/
Essay: Written Response
A review of initial consonants
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Students identify words that end with k, b, x , m; sounds of ending /k/, /b/,
/x/ /m/
Students identify words that end with t, p, d s; sounds of ending /t/, /p/, /d/
/s/
Students identify words that end with n, g, l; sounds of ending /n/, /g/, /l/;
Students identify words that end with r, f; sounds of ending /r/, /f/
Students identify letters with similar features; (c, e, o), (b, p, q, d), (v, w, u,),
(j, i), (g, y, j, p), (m, n, w, v, r)
Students identify words that look similar to other words; (on, no, so), (an, am,
and), (if, it, is, in)
Definition of a blend; students identify examples of blends; (pl, pr, fl, fr, br, tr,
scr, sk, sn)
Definition of a blend; students identify examples of blends; (gr, dr, cr, cl, gl,
st, sc, sw)
Definition of a blend; students identify examples of blends; (sl, sp, bl, sm, spl,
spr, thr, str, th, squ)
Definition of a digraph; example of digraph; students complete words using
digraphs ch, gh, and ph
Essay: Written Response
Students identify words with sh, voiced and unvoiced th, and wh
Essay: Written Response
19
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Building Vocabulary III
Grade Level 3
Lesson Title
36
Final Digraphs 1
37
Final Digraphs 2
38
39
40
Basic Sight Words 1
Basic Sight Words 2
Basic Sight Words 3
41
Dictionary
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
Prefixes
Suffixes
Base Words
Compound Words
Synonyms
Antonyms
Homonyms
Contractions
Lesson Content
Location of digraphs in words; students complete words with correct digraphs
ch, ck, and sh
Location of digraphs in words; students complete words with correct digraphs
th, gh, and ng
Identify, use, and correctly spell basic sight words
Identify, use, and correctly spell basic sight words
Identify, use, and correctly spell basic sight words
How to use a dictionary to determine the syllabication, pronunciation,
definition, and correct spelling of words
Using prefixes to determine word meaning
Using suffixes to determine word meaning
Recognizing and using base words to build vocabulary
Recognizing and forming compound words
Improving vocabulary through synonyms
Improving vocabulary through antonyms
Recognizing homonyms
Identify and form contractions
20
Essays & Media
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Activity
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Building Vocabulary IV
Grade Level 4
1
Lesson Title
Dictionary 1
2
Dictionary 2
3
5
6
Thesaurus
Multiple Meaning
Words
Sight Word Review
Parts of Speech
7
Analogies
8
9
Synonyms
Antonyms
Homonyms/
Homographs
Words in Context
Prefixes 1
Prefixes 2
Suffixes 1
Suffixes 2
Latin and Greek
Roots
4
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Word Recognition
18
What’s in a Word?
19
Core Word
Vocabulary 1
20
21
22
Core Word
Vocabulary 2
Core Word
Vocabulary 3
Testing Strategies
Lesson Content
How to use a dictionary; parts of the dictionary; dictionary entry
How to use a dictionary to determine the syllabication, pronunciation key,
definition, and correct spelling of words
How to use a thesaurus as a resource to find similar word meanings
Essays & Media
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Identify the multiple meanings of words
Essay: Written Response
Review of mastered basic sight words
Review of the eight parts of speech
Definition of analogy; strategies for solving types of relationships; students
practice completing analogies
Improving vocabulary through synonyms
Improving vocabulary through antonyms
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Recognizing homonyms and homographs
Essay: Written Response
Using
Using
Using
Using
Using
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
denotation and connotation to determine the context word meaning
prefixes to determine word meaning
prefixes to determine word meaning
suffixes to determine word meaning
suffixes to determine word meaning
Expanding vocabulary through the study of common Latin and Greek roots
Strategies for critical recognition of small words in larger words, using context,
prefixes, suffixes, and roots
Words borrowed from names and places
Promoting vocabulary growth through the identification of core vocabulary
words in social science, including geography, history, economics, anthropology,
sociology, and civics
Promoting vocabulary growth through the identification of core vocabulary
words art, music, and language arts
Promoting vocabulary growth through the identification of core vocabulary
words in math, science, and computers
Test taking strategies; multiple choice; true/false; reading comprehension;
vocabulary
21
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Written
Written
Written
Written
Written
Response
Response
Response
Response
Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Building Vocabulary IV
Grade Level 4
Lesson Title
23
Short Vowel Sounds
24
Long Vowel Sounds
25
The /oo/ Sound
26
The /ur/ Sound
27
28
29
30
Diphthongs 1
Diphthongs 2
Words ending in Y
The /or/ Sound
31
Initial Consonants 1
32
Initial Consonants 2
33
Initial Consonants 3
34
Final Consonants 1
35
Final Consonants 2
36
Consonant Blends 1
37
Consonant Blends 2
38
Consonant Blends 3
39
40
Final Consonant
Blends 1
Final Consonant
Blends 2
Lesson Content
Students identify short /a/, /e/, /i/, /o/, and /u/ sounds in examples:
consonant/vowel/consonant concept in creating the short vowel sound
Students identify long /a/, /e/, /i/, /o/, and /u/ sounds in examples:
vowel/consonant/vowel and consonant-vowel-vowel-consonant concepts in
creating the long vowel sound
Students identify long and short sounds of /oo/ in examples
Students identify words that have the /ur/ sound spelled er, ir, or and ur
sounds
Students work with spellings ow and ou
Students work with spellings oi and oy
Students identify words ending with the long "e" sound of "y"
Students identify words having the /or/ sound
Students identify words that begin with the letters b, d, f, h, j, k and l; sound
of the letters /b/, /d/, /f/, /h/, /j/, /k/ and /l/
Students identify words that begin with the letters m, n, p, r, s, t and v; sound
of the letters /m/, /n/, /p/, /r/, /s/, /t/ and /v/
Students identify words that begin with the letters c, g, q, w, y, and z; sound
of the letters /c/, /g/, /q/, /w/, /y/ and /z/; the hard and soft sounds of "c" and
"g"
Students identify words that end with b, d, f, g, k. and l; sounds of ending /b/,
/d/, /f/, /g/, /k/. and /l/
Students identify words that end with m, n, p, s, t, and x sounds of ending
/m/, /n/, /p/, /s/, /t/ and /x/
Definition of blend; students identify examples of blends: cl, cr, bl, br, dr, fl, fr,
gl, gr
Definition of blend; students identify examples of blends: pl, pr, sp, spl, spr, st,
str
Definition of blend; students identify examples of blends: sc, scr, sk, sl, sm,
sn, sw, tr
Essays & Media
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Written
Written
Written
Written
Response
Response
Response
Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Students identify final consonant blends lb, ld, lf, lk, lp, lt, lm
Essay: Written Response
Students identify final consonant blends ct, ft, mp, nd, nt, pt, tch
Essay: Written Response
22
Building Vocabulary IV
Grade Level 4
Lesson Title
41
Digraphs 1
42
Digraphs 2
43
Silent Consonants
Lesson Content
Definition of digraph; example of digraph; students complete words using
digraphs ch, sh, wh, and th
Location of digraphs in words; students complete words with correct digraphs
gh, ph, ck, ng, nk
Identify the silent consonants kn, wr, gn, mb, and igh
23
Essays & Media
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Building Vocabulary V
Grade Level 5
1
2
3
4
5
Lesson Title
Dictionary
Thesaurus
Syllables/
Pronunciation
Multiple Meaning
Words
Parts of Speech
Review
6
Analogies
7
8
Synonyms
Antonyms
Homonyms/
Homographs
Words in Context 1
Words in Context 2
Prefixes 1
Prefixes 2
Suffixes 1
Suffixes 2
Latin and Greek
Roots
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Word Recognition
18
What’s in a Word?
19
Core Word
Vocabulary 1
22
Core Word
Vocabulary 2
Core Word
Vocabulary 3
Testing Strategies
23
Short Vowel Sounds
20
21
Lesson Content
How to use a dictionary, parts of the dictionary, and dictionary entry
How to use a thesaurus as a resource to find similar word meanings
The identification and use of closed, open, and accented syllables, using a
pronunciation key
Essays & Media
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Activity
Identify the multiple meanings of words
Essay: Written Response
Review of the eight parts of speech
Essay: Activity
Definition of analogy; strategies for solving types of relationships; students
practice completing analogies
Improving vocabulary through synonyms
Improving vocabulary through antonyms
Essay: Activity
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Recognizing homonyms and homographs
Essay: Activity
Using
Using
Using
Using
Using
Using
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
denotation and connotation to determine the context word meaning
denotation and connotation to determine the context word meaning
prefixes to determine word meaning
prefixes to determine word meaning
suffixes to determine word meaning
suffixes to determine word meaning
Expanding vocabulary through the study of common Latin and Greek roots
Strategies for critical recognition of small words in larger words, using context,
prefixes, suffixes, and roots
Words borrowed from names and places
Promoting vocabulary growth through the identification of core vocabulary
words in social science, including geography, history, economics, anthropology,
sociology, and civics
Promoting vocabulary growth through the identification of core vocabulary
words in math, art, music, and language arts
Promoting vocabulary growth through the identification of core vocabulary
words in science and computers
Test taking strategies
Students identify short /a/, /e/, /i/, /o/, and /u/ sounds in examples:
consonant/vowel/consonant concept in creating the short vowel sound
24
Narrative Writing
Written Response
Activity
Written Response
Activity
Activity
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Activity
Essay: Activity
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Letter Writing
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Building Vocabulary V
Grade Level 5
Lesson Title
24
Long Vowels Sounds
25
The /oo/ Sound
26
The /ur/ Sound
27
28
29
30
Diphthongs 1
Diphthongs 2
Words ending in Y
The /or/ Sound
31
Initial Consonants 1
32
Initial Consonants 2
33
Initial Consonants 3
34
Final Consonants 1
35
Final Consonants 2
36
Consonant Blends 1
37
Consonant Blends 2
38
Consonant Blends 3
39
40
Final Consonant
Blends 1
Final Consonant
Blends 2
41
Digraphs 1
42
Digraphs 2
Lesson Content
Students identify long /a/, /e/, /i/, /o/, and /u/ sounds in examples:
vowel/consonant/vowel and consonant-vowel-vowel-consonant concepts in
creating the long vowel sound
Students identify long and short sounds of /oo/ in examples
Students identify words that have the /ur/ sound spelled er, ir, or, and ur
sounds
Students work with spellings ow and ou
Students work with spellings oi and oy
Students identify words ending with the long e sound of y
Students identify words having the /or/ sound
Students identify words that begin with the letters b, d, f, h, j, k, and l; sound
of the letters /b/, /d/, /f/, /h/, /j/, /k/, and /l/
Students identify words that begin with the letters m, n, p, r, s, t,and v; sound
of the letters /m/, /n/, /p/, /r/, /s/, /t/, and /v/
Students identify words that begin with the letters c, g, q, w, y, and z; sound
of the letters /c/, /g/, /q/, /w/, /y/, and /z/; the hard and soft sounds of 'c' and
'g'
Students identify words that end with b, d, f, g, k, and l; sounds of ending /b/,
/d/, /f/, /g/, /k/, and /l/
Students identify words that end with m, n, p, s, t, and x sounds of ending
/m/, /n/, /p/, /s/, /t/, and /x/
Definition of blend; students identify examples of blends: cl, cr, bl, br, dr, fl, fr,
gl, gr
Definition of blend; students identify examples of blends: pl, pr, sp, spl, spr,
scr, st, str
Definition of blend; students identify examples of blends: sci, scr, sk, sl, sm,
sn, sw, tr
Students identify final consonant blends: lb, ld, lf, lk, lp, lt, lm
Essays & Media
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Students identify final consonant blends: ct, ft, mp, nd, nt, pt, tch
Definition of digraph; example of digraph; students complete words using
digraphs ch, sh, wh, and th
Location of digraphs in words; students complete words with correct digraphs
gh, ph, ck, ng, nk
25
Essay: Written Response
Building Vocabulary V
Grade Level 5
43
Lesson Title
Silent Consonants
Lesson Content
Identify the silent consonants kn, wr, gn, mb, and igh
26
Essays & Media
Essay: Written Response
Building Vocabulary VI
Grade Level 6
1
2
Lesson Title
Dictionary
Thesaurus
3
Syllabication
4
5
6
Multiple Meaning
Words 1
Multiple Meaning
Words 2
Parts of Speech
Review
7
Analogies
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Synonyms
Antonyms
Homographs
Words in Context 1
Words in Context 2
Prefixes 1
Prefixes 2
Suffixes 1
Suffixes 2
Latin & Greek Roots
1
Latin & Greek Roots
2
17
18
19
Word Recognition
20
21
22
What’s in a Word?
Foreign Terms
Foreign Phrases
23
Core Word
Vocabulary 1
24
Core Word
Vocabulary 2
Lesson Content
How to use a dictionary, parts of the dictionary, and dictionary entry
How to use a thesaurus as a resource to find similar word meanings
The identification and use of closed, open, and accented syllables, using a
pronunciation key
Essays & Media
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Identify the multiple meanings of words
Essay: Written Response
Identify the multiple meanings of words
Essay: Written Response
Review of the eight parts of speech
Essay: Written Response
Definition of analogy, strategies for solving types of relationships, students
practice completing analogies
Improving vocabulary through synonyms
Improving vocabulary through antonyms
Recognizing homographs
Using denotation and connotation to determine the context word meaning
Using denotation and connotation to determine the context word meaning
Using prefixes to determine word meaning
Using prefixes to determine word meaning
Using suffixes to determine word meaning
Using suffixes to determine word meaning
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Written
Written
Written
Written
Response
Response
Response
Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Narrative Writing
Expanding vocabulary through the study of common Latin and Greek roots
Essay: Written Response
Expanding vocabulary through the study of common Latin and Greek roots
Essay: Written Response
Strategies for critical recognition of small words in larger words, using context,
prefixes, suffixes, and roots
Words borrowed from names and places
Foreign terms that enrich and extend vocabularies
Foreign phrases that enrich and extend vocabularies
Promoting vocabulary growth through the identification of core vocabulary
words in social science, including geography, history, economics, anthropology,
sociology, and civics
Promoting vocabulary growth through the identification of core vocabulary
words in art, music, and language arts
27
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Building Vocabulary VI
Grade Level 6
25
Lesson Title
Core Word
Vocabulary 3
26
Testing Vocabulary
27
Short Vowel Sounds
28
Long Vowel Sounds
29
The /oo/ Sound
30
The /ur/ Sound
31
32
33
34
Diphthong 1
Diphthong 2
Words ending in Y
The /or/ Sound
35
Initial Consonants 1
36
Initial Consonants 2
37
Initial Consonants 3
38
Final Consonants 1
39
Final Consonants 2
40
Consonants Blends 1
41
Consonants Blends 2
42
Consonants Blends 3
43
Final Consonant
Blends 1
Lesson Content
Promoting vocabulary growth through the identification of core vocabulary
words in math, science, and computers
Test taking strategies, multiple choice; true/false; reading comprehension;
vocabulary
Students identify short /a/, /e/, /i/, /o/, and /u/ sounds in examples:
consonant/vowel/consonant concept in creating the short vowel sound
Students identify long /a/, /e/, /i/, /o/, and /u/ sounds in examples:
vowel/consonant/vowel and consonant-vowel-vowel-consonant concepts in
creating the long vowel sound
Students identify long and short sounds of /oo/ in examples
Students identify words that have the /ur/ sound spelled er, ir, or and ur
sounds
Students work with spellings ow and ou
Students work with spellings oi and oy
Students identify words ending with the long e sound of y
Students identify words having the /or/ sound
Students identify words that begin with the letters b, d, f, h, j, k and l; sound
of the letters /b/, /d/, /f/, /h/, /j/, /k/ and /l/
Students identify words that begin with the letters m, n, p, r, s, t and v; sound
of the letters /m/, /n/, /p/, /r/, /s/, /t/ and /v/
Students identify words that begin with the letters c, g, q, w, y, and z; sound
of the letters /c/, /g/, /q/, /w/, /y/ and /z/; the hard and soft sounds of c and g
Students identify words that begin with the letters c, g, q, w, y, and z; sound
of the letters /c/, /g/, /q/, /w/, /y/ and /z/; the hard and soft sounds of c and g
Students identify words that end with m, n, p, s, t, and x sounds of ending
/m/, /n/, /p/, /s/, /t/ and /x/
Definition of blend; students identify examples of blends; cl, cr, bl, br, dr, fl, fr,
gl, gr
Definition of blend; students identify examples of blends; pl, pr, sp, spl, spr, st,
str
Definition of blend; students identify examples of blends; sci, scr, sk, sl, sm,
sn, sw, tr
Students identify final consonant blends lb, ld, lf, lk, lp, lt, lm
28
Essays & Media
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Narrative Writing
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Written Response
Written Response
Written Response
Narrative Writing
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Building Vocabulary VI
Grade Level 6
44
Lesson Title
Final Consonant
Blends 2
45
Digraphs 1
46
Digraphs 2
47
Silent Consonants
Lesson Content
Students identify final consonant blends ct, ft, mp, nd, nt, pt, tch
Definition of digraph; example of digraph; students complete words using
digraphs ch, sh, wh, and th
Location of digraphs in words; students complete words with correct digraphs
gh, ph, ck, ng, nk
Identify the silent consonants kn, wr, gn, mb, and igh
29
Essays & Media
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Building Vocabulary VII
Grade Level 7
1
2
3
4
5
6
Lesson Title
Dictionary
Thesaurus
Syllables/
Pronunciation
Multiple Meaning
Words 1
Multiple Meaning
Words 2
Parts of Speech
Review
7
Analogies
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Synonyms
Antonyms
Homonyms
Words in Context 1
Words in Context 2
Prefixes 1
Prefixes 2
Suffixes 1
Suffixes 2
Latin and Greek
Roots 1
Latin and Greek
Roots 2
Latin and Greek
Roots 3
Latin and Greek
Roots 4
17
18
19
20
21
Word Recognition
22
23
24
25
What’s in a Word?
Foreign Terms 1
Foreign Terms 2
Foreign Phrases 1
Lesson Content
How to use a dictionary; parts of the dictionary; dictionary entry
How to use a thesaurus as a resource to find similar word meanings
The identification and use of closed, open, and accented syllables; using a
pronunciation key
Essays & Media
Essay: Research
Essay: Research
Essay: Written Response
Identify the multiple meanings of words
Essay: Written Response
Identify the multiple meanings of words
Essay: Written Response
Review of the eight parts of speech
Essay: Written Response
Definition of analogy; strategies for solving types of relationships; students
practice completing analogies
Improving vocabulary through synonyms
Improving vocabulary through antonyms
Recognizing homonyms
Using denotation and connotation to determine the context word meaning
Using denotation and connotation to determine the context word meaning
Using prefixes to determine word meaning
Using prefixes to determine word meaning
Using suffixes to determine word meaning
Using suffixes to determine word meaning
Essay: Written Response
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Narrative Writing
Written Response
Written Response
Written Response
Written Response
Written Response
Written Response
Written Response
Written Response
Expanding vocabulary through the study of common Latin and Greek roots
Essay: Written Response
Expanding vocabulary through the study of common Latin and Greek roots
Essay: Written Response
Expanding vocabulary through the study of common Latin and Greek roots
Essay: Written Response
Expanding vocabulary through the study of common Latin and Greek roots
Essay: Research
Strategies for critical recognition of small words in larger words, using context,
prefixes, suffixes, and roots
Words borrowed from names and places
Foreign terms that enrich and extend vocabularies
Foreign terms that enrich and extend vocabularies
Foreign phrases that enrich and extend vocabularies
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
30
Written Response
Written Response
Written Response
Letter Writing
Building Vocabulary VII
Grade Level 7
26
27
28
29
Lesson Title
Foreign Phrases 2
Core Word
Vocabulary 1
Core Word
Vocabulary 2
Core Word
Vocabulary 3
30
Test Strategies
31
Sounds for Y
Vowel Diphthong
Review
Vowel Clusters
Review 1
Vowel Clusters
Review 2
Vowel Clusters
Review 3
Vowel Clusters
Review 4
32
33
34
35
36
37
R Controlled Vowels
38
Short Vowel Review
39
Two Sounds for C
40
Two Sounds for G
41
Two Sounds for S
42
43
Consonants
Initial Blends Review
Final Consonant
Blends 1
44
Lesson Content
Foreign phrases that enrich and extend vocabularies
Promoting vocabulary growth through the identification of core vocabulary
words in social science, including geography, history, economics, anthropology,
sociology, and civics
Promoting vocabulary growth through the identification of core vocabulary
words in art, music, and language arts
Promoting vocabulary growth through the identification of core vocabulary
words in math, science, and computers
Test taking strategies, multiple choice; true/false; reading comprehension
vocabulary
Sounds for ending y; students identify /y/ sound in words
Essay: Written Response
Diphthongs; students complete words using correct Diphthongs
Essay: Activity
Use of vowel, consonant, vowel to create long /a/ or /e/ vowel sound; silent
letters; students identify long /a/ or long /e/ words
Use of vowel, consonant, vowel to create long /i/, long /o/, or long /u/ vowel
sound; silent letters; students identify long /i/, or long /o/ or long /u/ words
Review of sounds made by /oo/; students identify /oo/ sounds in words
Review of sounds made by /ow/, /au/, and /aw/; students identify /ow/, /au/,
and /aw sounds in words
Review of /er/ and /or/ sounds: students complete words using correct /ar/,
/er/, /ir/, /ur/, and /or/ spelling
Students identify short vowel words
Hard c and soft c explained; examples of words containing both sounds;
students identify hard and soft c in words
Hard g and soft g explained; examples of words containing both sounds;
students identify hard and soft g in words
Examples of ending s having the /z/ sound; students identify words with
different sounds of s
Students place consonants at the beginning or end of words
Definition and review of consonant blends using l, r, tw, and the s combination
Review of ending blends ld, lt., nd, nt, and nk; students complete words using
the correct consonant blend
31
Essays & Media
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Narrative Writing
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Activity
Essay: Letter Writing
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Building Vocabulary VII
Grade Level 7
45
46
Lesson Title
Final Consonant
Blends 2
Initial 3-Letter
Blends
47
Silent Letters
48
The Sound of /ph/
Lesson Content
Review of ending blends ct, st, sk, rm, and rn
Examples of words having scr, spr, spl, squ, sch, and thr; students complete
words with the correct blends
Introduction of words that use silent letters (kn, wr, and gn); Students
complete words with the correct sounds
Review of the /f/ sound made by ph; students complete words using the
correct spelling
32
Essays & Media
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Building Vocabulary VIII
Grade Level 8
1
2
3
4
5
6
Lesson Title
Dictionary Skills
Thesaurus
Etymology
Multiple Meaning
Words 1
Multiple Meaning
Words 2
Parts of Speech
Review
7
Analogies
8
9
Synonyms
Antonyms
Homonyms/
Homographs
Words in Context 1
Words in Context 2
Prefixes 1
Prefixes 2
Suffixes 1
Suffixes 2
Latin and Greek
Roots 1
Latin and Greek
Roots 2
Latin and Greek
Roots 3
Latin and Greek
Roots 4
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Word Recognition
22
23
24
What’s in a Word?
Foreign Terms 1
Foreign Terms 2
Lesson Content
How to use a dictionary, parts of the dictionary, and dictionary entry
How to use a thesaurus as a resource to find similar word meanings
The history or origin of words, the origin of words as listed in a dictionary entry
Essays & Media
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Research
Essay: Research
Identify the multiple meanings of words
Essay: Written Response
Identify the multiple meanings of words
Essay: Written Response
Review of the eight parts of speech
Essay: Written Response
Definition of analogy, strategies for solving types of relationships, students
practice completing analogies
Improving vocabulary through synonyms
Improving vocabulary through antonyms
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Recognizing homonyms and homographs
Essay: Written Response
Using
Using
Using
Using
Using
Using
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
denotation and connotation to determine the context word meaning
denotation and connotation to determine the context word meaning
prefixes to determine word meaning
prefixes to determine word meaning
suffixes to determine word meaning
suffixes to determine word meaning
Written Response
Written Response
Activity
Written Response
Activity
Narrative Writing
Expanding vocabulary through the study of common Latin and Greek roots
Essay: Letter Writing
Expanding vocabulary through the study of common Latin and Greek roots
Essay: Narrative Writing
Expanding vocabulary through the study of common Latin and Greek roots
Essay: Written Response
Expanding vocabulary through the study of common Latin and Greek roots
Essay: Written Response
Strategies for critical recognition of small words in larger words, using context,
prefixes, suffixes, and roots
Words borrowed from names and places
Foreign terms that enrich and extend vocabularies
Foreign terms that enrich and extend vocabularies
33
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Research
Essay: Narrative Writing
Essay: Written Response
Building Vocabulary VIII
Grade Level 8
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
Lesson Title
Foreign Phrases 1
Foreign Phrases 2
Core Word
Vocabulary 1
Core Word
Vocabulary 2
Core Word
Vocabulary 3
Testing Vocabulary
Vowel Diphthong
Review
Vowel Clusters
Review 1
Vowel Clusters
Review 2
Vowel Clusters
Review 3
35
R Controlled Vowels
36
Short Vowel Review
37
Two Sounds for C
38
Two Sounds for G
39
Two Sounds for S
40
41
42
43
Initial/Final
Consonants
Initial Blends
Final Consonant
Blends 1
Final Consonant
Blends 2
Lesson Content
Foreign phrases that enrich and extend vocabularies
Foreign phrases that enrich and extend vocabularies
Promoting vocabulary growth through the identification of core vocabulary
words in social science, including geography, history, economics, anthropology,
sociology, and civics
Promoting vocabulary growth through the identification of core vocabulary
words in art, music, and language arts
Promoting vocabulary growth through the identification of core vocabulary
words in math, science, and computers
Test taking strategies
Diphthongs, digraphs; students complete words using correct vowel
combinations
Use of vowel, consonant, vowel to create long /a/, /e/, /i/, and /u/ vowel
sound; silent letters; students identify long /a/, /e/, /i/, and /u/ words
Review of sounds made by /oo/; students identify /oo/ sounds in words
Review of sounds made by /au/ and /aw/; students identify /au/ and /aw
sounds in words
Review of /er/ and /or/ sounds: students complete words using correct /ar/,
/er/, /ir/, /ur/, and /or/ spelling
Students identify short vowel words
Hard c and soft c explained; examples of words containing both sounds;
students identify hard and soft c in words
Hard g and soft g explained; examples of words containing both sounds;
students identify hard and soft g in words
Examples of ending s having the /z/ sound; students identify words with
different sounds of s
Essays & Media
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Letter Writing
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Research
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Activity
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Activity
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Narrative Writing
Students place consonants at the beginning or end of words
Essay: Activity
Definition and review of consonant blends using l, r, tw, and the s combination
Review of ending blends ld, lt, nd, nt and nk; students complete words using
the correct consonant blend
Essay: Narrative Writing
Review of ending blends ct, st, sk, rm, and rn
Essay: Narrative Writing
34
Essay: Written Response
Building Vocabulary VIII
Grade Level 8
44
45
Lesson Title
Initial/Final Digraphs
Initial 3-Letter
Blends
46
Silent Letters 1
47
Silent Letters 2
48
The sound of Ph
Lesson Content
Review of digraphs; students complete words using sh, ch, wh, and th
Examples of words having scr, spr, spl, squ, sch, and thr; students complete
words with the correct blends
Introduction of words that use silent letters kn, wr, and gn; Students complete
words with the correct sounds
Introduction of words that use silent letters gh, lk, rh, sc, and tl; Students
complete words with the correct sounds
Review of the /f/ sound made by ph; students complete words using the
correct spelling
35
Essays & Media
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Language Usage I - VIII
Grade Levels 1– 8
A+LS Language Usage I - VIII introduces students to a
variety of topics including:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
extensive tutorial and instructional narration in
grade levels 1-3
identification and correct use of nouns, verbs,
modifiers, and the other parts of speech
sentence construction
identifying sentence parts including simple and
complex subjects and predicates, verbs, and
phrases
sentence diagramming
identification of grammar pitfalls including
subject/verb disagreement, tense shifts, double
negatives, fragments and run-on sentences
parallelism
misused words
sentence mechanics
capitalization guidelines
writing dialogue
punctuation for periods, commas, colons, and other
marks
punctuation for outlines
business and friendly letters
poetry
direct and indirect quotations
36
Language Usage
Grade Levels I - VIII
The A+LS™ Language Usage courses are comprehensive, integrated grammar courses for grade levels 1-8. This program directs
students beginning with early grades in the proper use of the spoken and written English language. Language Usage I, II, and
III have tutorial and instructional voice support. A sequence of eight titles provides an extensive e-learning solution ideal for
schools that want to use technology to improve their instructional process. Each Language Usage title offers tutoring in the use
the English language through lessons that focus on each part of speech.
•
Language Usage is presented as a collection of
year-long courses.
•
All lessons contain a study guide, a practice and
mastery test, and an essay or constructed
response.
•
Lessons include a variety of essay types such as
descriptive, persuasive, expository, and letter
writing.
•
These courses are certified by MetaMetrics® with a
Lexile® score.
•
The A+LS program consists of an Internet-based
instructional management system with student
assessment tools built in, and educators can test
students on national, state, district, or local
objectives because any set of standards can be added to the system.
37
Language Usage
Grade Levels I - VIII
•
The content in these courses is designed to meet and exceed the requirements of the National Council of Teachers of
English (NCTE) for the Standards of English Language Arts.
•
Students learn to identify and correctly use nouns, verbs, modifiers, and the other parts of speech.
•
Students learn the importance of sentence construction and identifying sentence parts including simple and complex
subjects and predicates, verbs, and phrases.
•
Sentence mechanics are addressed in each title.
•
Students learn simple capitalization rules and guidelines for capitalization, underlining, and writing dialogue.
•
Punctuation lessons offer guidelines for using periods, commas, colons, and other marks, and punctuation for outlines,
business and friendly letters, poetry, and direct and indirect quotations.
•
An Internet connection is not required for completion of this course but may be useful for students who wish to pursue
further learning opportunities in Language Usage.
38
Language Usage
Grade Levels I - VIII
The Language Usage courses develop skills in practical
situations by utilizing a Four-Step Approach: Study Guide,
Practice Test, Mastery Test, and Essay modules are used
to define the instructional environment.
•
The Study Guide module provides a text- and
graphics-based delivery of material that is
reinforced by pictures and diagrams supported by a
wealth of content. Study Guides teach the concepts
and skills associated with each lesson. A number of
the Study Guide pages have specific, interactive
feedback that will assist the student in solving
problems or understanding concepts.
•
The Practice Test module allows the student to
practice skills learned in the Study Guide section.
The student has instant access to the study
material for reference.
•
In the Mastery Test module, the student takes a scored examination, electronically submits the test, and the results are
recorded in the A+LS Management System.
•
The Essay module allows the student to compose individual, free-form answers to a wide variety of questions and
problems.
39
Language Usage I
Grade Level 1
1
2
Lesson Title
Nouns 1
Nouns 2
3
Nouns 3
4
Nouns 4
5
Verbs 1
6
Verbs 2
7
Verbs 3
8
Verbs 4
9
Verbs 5
10
Conjunctions
11
Adjectives 1
12
Adjectives 2
13
Grammar 1
14
Grammar 2
15
16
Grammar
Improvements 1
Grammar
Improvements 2
17
Word Application
18
Capitalization 1
Lesson Content
Definition and use of nouns; students locate nouns in sentences
Students learn how to identify singular nouns in sentences
Review of singular nouns; introduction of plural nouns; adding -s and -es to
form plurals in nouns
Definition and examples of common and proper nouns; students find proper
nouns in sentences
Introduction of verbs; definition of verbs; the job of the verb to tell what the
subject does; students find verbs in sentences
Definition of contractions; the formation of contractions; the use of not in
contractions
Review of verbs; introduction of tenses; examples of present and past tense
verbs
Singular and plural verbs; the importance of subject and verb agreement
Review of verbs; how to find a verb in a sentence; identifying present and past
tense verbs
Definition and examples of conjunctions; how conjunctions join sentence parts
and words
Introduction to adjectives as words that describe; students practice finding
adjectives in sentences
Review of adjectives; introduction to comparison in adjectives; adding -er and
-est to form comparative forms of adjectives
Review of nouns and verbs; students identify nouns and verbs in sentences
with the use of picture prompts
Review of singular and plural nouns; singular and plural verbs; subject/verb
agreement
Identifying double negatives; review of contractions and the use of not in
contractions; identifying double negatives in sentences
Review of sentence definition; students find the complete subject in sentences
Recognize that words represent ideas, experiences, objects, events, and
actions; naming and describing action words; how we use words to
communicate
Identify upper and lower case letters; using capital letters with the first word in
a sentence; capitalizing the pronoun I
40
Essays & Media
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Language Usage I
Grade Level 1
Lesson Title
19
Capitalization 2
20
Punctuation
21
Sentences 1
22
Sentences 2
23
Sentences 3
24
Sentences 4
25
Sentences 5
26
Sentences 6
27
Sentences 7
28
Sentences 8
29
Abbreviations
30
Alphabetical Order
32
Noun and Verb
Review
Punctuation Review
33
Contractions Review
31
Lesson Content
Capitalize proper nouns; names of people, places, months, and days of the
week
Punctuation at the end of declarative, imperative, interrogative and
exclamatory sentences (.? !)
Introduction of sentence definition; how we use sentences to communicate;
write stories; review of complete sentences
Review of nouns and verbs; the use of nouns and verbs in a sentence; the
importance of word order in sentences
Review of complete sentences; use of capital letters and punctuation marks;
the importance of complete thoughts in sentences
Finding complete sentences; students identify and correct incomplete
sentences
Introduction to sentences that tell; the correct use of punctuation end marks in
telling sentences
Introduction to sentences that command; the correct use of punctuation end
marks in command sentences
Introduction to sentences that show feeling; the correct use of punctuation end
marks in sentences that show feeling
Introduction to sentences that ask; the correct use of punctuation end marks in
asking sentences
Definition and examples of abbreviations; the use of abbreviations;
abbreviating months, titles, days of the week; using capital letters with
abbreviations
How to alphabetize words; using the dictionary to determine alphabetical
order; examples of alphabetical order; students place words in alphabetical
order
Review of nouns and verbs including common and proper nouns; finding the
verbs in a sentence
Review of when to use capital letters and punctuation marks
Review of rules for forming contractions; the use of the apostrophe in
contractions
41
Essays & Media
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Activity
Essay: Activity
Essay: Activity
Language Usage II
Grade Level 2
Lesson Title
1
Nouns 1
2
Nouns 2
3
Nouns 3
4
Nouns 4
5
Nouns 5
6
Verbs 1
7
Verbs 2
8
Verbs 3
9
Verbs 4
10
Verbs 5
11
Verbs 6
12
Verbs 7
13
Verbs 8
14
Verbs 9
15
Verbs 10
16
Verbs 11
17
Special Verbs 1
Lesson Content
Definition of nouns as people, places, animals, and things; finding nouns in
sentences; counting nouns in sentences
Definition of singular and plural nouns; students identify and use singular and
plural nouns in sentences
Definition of common and proper nouns; differences between common nouns
and proper nouns; students identify common and proper nouns
Students learn to identify and use nouns as sentence subjects; nouns in
sentences
Definition and examples of compound words; students identify compound
words in sentences
Definition and use of verbs; students recognize verbs in sentences
Definition and examples of verbs in present and past tense; understanding the
difference between action that is happening and action that has already
happened
Identification of contractions; using contractions in sentences; finding the
words that can form contractions
Definition of singular and plural; subject/verb agreement in sentences; singular
and plural verb forms
Introduction to regular and irregular verbs; examples of how regular and
irregular verbs form their past tenses; adding -ed to form tense; words that
have a different word for past tense
Identification and examples of helping verbs; using helping verbs with present
and past tense verbs
Identification and examples of linking verbs; how linking verbs link nouns to
describing words
Identifying main verbs and helping verbs in sentences; the job of the main
verb and the helping verb in a sentence
Definition of verb tense; students learn to add -ed and -ing to words; changing
the spelling of a word before adding -ed and –ing
Students identify and use verbs that show action
Students learn how to add endings to words that end in y; changing the
spelling of words ending in y
Introduction to the irregular verb be; forms of be including is, are, was, were
42
Essays & Media
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Illustration
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Language Usage II
Grade Level 2
Lesson Title
18
Special Verbs 2
19
Special Verbs 3
20
Conjunctions
21
Pronouns 1
22
Pronouns 2
23
Pronouns 3
24
Pronouns 4
25
Pronouns 5
26
Pronouns 6
27
Grammar 1
28
Grammar 2
29
Grammar 3
30
Word Application
31
Adjectives
32
Adverbs
Grammar
Improvements 1
33
Lesson Content
Students use forms of do, including did, does, and done, correctly in
sentences; students learn which forms of do are used with singular and plural
words
Students identify and use forms of have including: has, had, and have;
students learn how to use forms of have with singular and plural nouns and in
past and present tense
Identification and examples of conjunctions; students correctly use
conjunctions in sentences
Pronoun definition and examples; correctly identify and use pronouns in a
sentence; pronouns for first, second, and third person
Definition and examples of nominative or naming case pronouns; using
pronouns as the subject of sentences
Definition of object pronouns; students determine if pronoun is naming or
object; students correctly use object pronouns in sentences
Definition of possession; examples of pronouns that show possession;
possessive case pronouns
Identification and use of personal singular and plural pronouns
The importance of naming self last in writing, speaking, and in a series of
words; identifying self in first and third person
Singular and plural nouns; nouns that change from singular to plural by adding
-s; nouns that use a different word to indicate plurality; nouns that have the
same form in both singular and plural
Rules for spelling when forming plurals; importance of subject/verb agreement
Rules for forming possessive nouns; adding –‘s to show possession; rules for
showing possession with words that end with -ed, -s, and the /z/ sound
Recognize that words represent ideas, experiences, objects, events, and
actions; naming and describing action words; identify incomplete and complete
sentences
Definition of an adjective; describing words; students recognize and use
adjectives in a sentence
Definition of an adverb; recognize and use adverbs in a sentence
Definition and examples of articles; correctly using a and an; using articles as
specific or general indicators
43
Essays & Media
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Activity
Essay: Written Response
Language Usage II
Grade Level 2
36
Lesson Title
Grammar
Improvements 2
Grammar
Improvements 3
Capitalization 1
37
Capitalization 2
38
39
Capitalization 3
Punctuation 1
40
Punctuation 2
41
42
43
44
Punctuation 3
Punctuation 4
Sentences 1
Sentences 2
34
35
Lesson Content
Definition of a negative; examples of negative words; identifying double
negatives
Essays & Media
Essay: Written Response
Definition of a predicate; students identify subjects and predicates
Essay: Written Response
Capitalizing first words in sentences
Recognizing proper nouns, capitalizing titles and initials, greetings and closings
of letters, and abbreviations
Family titles and greeting; closing of a letter
Punctuation at the end of declarative, imperative and asking sentences
Directions for addressing envelopes for friendly letters; the mailing address
and the return address
Using a comma after introductory words
Using a colon to write the time of day
Word order and definition of a sentence; introduction to sequence
Simple and compound sentences; complete and fragment sentences
Essay: Written Response
44
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Written
Written
Written
Written
Response
Response
Response
Response
Language Usage III
Grade Level 3
1
2
3
4
Lesson Title
Nouns 1
Nouns 2
Nouns 3
Nouns 4
5
Verbs 1
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Verbs 2
Verbs 3
Verbs 4
Verbs 5
Verbs 6
Verbs 7
Verbs 8
Verbs 9
Verbs 10
15
Verbs 11
16
17
Verbs 12
Conjunctions
18
Pronouns 1
19
20
21
22
23
Pronouns 2
Pronouns 3
Pronouns 4
Pronouns 5
Capitalization 1
24
Capitalization 2
25
26
Punctuation 1
Punctuation 2
27
Punctuation 3
Lesson Content
Definition and use of nouns; students locate nouns in sentences
Singular nouns
Plural nouns
Common and proper nouns
Definition and use of verbs; identify verbs and verb usage in sentences;
regular verbs; action verbs; colorful and tricky verbs
The tenses; present tense verbs
Past tense verbs
Verb phrases; helping and auxiliary verbs; auxiliary verbs
Main verbs and helping verbs; verb phrases
Linking verbs; forms of be
Irregular verbs; forms of do; forms of have
Transitive verbs; direct objects
Intransitive verbs; predicate adjectives
Review of transitive and intransitive verbs
Contractions; how contractions are formed; the apostrophe that replaces
letters omitted
Negatives and double negatives; adverbs and adjectives
Correctly use conjunctions in sentences
Definitions of pronouns; correctly identify a pronoun in a sentence; pronoun
case forms; pronoun usage; correctly substitute nouns for pronouns; singular
and plural pronouns
Nominative case pronouns; subjective pronouns
Objective case pronouns
Possessive case pronouns; personal pronouns
The tradition of naming self last
Capitalizing common and proper nouns: first word in sentence
Capitalizing titles of books, newspapers, reports, songs, letters, and television
shows
At the end of declarative sentences; at the end of imperative sentences
Using question marks and exclamation marks
Introductory words, phrases, or clauses; the use of punctuation with
appositives; the use of a comma after introductory words
45
Essays & Media
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Written
Written
Written
Written
Written
Written
Written
Written
Written
Response
Response
Response
Response
Response
Response
Response
Response
Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Written
Written
Written
Written
Written
Response
Response
Response
Response
Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Language Usage III
Grade Level 3
28
Lesson Title
Punctuation 4
29
Punctuation 5
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
Sentences
Sentences
Sentences
Sentences
Sentences
Sentences
Sentences
Adjectives
Adjectives
Adjectives
Adverbs
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
3
Lesson Content
Punctuation of items in a series
The use of an apostrophe to show possession; identify need to punctuate with
apostrophes and in contractions
Sentence definition; complete sentences; sentence fragments
Word order of sentences
Definition and examples of run-on sentences
Simple and compound sentences; the use of a comma in a compound sentence
Declarative sentences; interrogative sentences
Imperative sentences; exclamatory sentences
Subjects and predicates
Adjectives; tricky words such as: may/can, should/would, and good/well
How adjectives make sentences more colorful; students identify adjectives
Adjectives as articles
Definition and examples of adverbs
46
Essays & Media
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Written
Written
Written
Written
Written
Written
Written
Written
Written
Written
Written
Response
Response
Response
Response
Response
Response
Response
Response
Response
Response
Response
Language Usage IV
Grade Level 4
1
2
3
Lesson Title
Nouns 1
Nouns 2
Nouns 3
4
Pronouns 1
5
Pronouns 2
6
Pronouns 3
7
8
Pronouns 4
Verbs 1
9
Verbs 2
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Verbs 3
Verbs 4
Verbs 5
Verbs 6
Verbs 7
Contractions
Conjunctions
17
Adjectives 1
18
20
21
22
23
Articles
Prepositional
Phrases
Adjectives 2
Adverbs 1
Adverbs 2
Adverbs 3
24
Prepositions
25
26
27
Interjections
Sentences 1
Sentences 2
19
Lesson Content
Definition and use of nouns
Identification of singular and plural nouns; spelling changes in forming plurals
Identification of common and proper nouns
Definitions of pronouns; correctly identify a pronoun in a sentence; subject and
object pronouns
Nominative case pronouns
Pronouns in compound subjects and objects; personal pronouns; subject
pronouns
Possessive nouns and pronouns
Definition and use of action verbs; identify verbs and verb usage in sentences
Verbs, present tense verbs, and past tense verbs; past participles; regular and
irregular verbs
Linking verbs
Main and helping verbs
Transitive and intransitive verbs
Tricky verbs
Forms of be, do, and have
Definition, formation, and use of contractions
Definition and use of conjunctions
Adjective definition; proper adjectives; predicate adjectives; demonstrative
adjectives
Identification and correct use of articles; general and specific articles
Essays & Media
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Narrative Writing
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Narrative Writing
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Written Response
Written Response
Narrative Writing
Written Response
Written Response
Letter Writing
Letter Writing
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Prepositional phrases used as adjectives
Essay: Written Response
Positive, comparative, and superlative degrees of comparison in adjectives
Adverb definition and use
Using prepositional phrases as adverbs
Comparative and superlative forms of adverbs
Identify and correctly use prepositions; object of the preposition; prepositional
phrases
Identify and correctly use words that express strong feelings
Sentence definition; identifying subjects and predicates
Complete sentences; run-on sentences; sentence fragments
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
47
Written Response
Written Response
Written Response
Letter Writing
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Language Usage IV
Grade Level 4
Lesson Title
28
Sentences 3
29
30
32
Sentences 4
Sentences 5
Subject/Verb
Agreement
Parts of Speech
33
Problem Words
34
35
36
Capitalization 1
Capitalization 2
Capitalization 3
37
Capitalization 4
38
39
40
Punctuation 1
Punctuation 2
Punctuation 3
41
Punctuation 4
42
43
Punctuation 5
Punctuation 6
44
Punctuation 7
45
Parallelism
46
Modifiers
47
Grammar
Improvements
31
Lesson Content
Simple and compound sentences; using a semi-colon in punctuating compound
sentences
Declarative, imperative, exclamatory, and interrogative sentences
Diagramming sentences
Essays & Media
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Narrative Writing
Importance of subject/verb agreement
Essay: Written Response
Recognize and use the eight parts of speech in sentences
Recognize and correctly use words such as: accept, except; affect, effect; are,
our; its, it’s; your, you’re; bad, badly; good, well; real, really; beside, besides;
from, off; in, into
Punctuation and capitalization of abbreviations at the beginning of sentences
Punctuation and capitalization of family titles, initials, and personal pronouns
Capitalization in outlines
Punctuation and capitalization of titles; underlining; capitalization in
quotations; capitalization in book, magazine, and television show titles
Using punctuation in direct quotes and dialogue
Punctuation at the end of imperative and declarative sentences
Punctuation in interrogative and exclamatory sentences
Punctuation and capitalization of dates, cities, states, greetings, and closing of
letters
Use of colons in business letters; in writing time; how to write a list
The use of punctuation with appositives
The use of commas in bibliographies, in lists, and with introductory words; the
use of the semi-colon with commas
Making a series of items; words and phrases follow a pattern; using the same
verb form to create parallelism
Identify the correct placement of modifiers in sentences; identifying and
avoiding misplaced modifiers
Essay: Activity
Avoiding unnecessary shifts in tense
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Letter Writing
Essay: Letter Writing
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Narrative Writing
48
Language Usage V
Grade Level 5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Lesson Title
Nouns 1
Nouns 2
Nouns 3
Nouns 4
Nouns 5
Verbs 1
Verbs 2
Verbs 3
Verbs 4
Verbs 5
Verbs 6
12
Pronouns 1
13
14
Pronouns 2
Pronouns 3
15
Punctuation 1
16
17
18
19
Punctuation
Punctuation
Punctuation
Punctuation
20
Punctuation 6
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
Punctuation 7
Adjectives 1
Adjectives 2
Adverbs 1
Adverbs 2
Prepositions 1
Prepositions 2
Interjections
Direct Objects
2
3
4
5
Lesson Content
Definition and use of nouns
Singular and plural nouns
Common and proper nouns; rules of capitalization of nouns
Possessive nouns; rules of punctuation of nouns
Review of plural and possessive forms of nouns
Definition and use of verbs; present, past and future tense of verbs
Irregular verb forms of be, do and have
Contractions; punctuation of contractions
Main and helping verbs; usage of may and can, and would and could
Action and linking verbs; helping verbs
Transitive verbs; intransitive verbs
Definitions of pronouns; correctly identify a pronoun in a sentence; subject and
object pronouns; antecedents
Subjective (nominative); objective and possessive case pronouns
Correctly substitute nouns for pronouns
Using end marks; capitalization and punctuation of declarative, imperative,
exclamatory, and interrogative sentences
Punctuating abbreviations, initials, titles, and capitalization
Punctuating dates, greetings and closing of letters, and addresses
The use of punctuation with appositives
Punctuation of bibliographic references and outlines; capitalization rules
Use a colon to write the time of day and after the salutation in a business
letter; the use of a colon before a list; commas in series and with introductory
words
Punctuation of quotes and dialog; capitalization rules
Adjective definition; proper adjectives
Using comparative and superlative forms; adjective intensifiers
Adverb definition and use; negative adverbs; adverb intensifiers
Comparative and superlative intensifiers; irregular adverbs
Definition of prepositions and prepositional phrases; objects of prepositions
Modifiers; adjectives and adverbs
Identify and correctly use words that express strong feelings
Correctly identify and use direct objects
49
Essays & Media
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Narrative Writing
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Narrative Writing
Essay: Narrative Writing
Essay: Interview
Essay: Narrative Writing
Essay: Written Response
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Letter Writing
Letter Writing
Narrative Writing
Written Response
Essay: Letter Writing
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Narrative Writing
Written Response
Written Response
Letter Writing
Written Response
Narrative Writing
Narrative Writing
Written Response
Written Response
Language Usage V
Grade Level 5
30
31
32
33
Lesson Title
Grammar
Improvements 1
Grammar
Improvements 2
Grammar
Improvements 3
Grammar
Improvements 4
34
Sentences 1
35
36
37
38
39
41
Sentences 2
Sentences 3
Sentences 4
Sentences 5
Conjunctions
Subject/Verb
Agreement
Parts of Speech
42
Problem Words
43
Parallelism
44
Word Application
45
Capitalization
40
Lesson Content
Essays & Media
Avoiding unnecessary shifts in tense
Essay: Written Response
Identify incorrect usage of articles
Essay: Journal Writing
Identifying double negatives
Essay: Written Response
Identifying subjects and predicates
Essay: Written Response
Sentence definition; complete sentences; run-on sentences; sentence
fragments; word order of sentences
Simple and compound sentences
Declarative, imperative, exclamatory and interrogative sentences
Diagramming simple and compound sentences
Applying diagramming to sentences
Correctly use conjunctions in sentences
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Recognize and use correct subject/verb agreement
Essay: Written Response
Recognize and use the eight parts of speech in sentences
Recognize and correctly use words such as: accept, except; affect, effect; are,
our; its, it’s; your, you’re; bad, badly; good, well; real, really; beside, besides;
from, off; in, into
Making a series of items; words and phrases follow a pattern
Recognize that words represent ideas, experiences, objects, events, and
actions; naming and describing action words
Review of capitalization rules
Essay: Activity
50
Essay: Narrative Writing
Written Response
Written Response
Written Response
Diagram
Written Response
Essay: Activity
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Narrative Writing
Essay: Written Response
Language Usage VI
Grade Level 6
1
Lesson Title
Nouns 1
2
Nouns 2
3
4
Pronouns 1
Pronouns 2
5
Pronouns 3
6
Pronouns 4
7
8
Verbs 1
Verbs 2
9
Verbs 3
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Verbs 4
Verbs 5
Verbs 6
Verbs 7
Adjectives 1
Adjectives 2
Adjectives 3
17
Adverbs 1
18
19
20
Adverbs 2
Prepositions 1
Prepositions 2
21
Conjunctions
22
Interjections
Parts of Speech
Review
Sentences 1
Sentences 2
Sentences 3
23
24
25
26
Lesson Content
Definition and use of common, proper, concrete, abstract and compound nouns
Singular, plural, and possessive nouns; how to avoid confusing possessives and
plurals
Pronouns and antecedent definition and examples
Subject and object pronouns
Subject nouns and pronouns; object pronouns; compound subjects; compound
direct objects
Review of pronouns and antecedents; singular and plural pronouns and
antecedents
Action, linking, and state-of-being verbs
Main verbs; helping verbs; verb phrases; contractions
Transitive and intransitive verbs; determining the difference between
intransitive and linking verbs
Principal parts; present, past, and future; present and past participles
Perfect tenses; regular verbs
Irregular verbs; past and past participle forms of irregular verbs
Easily confused verbs including: may/can, sit/set; lie/lay, and rise/raise
Articles; demonstrative; predicate adjective
Proper adjective; suffix endings
Degrees of comparison
Adverb questions (how, when, where, to what extent); modifies verbs,
adjectives, other adverbs
Degrees of comparison including positive and negative comparisons
Prepositions; objects; prepositional phrases
Adjectives and adverbs as prepositional phrases
Definition and use of conjunctions including conjunction pairs either/or,
neither/nor, and not only/but also
Definition and use of interjections
Essays & Media
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Activity
Essay: Narrative Writing
Essay: Letter Writing
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Narrative Writing
Essay: Narrative Writing
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Narrative Writing
Written Response
Activity
Written Response
Written Response
Research
Speech Writing
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Research
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Review and use of all eight parts of speech
Essay: Activity
Sentences; fragments; run-on sentences
Sentence types: declarative, imperative, interrogative, and exclamatory
Identifying simple and complete subjects, and predicates
Essay: Narrative Writing
Essay: Narrative Writing
Essay: Letter Writing
51
Language Usage VI
Grade Level 6
Lesson Title
27
Sentences 4
28
Sentences 5
29
30
Sentence Review
Diagramming
31
Mechanics 1
32
33
34
Mechanics 2
Mechanics 3
Mechanics 4
35
Mechanics 5
36
37
38
39
Mechanics
Mechanics
Mechanics
Mechanics
40
41
42
43
44
6
7
8
9
Mechanics 10
Easily Confused
Words
Double Negatives
Agreement
Parallelism
Lesson Content
Finding the subjects in imperative and exclamatory sentences; the understood
subject
Subject and predicate complements; subject and predicate adjectives; direct
objects
Review of all types of sentences; direct and indirect objects
Sentence diagramming
Capitalization of titles and initials; nouns of direct address; geographical
capitalization; capitalization in businesses and government
Rules for capitalization in titles and books; direct and indirect quotes; poetry
Business and friendly letter parts; capitalization and punctuation rules
Reports, outlines, and bibliographies; elements of research
Review of end mark punctuation; abbreviations of titles, streets, organizations,
etc., including acronyms
Commas with introductory words and appositives
Commas with dates, with abbreviations, and in a series
Commas with conjunctions and transitions as well as clauses
Use of quotation marks in writing dialogue
Guidelines for using colons in business letters and in writing time; using the
apostrophe
Homophones; word combinations then/than, beside/besides,
principle/principal, between/among, and good/well
Identifying double negatives; using not in contractions
Subject and verb agreement; compound subjects and verb agreement
Making a series of items; words and phrases follow a pattern
52
Essays & Media
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Letter Writing
Essay: Illustration
Essay: Diagram
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Letter Writing
Essay: Research
Essay: Written Response
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Written Response
Letter Writing
Narrative Writing
Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Letter Writing
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Language Usage VII
Grade Level 7
Lesson Title
1
The Writing Process
2
Parts of Speech
3
Nouns 1
4
Nouns 2
5
Verbs 1
6
7
8
Verbs 2
Verbs 3
Verbs 4
9
Verbs 5
10
Pronouns 1
11
Pronouns 2
12
Pronouns 3
13
Adjectives 1
14
Adjectives 2
15
Adverbs 1
16
Adverbs 2
17
Prepositions
18
Conjunctions
Lesson Content
Identification of pre-writing or brainstorming, drafting, editing, proofreading,
and publishing; common errors in writing
Recognize and use the eight parts of speech in sentences
Definition and use of nouns; nouns of direct address; using punctuation with
appositives and identify the noun that is renamed; common and proper nouns;
commonly used abstract nouns
Singular and plural nouns; identify need to punctuate using apostrophes; the
use of an apostrophe to show possession; identify and use words that show
plural and possessive forms
Definition and use of verbs; identify verb usage in sentences; regular, helping,
linking, main, auxiliary, irregular, action, colorful and tricky verbs
The verb tenses; verb conjugations; avoiding unnecessary shifts in tense
Transitive and intransitive verbs; active and passive voice
Progressive tense verbs
Use of complements; completers; direct and indirect objects; predicate
adjectives and predicate nominatives
Definitions of pronouns; correctly identify a pronoun in a sentence; direct and
indirect objects; predicate nominative; first, second, and third person pronouns
and their antecedents
Personal pronouns; correctly substitute nouns for pronouns; nominative and
objective case pronouns; possessive pronouns and compound personal
pronouns
Interrogative, demonstrative, relative, and indefinite pronouns
Adjective definition and use, proper adjectives, and predicate adjectives;
definite and indefinite articles
Forms of adjective comparison; adjective intensifiers; using comparative and
superlative forms of adjectives
Adverb definition and use; double negatives
Negative words and adverbs; adverb intensifiers; comparative and superlative
forms of adverbs; identify tricky adverbs
Using prepositional phrases as adverbs; using prepositional phrases as
adjectives; identify and correctly use prepositions; identify words modified by
prepositions and identify objects of prepositions
Correctly use conjunctions in sentences
53
Essays & Media
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Narrative Writing
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Language Usage VII
Grade Level 7
Lesson Title
19
Interjections
20
Sentences 1
21
Sentences 2
22
Sentences 3
23
Sentences 4
24
Sentences 5
25
Noun Clauses
26
Subject/Verb
Agreement
27
Verbals 1
28
Verbals 2
29
Verbals 3
30
Punctuation 1
31
Punctuation 2
32
Punctuation 3
33
Punctuation 4
34
Punctuation 5
35
Punctuation 6
Lesson Content
Identify and correctly use words that express strong feelings; using
punctuation with interjections
Sentence definition, word order of sentences, identifying subjects and
predicates; complete subjects and complete predicates; natural and inverted
word order
Complete sentences, sentence fragments, and run-on sentences; identify the
declarative, imperative, interrogative, and exclamatory sentences
Independent and dependent clauses; compound subjects and predicates;
conjunctions; coordinating conjunctions
Simple and compound sentence diagramming; parts of speech
Complex sentences; compound complex sentences; subordinate and
independent clauses; adverb and adjective clauses; compound-complex
sentences
Adjective clauses; the use of a comma after introductory words, phrases, or
clauses
Recognize and use correct subject/verb agreement; compound subject;
indefinite pronoun
Identify past and present participles; identify participial phrases; finding the
noun that is modified; using commas with participle phrases
Identify and determine the use of a gerund in a sentence (subject, direct
object, indirect object, appositive, object of a preposition)
Identify the adjective and adverb used as an infinitive; find the word modified,
determine the use of the infinitive in a sentence
The use of a comma in bibliographic references; the use of punctuation in
direct quotations; the use of abbreviations in measuring, initials, days of the
week, months of the year, and the states
Punctuation for appositives, introductory clauses, and nouns of direct address
Punctuation for quotations; writing dialogue; split quotations; indirect quotes;
titles of short works; quotations within quotations
Capitalization of businesses, geographic features, and days of the week
Capitalization of first word in a sentence and proper nouns; pronouns and titles
and initials; family titles, and greeting and closing of a letter; abbreviations
First word of direct quotations; how to capitalize direct quotes and titles; using
colons and hyphens
54
Essays & Media
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Diagram
Essay: Activity
Essay: Narrative Writing
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Narrative Writing
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Language Usage VII
Grade Level 7
Lesson Title
36
Punctuation 7
37
Word Usage
38
Parallelism
Lesson Content
First word of main topic and subtopic in an outline; titles of books, poems,
stories, reports, outlines, songs, magazine articles, and chapters
Recognize that words represent ideas, experiences, objects, events, and
actions; naming and describing action words; confusing and tricky words
Making a series of items; words and phrases follow a pattern
55
Essays & Media
Essay: Research
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Language Usage VIII
Grade Level 8
1
2
3
Lesson Title
Nouns 1
Nouns 2
Nouns 3
4
Pronouns
5
Verbs 1
6
Verbs 2
7
Verbs 3
8
Verbs 4
9
Verbs 5
10
Adjectives
11
Adverbs
Conjunction/
Interjection
Prepositions
Parts of Speech
Review
12
13
14
15
Sentences 1
16
17
Sentences 2
Sentences 3
18
Sentences 4
19
20
21
22
23
Sentence Types
Complements 1
Complements 2
Appositives
Pronoun Case
24
Verbals 1
Lesson Content
Definition and use of proper, common, abstract and concrete nouns
Singular nouns; plural nouns
Possessive nouns; plural and possessive nouns
Definition and use of personal, indefinite, interrogative, reflexive, intensive and
demonstrative pronouns
Definition and use of verbs; main and helping verbs; verb phrase; identify verb
usage in sentences
Action; linking verbs
Present, past, future tenses; present, past, and future perfect tenses; regular
and irregular verbs
Special verbs review of be, do and have; correct usage of may and can, and
would and could
Transitive verbs; intransitive verbs
Definition and use of comparative and superlative intensifiers; definite and
indefinite articles
Definition and use of comparative and superlative intensifiers
Definition and use of conjunctions; definition, use and punctuation of
interjections and interrupters; coordinating and correlative conjunctions
Definition and use of a prepositional phrase, adjective and adverb phrases
Recognize and use the eight parts of speech in sentences
Sentence definition; complete and simple subject; identify complete and simple
predicate
Identify complete, run-on, and fragment sentences
Declarative, imperative, exclamatory, and interrogative sentences
Recognize and use correct subject/verb agreement; compound subject;
indefinite pronoun; collective nouns
Identifying simple and compound sentences
Direct and indirect objects
Predicate nominatives and predicate adjectives
Identifying and punctuating appositives and nouns of direct address
Using subjective, objective, and possessive case pronouns
Identify and determine the use of a gerund in a sentence; subject, direct
object, indirect object, appositive, and object of a preposition
56
Essays & Media
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Narrative Writing
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Interview
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Narrative Writing
Essay: Activity
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Journal Writing
Essay: Narrative Writing
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Letter Writing
Written Response
Written Response
Written Response
Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Language Usage VIII
Grade Level 8
25
26
27
Lesson Title
Verbals 2
Verbals 3
Verbals Review
28
Clauses 1
29
Clauses 2
30
Clauses 3
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
Clauses Review
Diagramming 1
Diagramming 2
Capitalization
Punctuation 1
Punctuation 2
Punctuation 3
38
Punctuation 4
39
Quotations
40
Letter Writing
41
42
43
Outlining
Parallelism
Writing
44
Problem Words
45
Word Application
Lesson Content
Identify past and present participles; identify participial phrases
Identify the adjective and adverb used as an infinitive
Review of gerunds, participles, and infinitives
Identification and punctuation of adjective clauses; independent and dependent
clauses; restrictive and non-restrictive clauses
Identification and punctuation of adverb clauses; independent and dependent
clauses; restrictive and non-restrictive clauses
Identification and punctuation of noun clauses; independent and dependent
clauses; restrictive and non-restrictive clauses
Review of adjective, adverb, and noun clauses
Diagramming simple and compound sentences
Diagramming compound and compound-complex sentences
First word in a sentence; proper nouns and pronouns; personal titles
Use of the parentheses; dash and hyphen
Commas in dates, series, introductory words, and compound sentences
End marks of sentences; abbreviations and initials
Use of a colon; using a semi-colon with conjunctive adverbs to separate
compound sentences
Punctuation and capitalization in direct quotations
Letter format; capitalization and punctuation in the greeting and closing of a
letter
Capitalization and punctuation in outline and bibliographic reference
Making a series of items; words and phrases follow a pattern
Recognizing tense and point of view shift
Recognize and correctly use words such as: accept, except; affect, effect; are,
our; its, it’s; your, you’re; bad, badly; good, well; real, really; beside, besides;
from, off; in, into; between, among; bring, take; fewer, less; like, as; who,
whom; imply, infer; and exact, exactly
Recognize that words represent ideas, experiences, objects, events, and
actions; naming and describing action words; writing style, choice of words,
slang, colloquialisms, and informal language
57
Essays & Media
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Activity
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Activity
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Written Response
Diagram
Diagram
Narrative Writing
Research
Narrative Writing
Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Letter Writing
Essay: Research
Essay: Narrative Writing
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Letter Writing
Learning Letter Sounds
Grade Level Kindergarten
A+LS Learning Letter Sounds introduces students to the
following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
letters in order of their frequency of use as well as
in alphabetic order
the letters o,s,t,a,r,e, that appear in 50% of words
in the English language
the letters n,i,l,u,c,p, that complete learning of 80%
of the letters in the English language
vowel combination with consonants
letter pairs for ease of learning
matching letters
identifying letters
recalling letters from memory
letters in the context of words in which the name of
the letter is actually heard, e.g., /a/ in able, /n/ in
end
letter learning in initial, medial, and final positions
learning the sound-symbol relationships of letters
logical and systematic transition from speech to
print
initial consonants
digraphs
blends
common phonograms
use of comparison and contrast, transfer, analogy,
and onset-rime
sound within the context of whole words
58
Learning Letter Sounds™
Grade Level K
A+LS™ Learning Letter Sounds (LLS) is designed expressly for kindergartners or individuals who have no reading skills. LLS is
designed to teach learners the names and sounds of the letters of the alphabet and do more to prepare them for reading
instruction at a higher level. The instructional system is made up of a series of lesson clusters, consisting of three instructional
lessons and a cumulative review.
In addition, the total experience exposes learners to a wide range of concepts that enhance language development. English
language learners will come away with a greatly expanded vocabulary. This program has a long history of success in helping
children learn to read.
•
Lessons contain a pretest, instruction, mastery test, and
cumulative review. All lessons are narrated to provide clear
instructions and phonetic pronunciation to students.
•
LLS is the re-release of a program originally designed by Dr.
Donald Durrell, one of the pioneers of modern research in
reading. It is based on principles identified by the National
Reading Panel, and incorporates phonemic awareness and
phonic instruction, focusing on the names and sounds of letters
and blending.
•
LLS provides extensive, individualized instruction designed for
mastery of the concepts being taught in an engaging
environment. The program is designed expressly for children
who do not yet read, and utilizes a greatly simplified interface.
59
Learning Letter Sounds™
Grade Level K
•
Vowels are combined with consonants, and letters are paired for ease of learning. Letter learning tasks vary in difficulty.
Tasks, from easier to more challenging, are: matching letters, identifying letters named, and recalling letters from
memory. Learning letter names in this manner does not preclude the necessity for also learning alphabetical order.
•
Letters are first introduced in the context of words in which the name of the letter is actually heard. Examples: letter /a/
in able, letter /n/ in end, and letter /i/ in ride. This technique utilizes the child’s mastery of oral language and logically
transfers that skill into an understanding of the alphabetic system.
•
Twenty-two of the twenty-six letters of the alphabet permit letter name-sound phonics; the names of only h, q, w, and y
do not contain their sounds. The letter name-sound process is used each time a new letter is introduced (with the
exception of h, q, w, and y). As each lesson progresses the student encounters the letters used in words in which the
letters do not say their names and in initial, medial, and final positions. Awareness of separate sounds in spoken words
has sequences of ease; letter name-sounds are easier to identify than phonemes; sounds at the beginning of words are
easier than at the end or middle of the word; larger clusters of sound, such as rhyming phonograms or syllables are
easier than smaller phonetic units.
•
After the student has mastered letter names, that knowledge is put to use learning the sound-symbol relationships of
those letters. The remaining fifty-two lessons are devoted to logically and systematically making the transition from
speech to print. Initial consonants, digraphs, and blends are presented first. These elements are blended with vowels
within common phonograms, employing comparison and contrast, transfer, analogy, onset-rime examples and other
effective instructional strategies. Sounds are never distorted by being presented in isolation. The student always hears
the sound within the context of whole words that appear with high frequency in the speaking vocabulary of primary-age
children.
•
An Internet connection is not required for completion of this course.
60
Learning Letter Sounds™
Grade Level K
•
Pretest - Each lesson starts with a pretest consisting of three test
items for each terminal objective in a lesson. Most lessons have two
terminal objectives and six pretest items per lesson, (the pattern is
three objectives in Lessons 49 through 69, but the ratio of 3:1
remains the same). If a student misses any pretest item, he or she
is automatically assigned the instructional component of that lesson.
If the student answers correctly on all items, he or she will move on
to the next pretest in the sequence, and the lesson will be
considered mastered.
•
Instruction - All lessons contain at least 74 instructional frames
that systematically present the selected content. As the student
progresses through each lesson, all responses are recorded by the
management system for teacher review.
•
Mastery Test - When the instructional component is completed, the mastery test is presented to the student. This test
has five items per objective. If the student responds correctly to four or more items (80%), the lesson will be considered
mastered, and the student will move on to the next lesson in the sequence. If 80% is not achieved, the lesson is
automatically repeated to provide the student additional reinforcement during the next session. The master criterion of
80% was determined by the scientific-based research of Dr. Durrell. Research showed that no less than 80% accuracy is
required for mastery at a level sufficient to assure ongoing learning and success. Alteration of the 80% criteria for
mastery is not recommended.
•
Cumulative Review - Every fourth lesson in Learning Letter Sounds is a cumulative review of the material taught in the
previous three lessons. The lessons are planned so that children who know the material move through the lesson
quickly, while those who need more instruction work through an easier and slower paced sequence.
61
Learning Letter Sounds
Grade Level K
Lesson Title
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
os, OS
at, AT
er, ER
Review
in, IN
ul, UL
cp, CP
Review
md, MD
hb, HB
yf, YF
Review
gv, GV
xw, XW
kz, KZ
qj, QJ
Review
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
/s/, /m/
/b/, /t/
/p/, /f/
Review
/r/, /d/
/c/, /n/
/h/, /l/
Review
/g/, /v/
/k/, / j/
/z/, /w/
Review
/y/, /q/
/ch/, /th/
/sh/, /wh/
Lesson Content
Introduction of Letter Names
Teaches recognition and names of the letters upper and lowercase o and s.
Teaches recognition and names of the letters upper and lowercase a and t.
Teaches recognition and names of the letters upper and lowercase e and r.
Review of lessons 1, 2, and 3
Teaches recognition and names of the letters upper and lowercase i and n
Teaches recognition and names of the letters upper and lowercase u and l
Teaches recognition and names of the letters upper and lowercase c and p
Review of lessons 5, 6, and 7
Teaches recognition and names of the letters upper and lowercase m and d
Teaches recognition and names of the letters upper and lowercase h and b
Teaches recognition and names of the letters upper and lowercase y and f
Review of lessons 9, 10, and 11
Teaches recognition and names of the letters upper and lowercase g and v
Teaches recognition and names of the letters upper and lowercase x and w
Teaches recognition and names of the letters upper and lowercase k and z
Teaches recognition and names of the letters upper and lowercase q and j
Review of lessons 13, 14, 15, and 16
Letter Sounds
Teaches recognition of the sounds made by the letters /s/ and /m/
Teaches recognition of the sounds made by the letters /b/ and /t/
Teaches recognition of the sounds made by the letters /p/ and /f/
Review of lessons 18, 19, and 20
Teaches recognition of the sounds made by the letters /r/ and /d/
Teaches recognition of the sounds made by the letters /c/ and /n/
Teaches recognition of the sounds made by the letters /h/ and /l/
Review of lessons 22, 23, and 24
Teaches recognition of the sounds made by the letters /g/ and /v/
Teaches recognition of the sounds made by the letters /k/ and /j/
Teaches recognition of the sounds made by the letters /z/ and /w/
Review of lessons 26, 27, and 28
Teaches recognition of the sounds made by the letters /y/ and /q/
Teaches recognition of the sounds made by the letters /ch/ and /th/
Teaches recognition of the sounds made by the letters /sh/ and /wh/
62
Learning Letter Sounds
Grade Level K
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
Lesson Title
Review
/sp/, /sl/
/sc/, /sm/
/st/, /sk/
Review
/sn/, /sq/
/sw/, /tw/
/br/, /tr/
Review
/gr/, /fr/
/dr/, /cr/
/pr/, /wr/
Review
/cl/, /bl/
/fl/, /pl/
/str/, /scr/
Review
/ay/, /ail/, /ain/
/ake/, /ave/, /ate/
/eat/, /ear/, /eep/
Review
/ide/, /ice/, /ine/
/ow/, /oke/, /old/
/ook/, /oop/, /ore
Review
/ap/, /an/, /at/
/ack/, /ash/, /ank
/ent/, /ell/, /est/
Review
/ip/, /in/, /it/
/ick/, /ill/, /ing/
/ot/, /op/, /ock/
Review
/ub/, /um/, /ug/
Lesson Content
Review of lessons 30, 31, and 32
Teaches recognition of the sounds made
Teaches recognition of the sounds made
Teaches recognition of the sounds made
Review of lessons 34, 35, and 36
Teaches recognition of the sounds made
Teaches recognition of the sounds made
Teaches recognition of the sounds made
Review of lessons 38, 39, and 40
Teaches recognition of the sounds made
Teaches recognition of the sounds made
Teaches recognition of the sounds made
Review of lessons 42, 43, and 44
Teaches recognition of the sounds made
Teaches recognition of the sounds made
Teaches recognition of the sounds made
Review of lessons 46, 47, and 48
Teaches recognition of the sounds made
Teaches recognition of the sounds made
Teaches recognition of the sounds made
Review of lessons 50, 51, and 52
Teaches recognition of the sounds made
Teaches recognition of the sounds made
Teaches recognition of the sounds made
Review of lessons 54, 55, and 56
Teaches recognition of the sounds made
Teaches recognition of the sounds made
Teaches recognition of the sounds made
Review of lessons 58, 59, and 60
Teaches recognition of the sounds made
Teaches recognition of the sounds made
Teaches recognition of the sounds made
Review of lessons 62, 63, and 64
Teaches recognition of the sounds made
63
by the letters /sp/ and /sl/
by the letters /sc/ and /sm/
by the letters /st/ and /sk/
by the letters /sn/ and /sq/
by the letters /sw/ and /tw/
by the letters /br/ and /tr/
by the letters /gr/ and /fr/
by the letters /dr/ and /cr/
by the letters /pr/ and /wr /
by the letters /cl/ and /bl/
by the letters /fl/ and /pl/
by the letters /str/ and /scr/
by the letters /ay/, /ail/, and /ain/
by the letters /ake/, /ave/, and /ate/
by the letters /eat/, /ear/, and /eep/
by the letters /ide/, /ice/, and /ine/
by the letters /ow/, /oke/, and /old/
by the letters /ook/, /oop/, and /ore/
by the letters /ap/, /an/, and /at/
by the letters /ack/, /ash/, and /ank/
by the letters /ent/, /ell/, and /est/
by the letters /ip/, /in/, and /it/
by the letters /ick/, /ill/, and /ing/
by the letters /ot/, /op/, and /ock/
by the letters /ub/, /um/, and /ug/
Learning Letter Sounds
Grade Level K
67
68
69
Lesson Title
/uck/, /ump/, /ush/
/aw/, /are/, /all/
Review
Lesson Content
Teaches recognition of the sounds made by the letters /uck/, /ump/, and /ush/
Teaches recognition of the sounds made by the letters /aw/, /are/, and /all/
Review of lessons 66, 67, and 68
64
Storybook Phonics I and II
Grade Levels K - 2
A+LS Storybook Phonics introduces students to the
following:
Storybook Phonics I
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
focus on fluency with phonics and oral reading
activities that reinforce words from the stories
activities that facilitate reading comprehension
interactive games
blending and segmenting skills
learning to read
initial consonants
initial consonant clusters
Storybook Phonics II
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
focus on fluency with phonics and oral reading
activities that reinforce words from the stories
activities that facilitate reading comprehension
interactive games
blending and segmenting skills
becoming a reader
initial consonant clusters
vowel and long vowel phonemes
65
Storybook Phonics
Grade Levels K-2
Storybook Phonics produced by Cambridge HitachiSoft Educational Solutions Plc, is an exciting addition to the A+nyWhere
Learning System® courseware. This title offers a story-based approach to reading fluency with stories using regular phonemic
patterns. Storybook Phonics is ideal for independent and team study with computers. Storybook Phonics is also compatible with
interactive whiteboards for whole-class instruction.
Storybook Phonics I and II
•
All thirty stories in the combined title contain a study guide, a practice
and mastery test, and essay.
•
Most essays and phonics extension assignments include a variety of
activities as well as written responses designed to enhance student
learning.
•
All stories are voiced, beautifully illustrated in full color, and include
character animations. Words are highlighted in synchronicity with the
narrator's voice. As students listen to the stories, they are encouraged
to read along with the narrator. The primary purpose of the books is
to promote reading fluency.
•
Each lesson contains a variety of fun, interactive games such as drag
and drop, picture to word matching, and many more.
66
Storybook Phonics
Grade Levels K-2
Storybook Phonics produced by Cambridge HitachiSoft Educational Solutions Plc, is an exciting addition to the A+nyWhere
Learning System® courseware. This title offers a story-based approach to reading fluency with stories using regular phonemic
patterns. Storybook Phonics is ideal for independent and team study with computers. Storybook Phonics is also compatible with
interactive whiteboards for whole-class instruction.
Storybook Phonics I and II
•
All thirty stories in the combined title contain a study guide, a practice
and mastery test, and essay.
•
Most essays and phonics extension assignments include a variety of
activities as well as written responses designed to enhance student
learning.
•
All stories are voiced, beautifully illustrated in full color, and include
character animations. Words are highlighted in synchronicity with the
narrator's voice. As students listen to the stories, they are encouraged
to read along with the narrator. The primary purpose of the books is
to promote reading fluency.
•
Each lesson contains a variety of fun, interactive games such as drag
and drop, picture to word matching, and many more.
67
Storybook Phonics
Grade Levels K-2
•
The Storybook Phonics books focus on fluency with phonics and oral reading.
•
The design of the phonics extension activities reinforces words from the stories and provides activities that facilitate
reading comprehension.
•
Interactive games are designed to enhance blending and segmenting skills for fluent reading and accurate spelling.
•
Due to the interactive nature of Storybook Phonics activities, there are a few specific software requirements:
o
Storybook Phonics requires a web browser. The following are
recommended: Microsoft Internet Explorer® versions 6.0 or
higher, Safari ® versions 2.0 or higher.
o
The interactive activities of the digital books and games
require a web browser equipped with the Adobe® Flash® and
Shockwave plug-ins. Available at: www.adobe.com (select
Get ADOBE FLASH PLAYER and Get Shockwave Player).
ƒ Note: Software requires Shockwave Player 11.0
o
An Internet connection is required.
68
Storybook Phonics
Grade Levels K-2
The lessons for Storybook Phonics are divided into two courses, Storybook Phonics I and Storybook Phonics II.
Storybook Phonics I
Storybook Phonics II
Lessons 1 - 15
Lessons 1 – 15
Beginning to Read and Becoming a Reader
Becoming a Reader
Focus on Initial Consonants
Focus on Initial Consonant Clusters
Focus on Initial Consonant Clusters
Focus on Vowel and Long Vowel Phonemes
69
Storybook Phonics I
Grade Levels K-2
Story Title
1
2
3
Lesson Content
Buzzing Bug
Consonants
+ ug and
the letters
b, g, m, j,
u, r
Essay description: On a piece of paper, draw a picture that shows what you
think the bug would have done if it had not gone out the window.
Phonics extension description: Write four rhyming words using these
letters: b, g, m, j, u, r (Hint: Use words from the story.)
Jet Goes
Fishing
Initial
consonants
+ et
Essay description: Write a story about a fun time you have had with your
pet. If you do not have a pet, write about a friend’s pet or a pet you would like
to have.
Phonics extension description: Write all of the words from the story that
rhyme with Jet. Draw a picture to go with each word.
Lost in the
Fog
Initial
consonants
+ og and
the letters
g, f, d, j, o,
z, and l
Essay description: In this story, we met an alien named Zog. Write a story
about Zog. Tell where he is from and why he came to Earth. Draw a picture of
Zog’s planet.
Phonics extension description: Write five rhyming words using these
letters: g, f, d, j, o, z, l (Hint: Use words from the story.)
The Cat and
the Rat
Initial
consonants
+ at
5
A Run in the
Sun
Initial
consonants
+ un
6
Dan's
Pancake
Initial
consonants
+ an
4
Essay description: Because the rat lives in Fat Cat’s home, they are sure to
see each other again. Write about another time that Fat Cat sees the rat. What
will Fat Cat do to the rat? What will the rat do to Fat Cat?
Phonics extension description: This story has many words that end with at.
Make a flip book with words that end with at. Include words from the story and
some of your own words as well.
Essay description: The children in this story had fun running in the sun. What
do you like to do on a sunny day? Draw a picture of what you like to do on a
sunny day. Write a sentence telling about your picture.
Phonics extension description: Write five rhyming words using these
letters: g, r, s, u, f, n (Hint: Use words from the story.)
Essay description: The pancake is now in the baker’s van. Write about what
you think will happen next. Draw a picture to go with your story.
Phonics extension description: Make a word wheel for words that end with
an. Use words from this story, as well as some words of your own.
70
Essays & Media
Essay: Illustration
Phonics: Write Rhyming
Words
Essay:
Written
Response
Phonics: Write Rhyming
Words
Essay:
Story Writing
Illustration
Phonics: Write Rhyming
Words
Essay:
Written
Response
Phonics: Create a Flip
Book
Essay:
Illustration
Written
Response
Phonics: Write Rhyming
Words
Essay: Illustration
Story Writing
Phonics: Create a Word
Wheel
Storybook Phonics I
Grade Levels K-2
Story Title
Lesson Content
7
Puppy Din
Initial
consonants
+ in
8
Ten
Gingerbread
Men
Initial
consonants
+ en
9
Granny Dot's
Pot
Initial
consonants
+ ot
10
Molly Mop
Initial
consonants
+ op
11
Sam's Cap
Initial
consonants
+ ap
Zanzibar Zip
Initial
consonants
+ ip
12
Essay description: Draw a picture of a fun party that you have had or been
to. Tell about the party.
Phonics extension description: Make a word wheel for words that end with
in. Use words from this story as well as some words of your own.
Essay description: Imagine that the gingerbread men had not been eaten by
the sheep. Where else could the gingerbread men have gone? Continue the
story and draw pictures.
Phonics extension description: Write all the words from the story that
rhyme with Ben. Draw a picture to go with each word.
Essay description: Draw a picture of something you like to eat. Tell how you
would make it.
Phonics extension description: This story has many words that end with ot.
Make a flip book with words that end with ot. Include words from the story and
some of your own words as well.
Essay description: Molly Mop came out to play with the toys in Tom’s toy
shop. What do you think they will do? Draw a picture of Molly Mop and the toys
playing.
Phonics extension description: This story has many words that end with op.
Make a flip book with words that end with op. Include words from the story and
some of your own words as well.
Essay description: What do you think Sam will do next? On a piece of paper,
draw a picture showing what you think will happen.
Phonics extension description: The words cap, nap, gap, and tap are
rhyming words. Can you think of some other words that rhyme with cap and
tap? Make a list of those words, and draw pictures to go with your words.
Essay description: At the end of the story Pete, Pip, and Zip are having a
good time enjoying their food. Now that Pete, Pip, and Zip are friends, what do
you think they will do next? Write a sentence and draw a picture explaining
what you think they will do next.
Phonics extension description: The words Pip, ship, nip, lip, and chip are all
rhyming words. What other words also rhyme with these words? Make a list of
your rhyming words. Write three of your rhyming words in your own sentences.
71
Essays & Media
Essay: Illustration
Written
Response
Phonics: Create a Word
Wheel
Essay: Illustration
Story Writing
Phonics: Illustration
Write Rhyming
Words
Essay: Descriptive
Writing
Illustration
Phonics: Create a Flip
Book
Essay: Illustration
Phonics: Create a Flip
Book
Essay: Illustration
Phonics: Illustration
Word List
Essay:
Illustration
Story Writing
Phonics: Word List
Sentence
Writing
Storybook Phonics I
Grade Levels K-2
Story Title
13
The Blob Can
Blink!
Initial
consonant
clusters bl,
cl, fl, gl, pl
14
The
Crocodile's
Sky Snack
Initial s+
consonant
clusters
15
The Tricky
Troll and Billy
Goats Gruff
Initial
consonant
clusters br,
cr, fr, gr, tr
Lesson Content
Essay description: Continue the adventures of the little black blob by drawing
a picture on a piece of paper and telling about something else it would do. Be
sure to use words that begin with bl, cl, fl, gl, or pl.
Phonics extension description: The sounds /bl/, /cl/, /fl/, /gl/, and /pl/ are
used in words throughout this story to explain things the little black blob saw
and did. Make a list of the words in this story that make those sounds. What
other words are spelled with bl, cl, fl, gl, and pl? Write those words on another
list.
Essay description: In this story, the crocodile tried a new snack. Write about
a time that you tried something new to eat. What was it? What did you think
about it? Draw a picture of it.
Phonics extension description: This story has many words that start with
sn, st, sl, sk, sm, and sw. Try to find many of these words in a magazine or a
newspaper article. Circle the words that you find. Read the words.
Essay description: The billy goats like to eat fresh green grass. The story
describes the grass as green, munchy, fresh, crisp, and crunchy. What do you
like to eat? Write a paragraph about your favorite food using as many
describing words as you can. Draw a picture of the food that you described.
Phonics extension description: Make a chart labeled with br, cr, fr, gr, and
tr. Write words from the story under the correct headings.
72
Essays & Media
Essay:
Illustration
Story Writing
Phonics: Word List
Essay:
Descriptive
Story
Illustration
Phonics: Find and Circle
Words
Essay:
Illustration
Paragraph
Writing
Phonics: Create a Chart
Word List
Storybook Phonics II
Grade Levels 1-2
Story Title
The Giant of
the Sky
Final
consonant
clusters -nt,
-st, -lt
The Junk
Robot
Final
consonant
clusters
-nd, -nk,
-ld
3
Wisp
Final
consonant
clusters -lp,
-mp, -sp
4
Charlie
Chimpanzee
Long vowel
phonemes
/ee/ and
/oa/
5
Shy Dragon
and White
Knight
Long vowel
phoneme
/ie/
1
2
Lesson Content
Essay description: Have you ever been afraid? Write about a time that you
were afraid. Tell what scared you and what you did about it. Draw a picture to
go along with your story.
Phonics extension description: This story has many words that end with
-nt, -st, and -lt. See how many of these words you can find in a magazine or
newspaper article. Circle the words that you find. Read the words.
Essay description: If you made a junk robot of your own, what would it look
like? Draw a picture of your junk robot. Then write a paragraph describing what
your robot was made from.
Phonics extension description: Make a list of all the things the junk robot
can do. Underline all the words that end with -nk or -nd. Can you think of
anything else the robot can do or would like that ends with the same letters?
Add those words to your list.
Essay description: Wisp had to be very brave to stand up for herself and not
be bullied by a dog that was bigger than she was. Think about a time you have
had to be very brave. Write a story about your experience.
Phonics extension description: This story has words that end in -lp, -mp,
and -sp. Make a list of the words from this story that make those sounds. Then
think of three more words that make each of those sounds and add them to
your list.
Essay description: The Queen Bee wanted to teach Charlie not to steal. Do
you think Charlie learned his lesson? Explain your answer.
Phonics extension description: This story has many words that make the
long /e/ sound and the long /o/ sound. Make a list of long /e/ words and
another list of long /o/ words. Write words from the story on the appropriate
list. How many different ways of making the long /e/ and long /o/ sounds are
there? Underline the letters that make the long /e/ and long /o/ sounds in each
word. (For example: ee, ea, ie, oa)
Essay description: Now that the white knight and the dragon are friends,
what do you think will happen next? Write and draw a picture explaining what
the white knight and the dragon will do next.
Phonics extension description: This story has a lot of words that make the
long /i/ sound. Make a list of all the words you can find that make the long /i/
sound. Can you think of any other words that make the long /i/ sound? Make a
list of those words.
73
Essays & Media
Essay:
Illustration
Written
Response
Phonics: Circle Words in
a Newspaper
Essay:
Illustration
Paragraph
Writing
Phonics: Word List
Word Underline
Essay: Story Writing
Phonics: Word List
Essay:
Written
Response
Phonics: Word List
Word Underline
Essay:
Illustration
Written
Response
Phonics: Word List
Storybook Phonics II
Grade Levels 1-2
Story Title
6
The Wind and
the Sun
Long vowel
phonemes
/ai/and
/ue/
7
The Popcorn
Boy
Vowel
phoneme
/oi/
8
Town Mouse
and Country
Mouse
Vowel
phoneme
/ow/
9
A Star in a
Marmalade
Jar
Vowel
phoneme
/ar/
10
Billy Bear and
Pear Tree
Fairy
Vowel
phoneme
/air/
Lesson Content
Essay description: Can you think of a test that the wind could have won?
Write about the test.
Phonics extension description: In this story, the long /u/ sound is made
using different letter patterns. For example, oo is used in the word swooping,
ew is used in the word new, and ue is used in the word blue. How many letter
patterns are used to make the long /a/ sound in this story? Write examples of
each.
Essay description: At the end of the story, Roy Troy’s cat is holding a box of
popcorn and winking at him. Write a paragraph explaining what you think will
happen next. Draw a picture to illustrate your paragraph.
Phonics extension description: The letters oi and oy make the same sound.
This story contains many words with those letters. Make a list of all the words
in the story with oi and oy. Read the words.
Essay description: Write a paragraph about where you live. Describe why you
like to live there. Draw a picture to go with your paragraph.
Phonics extension description: The letters ou and ow often make the same
sound. This story contains many words with those letters. Make a list of all the
words in the story with ou and ow. Read the words. Can you find any words in
which ow makes the long /o/ sound? Write the words you find.
Essay description: The star in this story made the farmer’s wishes come true.
If you set a star free like the farmer did, what do you think would happen?
What kind of wishes would you want to come true? Write your answers in
complete sentences and draw a picture to illustrate what you wrote.
Phonics extension description: The words star, marmalade, and jar have
the sound /ar/. Look in a favorite book or a magazine for words which contain
the /ar/ sound. Make a list of the words you find. Write five of your words in a
sentence.
Essay description: In this story, the fairy made a magic chair for Billy Bear. If
you had a magic chair, where would you fly to? Write a story about your
adventures on a magic chair. Draw a picture to go with your story.
Phonics extension description: Make a chart with the headings air, ear, and
are. Write the words from the story under the proper heading. Which column
had the most words? Read the words.
74
Essays & Media
Essay:
Written
Response
Phonics: Letter Patterns
Written
Response
Essay:
Illustration
Paragraph
Writing
Phonics: Word List
Essay:
Illustration
Paragraph
Writing
Phonics: Word List
Essay:
Illustration
Sentence
Writing
Phonics: Word List
Sentence
Writing
Essay:
Illustration
Story Writing
Phonics: Create a Chart
Word List
Storybook Phonics II
Grade Levels 1-2
Story Title
11
12
13
14
Gertie the
Goat
Vowel
phoneme
/ur/
The Haunted
House
Vowel
phonemes
/or/ and
/au/
The Magic
Ear
Vowel
phoneme
/ear/
The Magic
Porridge Pot
Vowel
phoneme
/oo/
Lesson Content
Essay description: In this story, Gertie the Goat liked to eat many different
things. Write about one of your favorite things to eat. Tell why you like it. Then
describe how you think it is made. Also, draw a picture of your favorite food.
Phonics extension description: In this story, the letters er, ir, and ur all
make the same sound. Make a chart with the headings er, ir, and ur. Then look
in a favorite book or a magazine for words that make the same sound. Write
the words you find under the headings on your chart. Read the words you
wrote.
Essay description: Paul and Laura were in the house for just a few minutes.
They were not able to see what the rest of the house looked like. Using your
imagination, write a paragraph describing what the rest of the haunted house
was like.
Phonics extension essay: This story has many words with the /au/ and /or/
sounds. Find the words in the story that make the /au/ sound and the /or/
sound. Make a list of the words you found. Write five sentences using words
from your list.
Essay description: Write a paragraph about some other things you think Lug
can do with his magic ear. Draw a picture to go with your paragraph.
Phonics extension essay: The words hear, tears, and appear all have the
sound /ear/. What other words in this story also have the sound /ear/? Make a
list of the words you find. Write five complete sentences using the ear words
you found in the story.
Essay description: Pretend the little girl could not remember how to make
the magic cooking pot stop cooking porridge. Write a paragraph explaining
what would happen. Draw a picture to go with your paragraph.
Phonics extension description: How many oo words can you find in the
story? Write down the words that you find and draw a picture to go with each
one.
75
Essays & Media
Essay:
Illustration
Written
Response
Phonics: Create a Chart
Word List
Essay:
Paragraph
Writing
Phonics: Word List
Sentence
Writing
Essay:
Illustration
Paragraph
Writing
Phonics: Word List
Sentence
Writing
Essay:
Illustration
Paragraph
Writing
Phonics: Illustration
Word List
Storybook Phonics II
Grade Levels 1-2
Story Title
15
Peacock's
New Name
Vowel
digraph ea
Lesson Content
Essay description: In this story, Peacock thought he was very grand and
should be given special treatment because of his beautiful feathers. How do
you think he changed after the fox tried to eat him? Explain your answer.
Phonics extension description: The letters ea make two different sounds in
this story. In the word peacock, ea makes the long /e/ sound. In the word
head, ea makes the short /e/ sound. Make a chart labeled with long /e/ sounds
and short /e/ sounds. List all of the ea words from the story under the correct
heading. Try to add words of your own to the chart.
76
Essays & Media
Essay:
Written
Response
Phonics: Create a Chart
Word List
Reading I - VIII
Grade Levels 1 - 8
A+LS Reading I - VIII introduces students to a variety of
topics including:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
extensive tutorial and instructional narration in
grades 1 - 3
phonemic awareness
phonics
vocabulary development
comprehension
reading fluency
recognition of word families
antonyms
homophones
compound words
synonyms
phonograms
prefixes
suffixes
root words
recognition of main story ideas and details
outcome predictions and feelings interpretations
conclusions
similarities and differences
distinguishing fact from make believe and opinion
understanding of cause and effect and point of view
identification of setting, plot, and characterization
instruction of various literary forms
77
Reading I-VIII
Grade Levels 1 – 8
The A+LS™ Reading courses are scientific, research-based, integrated courses for grade levels 1-8. This program directs
students from beginning reading levels to more advanced reading skills. Reading I, II, and III have tutorial and instructional
voice support. A sequence of eight titles provides an extensive e-learning solution ideal for schools that want to use technology
to improve their instructional process.
•
Reading is presented as a collection of
year-long courses.
•
All lessons contain a study guide, a
practice and mastery test, and an essay or
constructed response.
•
Lessons include a variety of essay types
such as descriptive, persuasive,
expository, and letter writing.
•
These courses are certified by
MetaMetrics® with a Lexile® score.
•
The A+LS program consists of an
Internet-based instructional management
system with student assessment tools
built in, and educators can test students
on national, state, district, or local
objectives because any set of standards
can be added to the system.
78
Reading I-VIII
Grade Levels 1 – 8
•
A+® VIP Bundle customers receive access to Encyclopædia Britannica® Online School Edition (EB) workspaces which
contain learning materials. Learning materials may contain articles, games, images, maps, and/or videos. Clearvue (CV)
video clips may be included as well.
•
The content in these courses is designed to meet and exceed the requirements of the National Council of Teachers of
English (NCTE) for the Standards of English Language Arts. In addition, it addresses the core reading skills identified by
the National Reading Panel: phonemic awareness, phonics, vocabulary development, comprehension, and fluency.
•
Each Reading title consists of four units: Reviews, Word Analysis, Comprehension, and Literary Skills.
o
The review lessons introduce and refresh the students’ recall of consonants and vowels and their associated
sounds and letter patterns (phonics).
o
The Word Analysis unit gives extensive tutoring and practice recognizing word families, antonyms, homophones,
compound words, synonyms, phonograms, prefixes, suffixes, and root words (phonics & phonemic awareness).
o
The Comprehension unit focuses on skills that teach the student to recognize main ideas and details, predict
outcomes and interpret feelings, draw conclusions, recognize similarity and difference, distinguish fact from make
believe and opinion, understand cause and effect and point of view, use context clues to understand the meaning
of words, and to find information from charts, graphs, and diagrams.
o
The Literary Skills unit provides discussion and identification of story elements (including setting, plot,
characterization) and instruction of various literary forms. These skills together with extensive practice promote
the automaticity of the core skills to promote fluency.
79
Reading I-VIII
Grade Levels 1 – 8
•
•
Due to the interactive nature of the A+ VIP Bundle, there
are a few specific software requirements:
o
EB requires a web browser, the following are
recommended:
ƒ Microsoft Internet Explorer® versions 6.0 or
higher
ƒ Safari® versions 2.0 or higher
Note: EB requires cookies enabled.
o
EB interactive activities require a web browser
equipped with the Adobe® Flash® and Shockwave
plug-ins. Available at: www.adobe.com (select
Get ADOBE FLASH PLAYER and Get
Shockwave Player).
o
EB video clips are offered in Windows Media® and
MPEG-4 formats. You’ll need to have a media
player installed that will support these formats:
ƒ Quicktime® - available at:
www.apple.com/quicktime/download
ƒ Windows Media® Player - available at:
www.microsoft.com/windows/windowsmedia/download
Numerous links to the Internet are provided in the A+ VIP Bundle. An Internet connection is not required for completion
of this course, but it is required to utilize the EB components of the A+ VIP Bundle.
80
Reading I-VIII
Grade Levels 1 – 8
The Reading titles develop skills in practical situations by utilizing a Four-Step Approach: Study Guide, Practice Test, Mastery
Test, and Essay modules are used to define the instructional environment.
•
The Study Guide module provides a text- and graphics-based delivery of material that is reinforced by pictures and
diagrams supported by a wealth of content. Study Guides teach the concepts and skills associated with each lesson. A
number of the Study Guide pages have specific, interactive feedback that will assist the student in solving problems or
understanding concepts.
•
The Practice Test module allows the student to practice the skills learned in the Study Guide section. The student has
instant access to the study material for reference.
•
In the Mastery Test module, the student takes a scored examination, electronically submits the test, and the results are
recorded in the A+LS Management System.
•
The Essay module allows the student to compose
individual, free-form answers to a wide variety of
questions and problems.
The A+ VIP Bundle includes the Encyclopædia Britannica
Online School Edition, which has teacher resources and
student learning materials. The materials include a wide
range of interactive lessons, research projects,
animations, and worksheets that support the Reading
courses.
•
•
Reading contains EB workspaces.
Each workspace may contain an article, diagram,
study guide, video, or interactive media.
81
Reading I-VIII
Grade Levels 1 – 8
The Reading courses each contain a variety of lessons and differ in length, grade level, and available features. Listed below are
the courses found within the curriculum planning manual.
Number of
Lessons
Length of
Course in
Semesters
Grade
Levels
Lexile
Measure
Reading I
43
2
1
Yes
Reading II
45
2
2
Yes
Reading III
43
2
3
Yes
Reading IV
43
2
4
Yes
Reading V
45
2
5
Yes
Reading VI
48
2
6
Yes
Reading VII
40
2
7
Yes
Reading VIII
42
2
8
Yes
Course
Name
82
Reading I
Grade Level 1
1
2
Lesson Title
Capital Letter
Review
Lower Case Letter
Review
Lesson Content
Essays & Media
Identify the letters of the alphabet in upper case (Review)
Essay: Written Activity
Identify the letters of the alphabet in lower case (Review)
Essay: Written Activity
Identify initial and single consonant sounds and sound-letter correspondences,
final consonant sounds and sound-letter correspondences, medial consonant
sounds and sound-letter correspondences, blends and digraphs
Identify short vowel sounds and sound-letter correspondences and correctly
read 3-4 letter words, long vowel sounds and sound-letter correspondences
Recall a three part pattern from memory; students identify vowel-consonant
patterns such as CVC, CVCV, CVVCV, etc.
Tell whether pictures, letters or shapes are alike or different, classifying
information; students classify various groups of items (Review)
Word Analysis
Changing the first or last letters to form word families
Definition and examples of antonyms; students practice finding antonyms for
words
Definition and examples of homophones; students learn that words can sound
alike but have different meanings
Definition and examples of compound words; students identify compound
words
Definition and examples of synonyms; students practice finding a synonym for
words
3
Consonant Review
4
Vowel Review
5
Patterns
6
Classifying
7
Word Families
8
Antonyms
9
Homophones
10
Compound Words
11
Synonyms
12
Phonograms
Definition and examples of phonograms; students practice finding phonograms
13
14
15
16
Prefixes
Suffixes
Syllables
Root Words
Correct use of prefixes including the prefix /ur/
Correct use of the suffixes /s/, /es/, /ies/, /ing/, /ed/, etc.
Divide words into syllables, count the number of syllables in a word
Root words without spelling changes, root words with spelling changes
17
Introducing Nouns
Students learn the definition of nouns and to find nouns in sentences
18
Introducing Verbs
19
Plurals
Students learn the definition of verbs and to locate verbs in sentences
Students learn that plural means more than one; students learn how some
plurals are formed
83
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Illustration
Essay: Activity
Essay: Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity/
Illustration
Essay: Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity/
Illustration
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity/
Illustration
Reading I
Grade Level 1
Lesson Title
20
Predicting Outcomes
21
Recognizing Main
Ideas
22
Interpreting Feelings
23
24
Drawing Conclusions
Story Details
Similarity &
Difference
Fact and Make
Believe
25
26
27
Make-Believe Stories
28
Understanding
Setting
29
Cause and Effect
30
Sorting Information
31
Figurative Language
32
Purpose in Writing
33
Context Clues
34
35
Sequence
Point of View
36
Summarizing
37
38
39
Phrasing
Structural Analysis
Multiple Meanings
Spatial-Position
Words
Charts and Graphs
40
41
Lesson Content
Tell what will happen next in a story; students recognize that certain actions
might result in certain outcomes
Comprehension
Identify main idea and details, recognize the title as a source of the main idea,
determine the key words and topic sentence
Make an inference based on characters and character traits, make an inference
based on feelings
Make an inference based on drawing conclusions
Listen for details in stories, recall details from stories
Essay: Written Activity
Students learn to identify similarities and differences in stories
Essay: Illustration
Students learn to differentiate between fact and make believe
Essay: Written Activity/
Compare & Contrast
Students invent stories that are not real; learn how to distinguish between
what is real and what is not real or true
Essay: Illustration
Definition and example of setting; how setting is part of a story
Essay: Written Activity/
Illustration
Definitions of cause and effect; students identify various causes and effects by
reading clues
Students compare elements of stories
Understand figurative language used in stories and poetry, identify types of
animals personified in a story personification
Distinguish the author’s purpose
Select the correct meaning for unfamiliar words by using context clues, use
picture clues and syntax to identify word and sentence meaning
The concept of sequencing, students determine the sequence of sentences
Determine who is telling the story
Definition and examples of summary; students read a story and identify points
to be included in a summary
Moves from word by word reading to phrasing words together
Use structural analysis to determine the meaning of unknown words
Understand multiple meanings of words
Differentiate which picture shows the correct spatial relationship (in, on,
beside, above, below, next to, between, about, against
Gain information from charts, graphs and diagrams to answer questions
84
Essays & Media
Essay: Illustration
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Activity
Essay: Activity/
Illustration
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Vocabulary in
Context
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Activity
Essay: Activity
Essay: Activity
Reading I
Grade Level 1
Lesson Title
42
Five “W” Questions
43
Poetry
Lesson Content
Literary Skills
Answer the who, what, when, where, why and how questions in complete
sentences
Reading and understanding different types of poetry, recognizing and using
sound words (onomatopoeia)
85
Essays & Media
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Reading II
Grade Level 2
Lesson Title
1
Consonant Quick
Review
2
Vowels Quick Review
3
Verbs Quick Review
4
Plurals Quick Review
6
Pronunciation &
Syllables
Sight Vocabulary
7
Root Words
8
9
Prefixes
Suffixes
10
Context Clues
11
Compound Words
12
Synonyms
13
Antonyms
14
Abbreviations
15
Core Subject Words
16
Homophones
17
Contractions
18
Word Families
19
Analogies
5
Lesson Content
Identify initial and single consonant sounds and sound-letter correspondences,
final consonant sounds and sound-letter correspondences, medial consonant
sounds and sound-letter correspondences, blends and digraphs
Identify short vowel sounds and sound-letter correspondences and correctly
read 3-4 letter words, long vowel sounds and sound-letter correspondences
Definition and examples of tense; students identify verbs in past, present, and
future tenses
Review of correctly adding plurals to words
Word Analysis
Students use phonetic clues and diacritical marks to identify word
pronunciation and number of syllables
Students learn various sight words and their definitions
Definition and examples of root words; introduction to prefixes and suffixes
and how each can change the meaning of a root word
Correct use of the prefixes /re/ and /un/ (not)
Correct use of the suffixes /er/, /or/, /less/, /ing/, etc.
Select the correct meaning for unfamiliar words by using context clues, use
structural analysis to determine the meaning of unknown words
Definition and examples of compound words; students identify compound
words
Definition and examples of synonyms; students practice finding a synonym for
words
Definition and examples of antonyms; students practice finding antonyms for
words
Correctly use the abbreviations Mrs., Mr., days of the week and months of the
year
Identify and use words from language arts, math, social studies and science
Definition and examples of homophones; students identify homophones in
sentences
Definition and examples of contractions; students identify words that form
contractions
Changing the first or last letters to form word families
The definition of analogies, examples of analogies using synonyms, antonyms,
and parts of a whole; students practice completing analogies
86
Essays & Media
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Reading II
Grade Level 2
Lesson Title
20
Homographs
21
Multiple Meanings
22
Sequencing
24
25
26
Main Idea and
Details
Alphabetization
Information
Fact and Opinion
27
Cause and Effect
28
Classifying
Compare and
Contrast
23
29
30
Characterization
31
32
Feelings
Predicting Outcomes
33
Generalizations
34
Summarizing and
Paraphrasing
35
Drawing Conclusions
36
Common
Expressions
37
Five “W” Questions
38
Story Elements
Lesson Content
Definition and examples of homographs; students identify homographs in
sentences
Understand multiple meanings of words, recognize the multiple meanings of
words
Definition and examples of sequence and order of events; students put events
in order; sequence a series of pictures
Comprehension
Identify main idea and details, recognize the title as a source of the main idea,
determine the key words and topic sentence
Students practice alphabetizing using first, second, and third letters of words
Gain information from pictures, charts and diagrams
Students identify facts and opinions
Definitions of cause and effect; students identify various causes and effects by
reading clues
Definition of classifying; students classify various groups of items
Definition and examples of comparing and contrasting ideas, events,
characters, etc.
Make an inference based on characters and character traits; definition of traits;
students use character traits to predict outcomes
Make an inference based on feelings
Students read clues and decide what could happen next in a story
The process of going from a specific account to general statements; true and
false generalizations
Definition and examples of summary; students read a story and identify points
to be included in a summary; definition and examples of paraphrasing
Make an inference based on drawing conclusions, identify information which
gives support for opinions
Everyday sayings and proverbs and their meanings
Students answer who, what, when, where, why and how questions in a reading
selection
Literary Skills
Use major elements of story structure (beginning-middle-end, character,
setting, plot) to discuss literature and write a story
87
Essays & Media
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Illustration
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Bar Graph
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Reading II
Grade Level 2
Lesson Title
39
Purpose in Writing
40
Point of View
42
Fiction and
Nonfiction
Folktales and Fables
43
Reality and Fantasy
44
Literary Forms
45
Personal Narratives
41
Lesson Content
Identification of various purposes for writing, including informing, persuading,
creative writing, describing; students distinguish the author’s purpose
Definition and examples of first and third person points of view; students
determine who is telling a story
Definition and examples of fiction and nonfiction; students identify titles of
books that are either fiction or nonfiction
Definition and examples of tall tales, folktales and fables
Definition of fantasy, recognizing the difference between reality and fantasy,
distinguish between real and make-believe
Definition and examples of poetry, short stories, autobiographies, and
biographies
Definition and examples of personal narratives; students identify words that
are used in writing personal experiences
88
Essays & Media
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Reading III
Grade Level 3
Lesson Title
1
Consonant Review
2
Vowel Review
3
Verbs Review
4
Plurals Review
5
Syllables
6
Sight Vocabulary
7
Prefixes and Suffixes
8
Context Clues
9
Compound Words
Synonyms and
Antonyms
Core Subject Words
10
11
12
Homophones and
Homographs
13
Contractions
14
Word Families
15
Abbreviations
16
Pronunciation
17
Connotation &
Denotation
Lesson Content
Identify initial and single consonant sounds and sound-letter correspondences,
final consonant sounds and sound-letter correspondences, medial consonant
sounds and sound-letter correspondences, blends and digraphs
Identify short vowel sounds and sound-letter correspondences and correctly
read 3-4 letter words, long vowel sounds and sound-letter correspondences
Identify verbs in sentences, forms of regular verbs, verb forms (past, present,
future)
Review of correctly adding plurals to words
Word Analysis
Students learn guidelines for dividing words into syllables, use phonetic clues
and diacritical marks to identify word pronunciation
Develop a sight vocabulary of high frequency words
Correct use of the prefixes /re/, /un/ (not), /dis/ (not), /un/ (opposite), /dis/,
(opposite) etc., correct use of the suffixes /er/, /or/, /less/, /ly/, /ing/, etc.,
Select the correct meaning for unfamiliar words by using context clues and
inferences, use structural analysis to determine the meaning of unknown
words; students search for clues to word meanings in pictures, surrounding
words, and in the dictionary
Definition and examples of compound word; students identify compound words
Definition and examples of synonyms and antonyms; students practice finding
a synonym or antonym for words
Identify and use words from language arts, math, social studies and science
Definition and examples of homographs; students identify homographs in
sentences, definition and examples of homophones; students identify
homophones in sentences
Identify words that form compound words
Changing the first or last letters to form word families, use letter sounds
association and sounds to spell words, use context clues to decode words
Correctly use the abbreviations Mrs., Mr., days of the week and months or the
year
Read stories pronouncing words accurately, moves from word by word reading
to phrasing words together, use phonetic clues and diacritical marks to identify
word pronunciation
Recognize the definition of a word in a sentence, recognize the exact definition
of a word in a sentence
89
Essays & Media
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Reading III
Grade Level 3
18
19
Lesson Title
Alphabetizing
Sequencing &
Classifying
20
Main Ideas
21
Story Details
22
Information
23
Fact and Opinion
24
Cause and Effect
25
Compare and
Contrast
26
Feelings and Motives
27
Predicting Outcomes
28
Generalizations
29
Summarizing and
Paraphrasing
30
Drawing Conclusions
31
Point of View
32
Five “W” Questions
33
Story Elements &
Setting
34
Purpose in Writing
35
Fiction and
Nonfiction
36
Folktales and Fables
Lesson Content
Students learn to alphabetize to the third letter of a word
Sequence a series of pictures; definition and examples of sequence;
importance of word order in a story; words that indicate sequence
Identify main idea and details, recognize the title as a source of the main idea,
determine the key words and topic sentence
Definition and examples of details; students recall details from stories
Introduces students to tables, charts, and diagrams; students gain information
from pictures, charts and diagrams
Definitions and examples of facts and opinions; how propaganda is used to
influence opinions; learning the difference between fact and opinion
Definitions of cause and effect; students identify various causes and effects by
reading clues
Definition and examples of comparing and contrasting ideas, events,
characters, etc.
Make an inference based on feelings and motives; make an inference based on
characters and character traits
Students read clues and decide what could happen next in a story
Definition and examples of generalizations; the process of going from a specific
account to general statements
Definition and examples of summary; students read a story and identify points
to be included in a summary, students will retell a story in their own words
Make an inference based on drawing conclusions, identify information that
gives support for opinions
Definition and examples of first and third person points of view
Answer the who, what, when, where, why and how questions in a reading
selection
Definition and examples of setting, the elements of time and setting; the
importance of setting to a story
Students understand that there are many purposes in writing; writing is for a
specific purpose; students identify
Definition and examples of realistic fiction and science fiction, understand
elements of nonfiction
Definition and examples of tall tales, folktales and fables, legends; elements of
each
90
Essays & Media
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Illustration
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity/
Illustration
Essay: Written Activity
Reading III
Grade Level 3
Lesson Title
37
Reality and Fantasy
38
39
Literary Forms 1
Literary Forms 2
Narrative and
Expository
Figurative Language
1
Figurative Language
2
Figurative Language
3
40
41
42
43
Lesson Content
Definition of fantasy, recognizing the difference between reality and fantasy,
distinguish between real and make-believe
Elements of a short story described, including plot, characters, and setting
Autobiography, biography, understand the purpose and form of a biography
Identify narrative materials and expository materials
Definition and example of metaphors, similes, and personification; students
identify figurative language in speech
Definition and examples of alliteration, hyperbole, and onomatopoeia; students
identify figurative language in sentences
Definition and examples of lyric poetry, students identify words that rhyme
91
Essays & Media
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Reading IV
Grade Level 4
Lesson Title
1
Consonants Quick
Review
2
Vowels Quick Review
3
Verbs Quick Review
4
Plurals Quick Review
5
Pronunciation &
Syllables
6
Sight Words
7
Root Words
8
Prefixes
9
Suffixes
10
Context Clues
11
Compound Words
12
Synonyms
13
Antonyms
14
Abbreviations
15
16
Core Subject Words
Homographs
Lesson Content
Identify initial and single consonant sounds and sound-letter correspondences,
final consonant sounds and sound-letter correspondences, medial consonant
sounds and sound-letter correspondences, blends and digraphs
Identify short vowel sounds and sound-letter correspondences, long vowel
sounds and sound-letter correspondences; students identify vowel/consonant
patterns
Identify subjects and verbs and predicates; action verbs; verb tenses (past,
present, future)
Identify singular and plural; rules for forming plurals; words that have another
word for plural form; words that have the same word for both singular and
plural
Word Analysis
Use phonetic clues and diacritical marks to identify word pronunciation, divide
words into syllables
Develop a sight vocabulary of high frequency words; definitions of various sight
words
Root words without spelling changes, root words with spelling changes; adding
prefixes and suffixes to root words
Correct use of the prefixes /re/, /un/ (not), /dis/ (not), /un/ (opposite), /mis/,
(opposite) etc.
Correct use of the suffixes /er/, /or/, /less/, /ly/, /ing/, /able/, /ible/, /ment/,
etc.
Select the correct meaning for unfamiliar words by using context clues, use
structural analysis to determine the meaning of unknown words
Definition and examples of compound word; students identify compound words
Definition and examples of synonyms; using the thesaurus as a source for
finding synonyms; students practice finding a synonym for words
Definition and examples of antonyms; using the thesaurus as a source for
antonyms; students practice finding antonyms for words
Correctly use the abbreviations Mrs., Mr., days of the week and months or the
year; states
Identify and use words from language arts, math, social studies and science
Definition of homographs; selecting the correct homograph in sentences
92
Essays & Media
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Activity
Essay: Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Reading IV
Grade Level 4
Lesson Title
17
Homonyms and
Homophones
18
Contractions
19
Analogies
20
Multiple Meanings
21
Main Ideas and
Details
22
Information
23
Alphabetization
24
Cause and Effect
25
Fact and Opinion
Compare and
Contrast
26
27
Characterization
28
Classifying
29
30
Predicting Outcomes
Generalizations
Summarizing and
Paraphrasing
31
32
Drawing Conclusions
33
Common
Expressions
34
Five “W” Questions
Lesson Content
Definition and examples of homonyms; students identify homonyms in
sentences, definition and examples of homophones; students identify
homophones in sentences
Examples of forming contractions; contractions using not; pronouns and
contractions
Comprehension
The definition of analogies, students practice completing analogies
Understand multiple meanings of words, recognize the multiple meanings of
words; the importance of context clues in defining words that have multiple
meanings
Identify main idea and details, recognize the title as a source of the main idea,
determine the key words and topic sentence
Definition and examples of charts, graphs, and diagrams; students gain
information from pictures, charts, graphs, and diagrams
Essays & Media
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Bar Graph
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Written Activity
Alphabetize to the third letter
Definitions of cause and effect; students identify various causes and effects by
reading clues; questions that can help determine cause and effect
Identify facts and opinions
Definition and examples of comparing and contrasting ideas, events,
characters, etc.
Definition and examples of characterization and character traits; students
make an inference based on characters and character traits
Definition of classifying, categorizing, and grouping; tips for helping students
classify various groups of items
Students read clues and decide what could happen next in a story
The process of going from a specific account to general statements
Definition and examples of summary; students read a story and identify points
to be included in a summary; students practice paraphrasing
Make an inference based on conclusions, identify information which gives
support for opinions
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Everyday sayings, proverbs, and idioms
Essay: Written Activity
Answer the who, what, when, where, why and how questions in a reading
selection
Essay: Written Activity
93
Reading IV
Grade Level 4
Lesson Title
35
Point of View
36
Story Elements
37
Purpose in Writing
38
39
Fiction and
Nonfiction
Folk Tales and
Fables
40
Reality and Fantasy
41
Literary Forms
42
43
Figurative Language
1
Figurative Language
2
Lesson Content
Literary Skills
Determine who is telling the story; examples of first and third person points of
view
Use major elements of story structure (beginning-middle-end, character,
setting, plot) to discuss literature and write a story
Writing to describe, entertain, inform (including autobiographies and
biographies), and to persuade
Definition and examples of realistic fiction; historic fiction, and science fiction;
nonfiction
Definition and examples of tall tales, folktales and fables; exaggeration
Definition of fantasy, recognizing the difference between reality and fantasy,
distinguish between real and make-believe
Short stories; autobiography, biography, understand the purpose and form of a
biography; poetry, understand figurative language used in stories and poetry
Essays & Media
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Written Activity
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Written Activity
Essay: Written Activity
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Written Activity
Metaphors, similes and personification
Essay: Written Activity
Definition and examples of hyperbole, alliteration, onomatopoeia
Essay: Written Activity
94
Reading V
Grade Level 5
Lesson Title
1
Consonants
2
Vowels
3
Verbs and
Contractions
4
Plurals
5
Suffixes
6
Prefixes
7
Compound Words
9
Synonyms and
Antonyms
Analogies
10
Multiple Meanings
11
Abbreviations
12
Root Words
13
Pronunciation/Syllab
les
14
Predicting/
Conclusions
15
Alphabetization
16
Information
17
Fact and Opinion
8
Lesson Content
Identify initial and single consonant sounds, and sound-letter correspondences;
final consonant sounds and sound-letter correspondences; medial consonant
sounds and sound-letter correspondences; blends and digraphs
Identify short vowel sounds and sound-letter correspondences; long vowel
sounds and sound-letter correspondences
Identify verbs in sentences; forms of regular verbs; verb forms: past, present,
and future; identify compound words that become contractions
Review of rules to form plural words; changing words for plural form; words
that do not change from singular to plural
Word Analysis
Correct use of the suffixes -er, -or-, -less-, -ly-, -ing, etc.
Correct use of the prefixes re-, un- (not), dis- (not), un- (opposite), dis-,
(opposite) etc.
Definition and examples of compound words; students identify compound
words; open and closed compounds
Definition and examples of synonyms and antonyms; students practice finding
a synonym and antonym for various words
Definition of analogies; students practice completing analogies
Definition and examples of homonyms, homophones, and homographs;
students identify and use homonyms, homophones, and homographs in
sentences; recognize the multiple meanings of words
Correctly use the abbreviations Mrs. and Mr.; days of the week and months of
the year
Root words without spelling changes; root words with spelling changes;
changing the first or last letters to form word families
Read stories pronouncing words accurately; use phonetic clues and diacritical
marks to identify word pronunciation; dividing words into syllables
Students read clues and decide what could happen next in a story; make an
inference based on conclusions; identify information which gives support for
opinions
Alphabetize to the third letter
Gain information from pictures, charts, and diagrams; line and bar graphs
Comprehension
Identify facts and opinions; idioms and sense words
95
Essays & Media
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Activity
Essay: Activity
Essay: Activity
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Activity
Essay: Activity
Essay: Illustration
Reading V
Grade Level 5
18
19
Lesson Title
Compare and
Contrast
Sequencing/
Classifying
20
Main Ideas
21
Connotation &
Denotation
22
Cause and Effect
23
24
Context Clues 1
Context Clues 2
25
Narratives
26
28
Characterization
Common
Expressions
Generalizations
29
Summarizing
30
Five “W” Questions
31
Story Elements
32
Purpose in Writing
33
Prior Knowledge
34
Setting
35
Fiction
36
Nonfiction
27
Lesson Content
Definition and examples of comparing and contrasting ideas, events,
characters, etc.
Sequencing information from a variety of sources; definition of classifying;
students classify various groups of items
Identify main idea and details; recognize the title as a source of the main idea;
determine the key words and topic sentence
Recognize the definition of a word in a sentence; recognize the exact definition
of a word in a sentence using context clues
Definitions of cause and effect; students identify various causes and effects by
reading clues
Identify word meanings through context clues and inferences
Select the correct meaning for unfamiliar words by using context clues
Recall details from narratives; story elements including setting, characters, and
resolution
Make an inference based on characters and character traits
Essays & Media
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Illustration
Essay: Activity
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Narrative
Essay: Activity
Everyday sayings, proverbs, and common abbreviations
Essay: Written Response
The process of going from a specific account to general statements
Definition and examples of summary; students read a story and identify points
to be included in a summary
Answer the who, what, when, where, why and how questions in a reading
selection
Use major elements of story structure: beginning-middle-end, character,
setting, and plot to discuss literature and write a story; conflict and resolution
Distinguish the author’s purpose in writing to inform, persuade, or entertain;
identify point of view
Using prior knowledge to understand the problems and feelings of characters in
stories, and the importance of historical events
Definition and examples of historical fiction; understanding the elements of
time and setting
Essay: Written Response
Definition and examples of realistic fiction and science fiction
Understand elements of nonfiction; identify source of nonfictional writing
including: encyclopedias, atlases, etc.
96
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Narrative
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written response
Essay: Written Response
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Written Response
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Research
Reading V
Grade Level 5
Lesson Title
Lesson Content
37
Folktales and Fables
Definition and examples of tall tales, folktales, and fables
38
Reality and Fantasy
39
Literary Forms 1
40
Literary Forms 2
Short stories; problems in resolution; characters and setting
41
Literary Forms 3
Autobiography; biography; understand the purpose and form of a biography
42
Figurative Language
Understand figurative language used in stories and poetry; using hyperbole,
alliteration, and onomatopoeia
43
Narrative &
Expository
44
Propaganda and Bias
45
High Frequency
Words
Definition of fantasy; recognizing the difference between reality and fantasy;
distinguishing between real and make-believe
Literary Skills
Understand figurative language used in stories, poetry, metaphors, similes,
personification, hyperbole, alliteration, and onomatopoeia
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Illustration
Essay: Narrative
Identify propaganda and bias including: techniques of omission of facts,
bandwagon, over-generalization, and testimonials
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Written Response
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Written Response
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Written Response
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Written Response
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Written Response
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Written Response
Identify high frequency words and core subject words
Essay: Activity
Identify narrative materials and expository writing
97
Reading VI
Grade Level 6
Lesson Title
1
Consonant Review
2
Vowel Review
3
Verb Review
4
Pronunciation
5
Sight Words
6
Common
Misspellings
7
Root Words
8
Prefixes
9
Suffixes
10
Greek and Latin
Words
11
Context Clues
12
Compound Words
13
14
15
Synonyms
Antonyms
Homonyms
16
Homographs and
Homophones
17
Contractions
Lesson Content
Identify initial and single consonant sounds, and sound-letter correspondences;
final consonant sounds and sound-letter correspondences; medial consonant
sounds and sound-letter correspondences; blends and digraphs
Identify short vowel sounds and sound-letter correspondences; long vowel
sounds and sound-letter correspondences
Identify verbs in sentences; forms of regular verbs; verb forms: past, present,
and future; vowel pairs and vowel digraphs
Review of pronunciation skills; long and short vowels; pronunciation symbols
Word Analysis
Develop a sight vocabulary of high frequency words
Review of words that have tricky spellings and words that are confused with
others and commonly misused; also includes some words that change spelling
to form plurals
Root words without spelling changes; root words with spelling changes;
prefixes and suffixes
Correctly use the prefixes pre-, en-, non-, mis-, non-, in- and im-, dis-, anti-,
sub-, re-, etc.
Correctly use the suffixes -ible, -able, -ful, -ment, -y, -ly, and -ily, -ance, -tion,
and –ment
Examples and definitions of words with Greek and Latin derivatives; old English
words; middle and modern English words
Select the correct meaning for unfamiliar words by using pictures or familiar
words context clues; use structural analysis to determine the meaning of
unknown words; search for further information
Definition and examples of compound words; students identify compound
words
Definition of synonyms; students practice finding synonyms for words
Definition of antonyms; students practice finding antonyms for words
Definition of homonyms; selecting the correct homonym in sentences
Definition, examples of, and use of homophones and homographs; correctly
use the homophones: here/hear; to/too/two; its/it’s; your/you’re;
they’re/there/their, etc.; words with multiple meanings
Forming contractions; using negative words with contractions; identify words
that form compound words; how to avoid confusing compound words and
contractions
98
Essays & Media
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Narrative
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Narrative
Essay: Letter Writing
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Narrative
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Reading VI
Grade Level 6
Lesson Title
18
Sound Associations
19
Analogies
20
Abbreviations
21
Core Subject Words
23
Multiple Meaning
Words
Sequencing
24
Alphabetization
22
25
Main Ideas
26
Fact and Opinion
27
Conflict and Climax
28
Cause and Effect
29
Compare and
Contrast
30
Characterization
31
Predicting and
Summarizing
32
Drawing Conclusions
33
Five “W” Questions
Lesson Content
Sounds that are associated with various letters and letter combinations;
digraphs; letters that have more than one sound
Definition and examples of analogies; includes examples of analogies as they
often appear on standardized tests
Identify and correctly use abbreviations; measurement abbreviations and
business abbreviations
Identify and use words from: language arts, math, social studies, science, art,
drama, and technology,
Essays & Media
Essay: Activity
Essay: Activity
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Diagram
Essay: Illustration
Understand multiple meanings of words; define connotation and denotation
Essay: Written Response
Importance of sequence in telling a story; words that identify sequence
Essay: Illustration
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Activity
Alphabetize to the third letter
Comprehension
Identify main idea and details; recognize the title as a source of the main idea;
determine the key words and topic sentence; recall details from stories
Identify facts and opinions, idioms, and sense words; choose significant details
which do or do not support the main idea; identify information which gives
support for opinions
Understand conflict, climax, comparisons, and resolution in selections
Definitions of cause and effect; students identify various causes and effects by
reading clues; classifying various groups of items; explicit and implicit cause
and effect; words that signal cause or effect
Definition and examples of comparing and contrasting ideas, events,
characters, etc.
Make an inference based on characters and character traits; identify various
personality types
Review of cause and effect; read and predict outcomes based on knowledge
gained in reading; summarizing
Explanation of how word clues about main ideas and details of stories can help
the student reach a conclusion; examination and discussion of evidence that
helps support conclusions
Answer the who, what, when, where, why and how questions in a reading
selection
99
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Illustration
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Reading VI
Grade Level 6
Lesson Title
34
Story Elements
35
Purpose in Writing
36
Paraphrasing
37
Point of View
38
39
Novels and Short
Stories
Realistic/Science
Fiction
40
Mysteries
41
Propaganda and Bias
42
Folklore
43
Nonfiction
44
Poetry
Lesson Content
Use major elements of story structure: beginning-middle-end, character,
setting, and plot to discuss literature and write a story; mood
Distinguish the author’s purpose: the KWL technique; writing for entertainment
and for information; audience
Students will retell a story in their own words; generalizations; tips for
paraphrasing
Recognizing point of view; first person, second person, third person, and
narrator; omniscience
Identify the elements of a short stories and novels; plot; characters; conflict
Understand elements of nonfiction; definition and examples of historical fiction;
understanding the elements of time and setting
Definition and elements of a mystery; clues in mysteries; skills for
understanding mysteries
Identification of propaganda techniques; bandwagon, testimonials, faulty
cause, and loaded words
The elements of folktales, fables, and tall tales
Identify biographies and autobiographies; essay and journals
Use of poetry, ballad, sonnet, lyric, narrative, and limerick
Essays & Media
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Narrative
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Written Response
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Activity
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Written Response
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Journal Writing
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Written Response
Literary Skills
45
Drama
Use of elements of drama: tragedy and comedy
46
Mood and Tone
The elements of mood and tone in reading selections; clues for recognizing
mood and tone
47
Metaphors and
Similes
Identification of metaphors and similes in reading selections
48
Figurative Language
Identify and correctly use alliteration and onomatopoeia; personification and
hyperbole
100
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Written Response
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Narrative
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Written Response
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Activity
Reading VII
Grade Level 7
Lesson Title
1
Verbs Quick Review
2
Consonants Quick
Review
3
Vowels Quick Review
4
Pronunciation
5
Root Words
6
Prefixes and Suffixes
Greek and Latin
Words
7
8
Context Clues
10
Connotation &
Denotation
Multiple Meanings
11
Compound Words
12
Contractions
9
13
14
15
Common
Misspellings
Abbreviations
Synonyms and
Antonyms
16
Word Similarities
17
Alphabetization
Lesson Content
Identify verbs in sentences; forms of regular verbs; verb forms: past, present,
and future; active and passive voices
Identify initial and single consonant sounds, and sound-letter correspondences;
final consonant sounds and sound-letter correspondences; medial consonant
sounds and sound-letter correspondences; blends and digraphs
Identify short vowel sounds and sound-letter correspondences, and correctly
read 3-4 letter words; long vowel sounds and sound-letter correspondences;
vowel combinations
Word Analysis
Use phonetic clues and diacritical marks to identify word pronunciation
Root words without spelling changes; root words with spelling changes; Latin
and Greek root words; prefixes and suffixes
The use of prefixes; affixes and suffixes with root words
Examples and definitions of words with Greek and Latin derivatives
Select the correct meaning for unfamiliar words by using pictures or familiar
words context clues; use structural analysis to determine the meaning of
unknown words
Recognize the definition of a word in a sentence; recognize the exact definition
of a word in a sentence; positive and negative connotations
Recognize and understand the multiple meanings of words
Definition and examples of compound words; students identify compound
words; separated and hyphenated compound words
The formation of contractions; identifying differences among plural, possessive,
and contraction
Understanding changes with plurals; verbs; vowel sounds; dropping final ‘e’;
doubling rule; changing ‘y’ to ‘i’
Identify and correctly use abbreviations
Definition of synonyms and antonyms; practice finding synonyms and
antonyms for words; definition of antonyms
Changing the first or last letters to form word families, use letter sounds
association and sounds to spell words
Alphabetize to the third letter; using guide words; how to alphabetize short
and long words
101
Essays & Media
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Letter writing
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Written Response
Reading VII
Grade Level 7
Lesson Title
18
19
20
21
Main Ideas and
Details
Sequencing and
Outcomes
Classifying
Information
Compare and
Contrast
22
Summarizing and
Paraphrasing
23
Fact and Opinion
24
Propaganda and Bias
25
Cause and Effect
26
Common
Expressions
27
Purpose in Writing
28
Point of View
29
Fiction
30
Elements of Fiction
Lesson Content
Comprehension
Identify main idea and details; recognize the title as a source of the main idea;
determine the key words and topic sentence
Put in order of sequence; students read clues and decide what could happen
next in a story; chronological order and spatial order
Definition of classifying; students classify various groups of items; finding
general to specific order; sub-groups
Definition and examples of comparing and contrasting ideas, events,
characters, etc.; transitions
Definition and examples of summary; students read a story and identify points
to be included in a summary; the process of going from a specific account to
general statements; paraphrasing; avoiding plagiarism
Identify facts and opinions, idioms, and sense words; choose significant details
which do or do not support the main idea; identify information which gives
support for opinions; verifying facts
Essays & Media
Essay: Expository writing
Essay: Narrative Writing
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Compare and
Contrast writing
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Expository writing
Identify propaganda and bias; bandwagon; testimonials
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Written Response
Definitions of cause and effect; students identify various causes and effects by
reading clues; short and long term effects
Essay: Expository writing
Everyday sayings, proverbs, and common abbreviations
Essay: Written Response
Distinguish the author’s purpose; narrative, descriptive, expository, and
persuasive writing
Recognizing points of view; first person, second person, third person, and
narrator
Understand elements of nonfiction; definition and examples of historical fiction;
understanding the elements of time and setting
Use major elements of story structure; exciting force; rising and falling action;
complications
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Narrative Writing
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Written Response
Study: EB Learning Material
CV Videos
Essay: Written Response
Literary Skills
31
Literary Terms
32
Fables and Folktales
Identify the elements of flashback and foreshadowing; mood and tone
Definition and examples of fables, folktales, and tall tales; fantasy
102
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Writer's Choice
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Narrative Writing
Reading VII
Grade Level 7
Lesson Title
33
Nonfiction
34
Newspaper Writing
35
Poetry
36
Plays
39
Figurative Language
1
Figurative Language
2
Analogies
40
Special Vocabulary
37
38
Lesson Content
Understand elements of nonfiction; essay; autobiography and biography;
narratives
Identify the important elements in newspaper articles; lead sentences; topic
sentences; concluding sentences; using the inverted pyramid to answer five
“W” questions
Poetry; ballad; sonnet; free verse; imagery in poetry; lyric poetry
Identify the elements of a drama: tragedy and comedy; script; stage
directions; playwrights; tragic hero; tragic flaw; melodrama
Identifying and correctly using metaphors and similes
Identifying and correctly using similes, hyperbole, and personification;
alliteration, onomatopoeia, oxymorons, and contradictions
Examples of analogies; relationships of words; logic
Words common to math, science, government, transportation, other
languages, weather, space, business, theatre, and ecology
103
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Narrative Writing
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Narrative Writing
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Written Response
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Written Response
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Written Response
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Reading VIII
Grade Level 8
1
Lesson Title
Consonants Quick
Review
2
Verbs Quick Review
3
Sight Vocabulary
5
Common
Misspellings
Root Words
6
Prefixes
7
Suffixes
8
Greek and Latin
Words
9
Compound Words
10
Synonyms
11
Antonyms
12
Homophones
13
Word Similarities
14
Contractions
15
Word Families
16
Analogies
17
Connotation &
Denotation
18
Multiple Meanings
19
Alphabetization
4
Lesson Content
Students identify consonant-vowel patterns that help determine pronunciation;
letters with two sounds; blends, digraphs, and diphthongs
Identify the principle parts of verbs; action and state of being verbs; tenses;
participles
Word Analysis
High frequency words that students recognize on sight
Understanding changes with plurals; verbs; vowel sounds; rules for spelling
tricky words; exceptions to spelling rules
Root words without spelling changes; root words with spelling changes
Correctly use the prefixes pre-, en-, non-, mis-, non-, in- and im-, dis-, anti-,
sub-, re-, etc.; meanings of prefixes
Definition and examples of suffixes; meaning of various suffixes; correct use of
the suffixes -ible, -able, -ful, -ment, -y, -ly and -ily
Essays & Media
Essay: Activity
Essay: Narrative Writing
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Activity
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Activity
Examples and definitions of root words with Greek and Latin derivatives
Definition and examples of compound words; students identify compound
words
Definition of synonyms; students practice finding synonyms for words; using
the thesaurus as a source for synonyms
Definition and examples of antonyms; students identify antonyms in sentences
Definition of homophones; looking for clues in a sentence that indicate which
homophone should be used
Review of homographs; using context to determine meaning and word
pronunciation
Contractions by verb groups: has, will, us, are, would, and have; negative
contractions
Changing the first letter or letters to form word families
Discovering the commonality that creates an analogy; analogies on
standardized tests
Recognize the definition of a word in a sentence; recognize the exact definition
of a word in a sentence; make an inference based on feelings and motives
Increasing reading comprehension by understanding words with multiple
meanings; using context clues to determine word meaning
Tips for alphabetizing; alphabetizing abbreviations
104
Essay: Illustration
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Expository
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Activity
Essay: Activity
Essay: Activity
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Reading VIII
Grade Level 8
Lesson Title
20
Core Subject Words
21
Order and Sequence
22
Main Ideas and
Details
23
Fact and Opinion
24
Cause and Effect
27
Compare and
Contrast
Classifying
Information
Characterization
28
Summarizing
29
Predicting Outcomes
30
Common
Expressions
31
Newspaper Writing
25
26
32
Elements of Fiction
33
Purpose in Writing
Lesson Content
Definition and examples of core subject words, including: math, science,
language arts, computer, social studies, art, and drama
Students determine order of events; students read clues and decide what could
happen next in a story
Identify main idea and details; recognize the title as a source of the main idea;
determine the key words and topic sentence; the position of the topic sentence
in a paragraph
Identify facts and opinions, idioms, and sense words; choose significant details
which do or do not support the main idea; identify information which gives
support for opinions; verifying facts
Definitions of cause and effect; students identify various causes and effects by
reading clues; short and long term effects
Definition and examples of comparing and contrasting ideas, events,
characters, etc.; the thesis statement; similarities and differences
Essays & Media
Essay: Research
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Narrative Writing
Essay: Descriptive Writing
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Narrative Writing
Essay: Written Response
Definition of classifying; students classify various groups of items
Essay: Written Response
Identifying clues about character traits
Definition and examples of summary; students read a story and identify points
to be included in a summary; the process of going from a specific account to
general statements; students will retell a story in their own words;
paraphrasing; avoiding plagiarism; generalizations
Make an inference based on drawing conclusions; logic and character’s actions
in making inferences
Everyday humorous sayings, proverbs, and common abbreviations; using
euphemisms in informal language
Elements of newspaper reporting; answer the who, what, when, where, why
and how questions in a reading; identify propaganda and bias; headlines,
bylines, and datelines; propaganda techniques including: loaded words,
transfer, and unreliable testimonials
Categories of fiction; elements of fiction including: rising action, climax, falling
action, resolution, characters, setting, and theme; historical science and
realistic fiction
Essay: Narrative Writing
Distinguish the author’s purpose; writing for a specific or a general purpose
105
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Illustrations
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Written Response
Study: EB Learning Material
CV Videos
Essay: Written Response
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Written Response
Reading VIII
Grade Level 8
Lesson Title
34
Nonfiction
35
Point of View
36
Folklore
37
Poetry 1
38
Poetry 2
39
Plays
40
Literary Devices
41
Figurative Language
42
Figure of Speech
Review
Lesson Content
Identify elements of nonfictional writing; biography, autobiography, essay,
newspaper, and historical accounts
Recognizing point of view; first person, second person, third person, and
narrator; understand elements of nonfiction; third person omniscient narrator
and third person limited narrator
Literary Skills
Definition and examples of fables, folktales, and tall tales; tricksters; symbols
Poetry; ballad; sonnet; lyric; narrative; limerick; free verse; identify the
elements of a farce and satire; irony and parody; oxymorons; rhythm patterns
in poetry
Characteristics of narrative poetry; heroic adventures; importance of rhyming
in narrative poetry
Identify the elements of a drama, tragedy, and comedy; scenes and acts
Identify elements of mood and tone; identify flashback as a literary tool;
identify foreshadowing and imagery as literary tools; mood and tone
Identifying and correctly using metaphors and similes; identifying and correctly
using similes, hyperbole, and personification; using alliteration and
onomatopoeia
Review of overstatement and understatement; analogy; irony, hyperbole,
personification, clichés, euphemisms, and doublespeak
106
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Activity
Essay: Narrative Writing
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Written Response
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Narrative Writing
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Letter writing
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Written Response
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Activity
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Activity
English Literature IX - XII
Grade Levels 9 - 12
A+LS English Literature IX - XII introduces students to the
following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
reading of a broad range of classic works of
literature
novels
plays
short stories
understanding and appreciation of literary works
structured study of the human condition
exploration of the universal themes of literature
application of literature to life today
literary terms, devices, and forms
comprehension through concrete questions
comprehension through higher-order thinking skills
comprehension through synthesizing learning into
new ideas and concepts
use of study aids
107
Literature and English Skills
Grade Levels IX - XII
The A+LS™ Literature and English Skills courses are an integrated series of titles for grade levels 9-12. Combining instruction in
the areas of Reading, Vocabulary, and Language Usage, the English Skills courseware provides a complete High School English
course when coupled with the companion Literature titles. The A+LS Literature courses are composed of four titles that
represent a guided study of a broad range of classic works of literature. The complete text of each of these classic works is
presented within the lesson. Each lesson provides an introduction to the chapters that will be read and provides interactive
study aids similar to a reference library in a classroom.
•
Literature and English Skills is presented as
a collection of year-long courses.
•
All lessons contain a study guide, a practice
test, and mastery test. Most lessons have an
essay or constructed response.
•
Lessons include a variety of essay types
such as descriptive, persuasive, expository,
and letter writing. Students will also
complete a self-evaluation form to assess
their performance.
•
These courses are certified by MetaMetrics®
with a Lexile® score.
108
Literature and English Skills
Grade Levels IX - XII
•
A+® VIP Bundle customers receive access to Encyclopædia Britannica® Online School Edition (EB) workspaces which
contain learning materials. Learning materials may contain articles, games, images, maps, and/or videos. Clearvue (CV)
video clips may be included as well.
•
The content in these courses is designed to meet and exceed the requirements of the National Council of Teachers of
English (NCTE) for the Standards of English Language Arts.
•
The Literature lessons provide a broad exposure to literature, enabling the student to acquire the necessary skills to
understand and appreciate literature for a lifetime.
•
Students will study the human condition through the exploration of the universal themes of literature, literary terms,
devices and forms, and their application to life.
•
The Usage component of both the Literature and English Skills titles offers extensive focus on the convention of writing
which includes parts of speech, proper sentence structure, and sentence diagramming.
•
Students are taught to identify grammar pitfalls that include subject/verb disagreement, tense shifts, double negatives,
fragments and run-on sentences, parallelism, and misused words. Sentence mechanics are addressed in each course.
Lessons also provide instruction on capitalization and punctuation.
109
Literature and English Skills
Grade Levels IX - XII
Due to the interactive nature of the A+ VIP Bundle, there are a few specific software requirements:
•
o
EB requires a web browser, the following are recommended:
ƒ Microsoft Internet Explorer® versions 6.0 or higher
ƒ Safari® versions 2.0 or higher
Note: EB requires cookies enabled.
o
EB interactive activities require a web browser equipped with the Adobe® Flash® and Shockwave plug-ins.
Available at: www.adobe.com (select Get ADOBE FLASH PLAYER and Get Shockwave Player).
o
EB video clips are offered in Windows Media® and MPEG-4 formats. You’ll need to have a media player installed
that will support these formats:
ƒ Quicktime® - available at: www.apple.com/quicktime/download
ƒ Windows Media® Player - available at: www.microsoft.com/windows/windowsmedia/download
Numerous links to the Internet are provided in the A+ VIP Bundle. An Internet connection is not required for completion
of this course, but it is required to utilize the EB components of the A+ VIP Bundle.
110
Literature and English Skills
Grade Levels IX - XII
A Four-Step Approach: Study Guide, Practice Test, Mastery Test, and Essay, defines the instructional environment.
•
The Study Guide module provides a text- and graphics-based delivery of material that is reinforced by pictures and
diagrams supported by a wealth of content. Study Guides teach the concepts and skills associated with each lesson. A
number of the Study Guide pages have specific, interactive feedback that will assist students in solving problems or
understanding concepts.
•
The Practice Test module allows students to practice the
skills learned in the Study Guide section. The student
has instant access to the study material for reference.
•
In the Mastery Test module, the student takes a scored
examination and then electronically submits the test.
The results are recorded in the A+LS Management
System.
•
The Essay module allows the student to compose
individual, free-form answers to a wide variety of
questions and problems.
The A+ VIP Bundle includes Encyclopædia Britannica Online
School Edition, which has teacher resources and student
learning materials. The materials include a wide range of
interactive lessons, research projects, animations, and
worksheets that support the Literature and English Skills
courses.
•
•
Literature and English Skills contains EB workspaces.
Each workspace may contain an article, diagram, study
guide, video, or interactive media.
111
Literature and English Skills
Grade Levels IX - XII
The Literature and English Skills courses each contain a variety of lessons and differ in length, grade level, and available
features. Listed below are the courses found within the curriculum planning manual.
Number of
Lessons
Length of
Course in
Semesters
Grade
Levels
Lexile
Measure
English Literature IX
42
2
9
Yes
English Literature X
56
2
10
Yes
English Literature XI
52
2
11
Yes
English Literature XII
33
2
12
Yes
English Skills IX
40
2
9
Yes
English Skills X
38
2
10
Yes
English Skills XI
36
2
11
Yes
English Skills XII
34
2
12
Yes
Course
Name
112
English Literature IX
Grade Level 9
Lesson Title
Introduction
1
Chapters 1-2
2
Chapters 3-5
3
Chapters 6-8
4
Chapters 9-10
Introduction
1
Books 1-2
Lesson Content
The Strange Case of Dr. Jekyll and Mr. Hyde
The Strange Case of Dr. Jekyll and Mr. Hyde is the story of Dr. Jekyll, a
respected scientist in nineteenth century London. The theme of good versus
evil is used to illustrate the changes in Jekyll's character.
Chapter 1 - Story of the Door: Mr. Utterson and his cousin, Mr. Enfield, take
their weekly Sunday walk and discuss a man named Edward Hyde who had
trampled a young girl in the street.
Chapter 2 - Search for Mr. Hyde: Mr. Utterson meets Hyde in the street
outside the building and is disappointed to find Dr. Jekyll is not at home.
Chapter 3 - Dr. Jekyll Was Quite at Ease: Dr. Jekyll hosts a dinner party at his
home for some of his friends, and Utterson expresses his dislike for Hyde.
Chapter 4 - The Carew Murder Case: All of London talks about the murder of
Sir Danvers Carew, witnessed by a maidservant looking out her window.
Chapter 5 - Incident of the Letter: Mr. Utterson discovers some surprising
information about Dr. Jekyll in a letter Jekyll asked him to keep.
Chapter 6 - Remarkable Incident of Dr. Lanyon: Dr. Jekyll hosts another
dinner party at his home; days later, Jekyll and Lanyon become very ill.
Chapter 7 - Incident at the Window: Mr. Utterson and Mr. Enfield walk past
Dr. Jekyll's house and witness a shocking accident. They quickly leave the
scene.
Chapter 8 - The Last Night: Dr. Jekyll's butler and Utterson make an
astonishing discovery about Jekyll.
Chapter 9 - Dr. Lanyon's Narrative: Dr. Lanyon reveals he has received a
letter from Dr. Jekyll asking for help.
Chapter 10 - Henry Jekyll's Full Statement of the Case: All the mysteries of
the story are revealed to the reader and illustrate the duality theme and
Jekyll's struggle with Mr. Hyde.
The Odyssey
Using flashback, Odysseus shares accounts of the obstacles he faces in
returning home from the Trojan War.
Book 1 – Athene Intervenes: On Mount Olympus, Athene tells Zeus that
Odysseus should leave the island of Calypso.
Book 2 - Telemachus Is Called into Action: Telemachus calls the people
together and begins a search for his father.
113
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Descriptive
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Compare and Contrast
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Descriptive
English Literature IX
Grade Level 9
Lesson Title
2
Books 3-4
3
Books 5-6
4
Books 7-8
5
Books 9-10
6
Books 11-12
7
Books 13-14
8
Books 15-16
Lesson Content
Book 3 - Telemachus and Nestor Meet: King Nestor relates a story of the
Trojan War and offers to help Telemachus in his search for his father.
Book 4 - Telemachus Conferences with Menelaus at Sparta: Telemachus
meets with Menelaus who says Odysseus is held captive on the island of
Calypso.
Book 5 - Calypso Frees Odysseus: Odysseus is attacked by Poseidon, thrown
into the sea, and washes up on the shore of Phaecia.
Book 6 - The Phaeacians Aid Odysseus: Odysseus finally awakens on the shore
of Phaecia and approaches Princess Nausicaa.
Book 7 - Odysseus Presents Himself to the King: The king invites Odysseus to
a banquet and offers to help Odysseus get safely home.
Book 8 - The Hospitality of the Phaeacians: Odysseus takes part in an athletic
competition and tells people at a banquet about his adventures since leaving
Troy.
Book 9 - The Land of the Cyclops: Odysseus describes the Lotus Eaters and
the herdsman and relates the story of the Cyclops.
Book 10 - Aeolus and Circe: Odysseus describes how he met Aeolus, the
Keeper of the Winds, and how his men were caught in a hurricane, destroying
their ship.
Book 11 - The Journey to Hades: Odysseus tells how he traveled "to the
furthest edge of Ocean's stream to the land to which all journey when they
die."
Book 12 - More Perils on the Way Home: Odysseus relates how he and his
men went past the Sirens near the cliff where Scylla is located and is again
shipwrecked.
Book 13 - The Return to Ithaca: The King orders his men to return Odysseus
to Ithaca. Odysseus arrives disguised as a beggar.
Book 14 - Odysseus as a Beggar: The swineherd, Eumaeus, welcomes the
disguised Odysseus and gives him a meal and a place to sleep.
Book 15 - Telemachus Goes Home: Athene tells Telemachus to go home and
warns him about the ambush planned by the wooers.
Book 16 - Father and Son Reunited: Telemachus manages to avoid the
ambush of the wooers and meets the disguised Odysseus. Odysseus' true
identity is not discovered until later.
114
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Expository
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Descriptive
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Expository
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Compare and Contrast
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Compare and Contrast
English Literature IX
Grade Level 9
Lesson Title
9
Books 17-18
10
Books 19-20
11
Books 21-22
12
Books 23-24
Introduction
1
Act I, Scenes 1-5
2
Act II, Scenes 1-6
3
Act III, Scenes 1-5
4
Act IV, Scenes 1-5
5
Act V, Scenes 1-3
Lesson Content
Book 17 - Odysseus Arrives at the Palace: Odysseus arrives in town dressed
as a beggar. No one recognizes his true identity.
Book 18 - The Wooers Torment Odysseus: Odysseus argues with a real
beggar and breaks the man's jaw.
Book 19 - Penelope and the Beggar Meet: Odysseus, in disguise, talks to
Penelope and is finally recognized by some of the servants.
Book 20 - Odysseus' Plan: Zeus gives Odysseus a sign the next day, and a
prophet tells the suitors of a vision of the future.
Book 21 - Contest for the Wooers: Penelope announces she will marry the
man who can string the bow. Odysseus asks if he can try.
Book 22 - The Death of the Wooers: Odysseus shoots Antinous in the throat
with an arrow and fights the wooers with Telemachus.
Book 23 - Odysseus and Penelope's Reunion: The mansion burns and
Penelope tests Odysseus to prove his true identity.
Book 24 - Peace Comes to Ithaca: Odysseus travels to the country to rescue
his father, King Laertes, and has to again fight the wooers with Telemachus.
Romeo and Juliet
Romeo and Juliet face powerful opposition to their love as their families, the
Montagues and Capulets, engage in an age-old feud. Neither family is willing to
end their violent confrontations with one another.
Romeo attends a party given by Juliet's family and meets Juliet. They are
immediately drawn to each other.
Romeo and Juliet realize they love each other and secretly marry.
Tybalt kills Mercutio in a duel. Romeo slays Tybalt and is banished from the
city. Juliet is broken hearted.
Juliet meets with Friar Laurence and tells him about the situation with Romeo.
The friar develops a plan to help Romeo and Juliet.
Romeo consults an apothecary and returns to Verona. Several twists of fate
end Romeo and Juliet's tragic love.
115
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Descriptive
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Expository
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Expository
Study: EB Learning Material
Study: EB Learning
Essay: Descriptive
Study: EB Learning
Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning
Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning
Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning
Essay: Persuasive
Material
Material
Material
Material
Material
English Literature IX
Grade Level 9
Lesson Title
Introduction
1
Book 1 – Chapters
1-3
2
Book 1 – Chapters
4-6
3
Book 2 – Chapters
1-3
4
Book 2 – Chapters
4-6
Lesson Content
A Tale of Two Cities
A Tale of Two Cities describes the lives of the main characters, Charles Darnay,
Dr. Manette, and his daughter, Lucie Manette, during the French Revolution.
The story depicts the struggles between the common people and the noble
class.
Chapter 1 - The Period: The narrator describes the political, social, and
economic conditions in France and England in 1775.
Chapter 2 - The Mail: On a cold November night, a mail coach travels toward
Dover, England. A rider approaches the coach and delivers a strange message
to one of the passengers.
Chapter 3 - The Night Shadows: The passengers in the coach keep their
secrets to themselves, including the passenger who received the curious
message from the rider.
Chapter 4 - The Preparation: Mr. Jarvis Lorry arrives in Dover and meets with
a visitor he is expecting.
Chapter 5 - The Wine-shop: Ernest and Madame Defarge own a wine-shop
and are soon to host an important family reunion.
Chapter 6 - The Shoemaker: The shoemaker, and the events of his life, is
shown as a central figure in the novel.
Chapter 1 - Five Years Later: Mr. Lorry helps the shoemaker leave France and
five years pass. Mr. Lorry now works at Tellson's Bank, a center of business
activity in London.
Chapter 2 - A Sight: A clerk at Tellson's Bank sends Jerry to the Bailey courts
to wait for a message from Mr. Lorry. Mr. Lorry attends the treason trial of
Charles Darnay.
Chapter 3 - A Disappointment: Evidence at the trial relates to Mr. Lorry's trip
from France five years earlier.
Chapter 4 - Congratulatory: Charles Darnay is found innocent of the charge of
treason.
Chapter 5 - The Jackal: A conversation occurs between C.J. Stryver and his
assistant, Sydney Carton.
Chapter 6 - Hundreds of People: Mr. Lorry visits the Manette home and talks
to Miss Pross, the Manette family nurse.
116
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Expository
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Expository
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Compare and Contrast
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Persuasive
English Literature IX
Grade Level 9
Lesson Title
5
Book 2 – Chapters
7-9
6
Book 2 – Chapters
10-12
7
Book 2 – Chapters
13-15
8
Book 2 – Chapters
16-18
Lesson Content
Chapter 7 - Monseigneur in Town: A French nobleman, the Marquis, hits a
child in his coach. His reaction demonstrates the attitude of the French nobility
toward the common people.
Chapter 8 - Monseigneur in the Country: The Marquis leaves Paris on his
journey to his country home. He ignores the needs of the poor people who live
in and around a village near his home.
Chapter 9 - The Gorgon's Head: The Marquis receives a visit at his home by
his nephew, Charles Darnay. They discuss the social conditions of the people of
France.
Chapter 10 - Two Promises: Darnay plans to ask Dr. Manette for permission
to marry Lucie Manette.
Chapter 11 - A Companion Picture: C.J. Stryver and Sydney Carton visit in
Stryver's law office, and Stryver tells Carton he is considering marriage.
Chapter 12 - The Fellow Delicacy: Stryver decides to go to the Manette home
and asks Lucie to marry him. Mr. Lorry offers a suggestion as to how Stryver
should proceed with the marriage proposal.
Chapter 13 - The Fellow of No Delicacy: Sydney Carton talks to Lucie about
his lonely life and his feelings toward her.
Chapter 14 - The Honest Tradesman: Jerry tells his wife that he has to go out
on an errand. Jerry's son follows his father at a distance.
Chapter 15 - Knitting: The mender of roads relates the story of Gaspard, and
his murder of the Marquis who killed his child.
Chapter 16 - Still Knitting: The wine-shop becomes a center of activity for the
planning of the French Revolution. A spy tells the Defarges news about Charles
Darnay and the Manette family.
Chapter 17 - One Night: Lucie and Charles Darnay plan to marry the next
day. Lucie spends the evening visiting with her father, Dr. Manette.
Chapter 18 - Nine Days: On the day of his wedding, Charles Darnay talks
privately with Dr. Manette. Manette is concerned about something Darnay tells
him.
117
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Descriptive
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Expository
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Compare and Contrast
English Literature IX
Grade Level 9
Lesson Title
9
Book 2 – Chapters
19-21
10
Book 2 – Chapters
22-24
11
Book 3 – Chapters
1-3
12
Book 3 – Chapters
4-6
13
Book 3 – Chapters
7-9
Lesson Content
Chapter 19 - An Opinion: Mr. Lorry visits Dr. Manette to ask his medical
advice about one of Lorry's friends. The doctor leaves to join Lucie and her
husband on their honeymoon.
Chapter 20 - A Plea: Lucie and Charles Darnay return from their honeymoon,
and Sydney Carton is the first person to visit the couple.
Chapter 21 - Echoing Footsteps: Lucie and Charles have a happy marriage.
They soon have a daughter named Lucie.
Chapter 22 - The Sea Still Rises: Weeks after the French Revolution begins,
the revolutionaries plan how to kidnap and kill the governor of the district.
Chapter 23 - Fire Rises: All of France is in an uproar as the French Revolution
continues. People from the village watch the home of the Marquis burn to the
ground.
Chapter 24 - Drawn to the Loadstone Rock: Mr. Lorry plans to go to France
and work in the Tellson Branch in Paris. Darnay receives a letter from an old
friend in France asking for his help.
Chapter 1 - In Secret: Darnay encounters many difficulties during his journey
in France. He is taken into custody by revolutionary guards.
Chapter 2 - The Grindstone: Lucie and Dr. Manette visit Mr. Lorry and tell of
Charles' arrest.
Chapter 3 - The Shadow: Mr. Lorry finds a Paris apartment for Lucie and her
family to live in and leaves Jerry to protect the Manette family.
Chapter 4 - Calm in Storm: Dr. Manette treats prisoners in three different
prisons. Many people, including the King and Queen of France are executed on
La Guillotine.
Chapter 5 - The Wood-sawyer: Lucie waits for one year and three months
while her husband is held in La Force Prison. She becomes friends with a woodsawyer who works nearby.
Chapter 6 - Triumph: Charles Darnay's trial begins and the jury votes to set
him free.
Chapter 7 - A Knock at the Door: The Manettes continue to live in Paris and
survive the trying times. Four guards arrest Charles Darnay.
Chapter 8 - A Hand at Cards: At the market, Jerry Cruncher and Miss Pross
see a man they recognize and accuse him of being a spy.
Chapter 9 - The Game Made: Carton tells Lorry that he has a plan to help
Charles Darnay.
118
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Descriptive
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Expository
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Descriptive
English Literature IX
Grade Level 9
Lesson Title
14
Book 3 – Chapters
10-12
15
Book 3 – Chapters
13-15
1
The Locket
2
The Masque of the
Red Death
Lesson Content
Chapter 10 - The Substance of the Shadow: The testimony at Charles
Darnay's trial involves an incident from years ago that involves the Marquis,
the Defarges, and Charles Darnay's family.
Chapter 11 - Dusk: Darnay's trial ends in conviction and a death sentence.
Carton and Mr. Lorry both agree that nothing can save Charles Darnay.
Chapter 12 - Darkness: Madame tells the people in the wine-shop that she
plans to denounce Lucie. Carton tells Mr. Lorry that he has a plan to help the
Manette family and to save Charles Darnay.
Chapter 13 - Fifty-two: On the day of Charles Darnay's execution, events
dramatically change the lives of many of the characters, including Darnay,
Carton, and the Manette family.
Chapter 14 - The Knitting Done: Madame Defarge and her friends hold a
meeting at the wine-shop, and she decides to go to the Manette apartment and
confront Lucie.
Chapter 15 - The Footsteps Die Out For Ever: A large crowd waits in the
streets of Paris for the executions to begin. The author reveals the present and
future fate of all the characters.
Short Stories
"The Locket" is set during the Civil War, which was fought between the slave
states of the South and the free states of the North.
The main theme of "The Masque of the Red Death" is fear of the inevitable as
the Prince and his guests attempt to hide from death. They are foolish to
believe they can escape by locking themselves inside.
119
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Expository
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Persuasive
English Literature X
Grade Level 10
Lesson Title
Introduction
1
Chapters 1-2
2
Chapters 3-4
3
Chapters 5-6
4
Chapters 7-9
5
Chapters 10-12
6
Chapters 13-15
Lesson Content
The Jungle
The families of Jurgis Rudkus and Ona Lukoszaite face many obstacles after
immigrating to America from Lithuania in the early 1900s. They are
defenseless against those people who take advantage of their situation.
Chapter 1: Ona Lukoszaite and Jurgis Rudkus celebrate their wedding in
Packingtown, located in the stockyards of Chicago.
Chapter 2: The characters think about their lives in Lithuania and their
journey to America.
Chapter 3: - Jokubas Szedvilas considers the journey to America. Others view
him as an example of the wonderful opportunities in America.
Chapter 4: Jurgis and family members find jobs and consider buying a house.
Chapter 5: The family buys a new house and furniture as Jurgis works long,
hard hours.
Chapter 6: Jurgis and Ona make plans to get married in the fall. Ona takes a
job to make extra money for the wedding.
Chapter 7: Jurgis and Ona marry in November. Ona and many of the children
are sick from the cold, damp working and living conditions.
Chapter 8: A representative of the butcher's union talks to Jurgis about
joining the union. All the members of the family soon join.
Chapter 9: Jurgis learns about the inner workings of Packingtown from union
members. He discovers the plants process diseased animals and use chemicals
in the meat.
Chapter 10: Ona's problems at work continue to worsen. She has a baby,
Antanas, named after Jurgis' deceased father.
Chapter 11: The living conditions of the family improve and more money is
put into a savings account at the bank. Jurgis injures himself on the job and is
unable to return to work.
Chapter 12: The winter is bitterly cold and the family plunges into yet another
crisis as Jonas disappears one day and never returns to the family.
Chapter 13: Jurgis takes a job at the fertilizer plant, and the children sell
newspapers on the street.
Chapter 14: Ona continues to struggle at her job. She is expecting another
child, but her and Jurgis's relationship is dissolving.
Chapter 15: Jurgis learns that a factory boss named Connor has sexually
assaulted Ona. Jurgis attacks Connor and is arrested.
120
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Descriptive
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Compare and Contrast
English Literature X
Grade Level 10
Lesson Title
7
Chapters 16-17
8
Chapters 18-19
9
Chapters 20-21
10
Chapters 22-23
11
Chapters 24-25
12
Chapters 26-27
13
Chapters 28-29
14
Chapters 30-31
Lesson Content
Chapter 16: Jurgis is charged with assault and battery and begins to resent
Packingtown for destroying his family.
Chapter 17: Stanislovas, Elzbieta's son, visits Jurgis in jail and tells Jurgis of
the bitter financial struggles the family faces.
Chapter 18: Jurgis is released from prison and finds Ona in premature labor
with their second child. He has no money for a doctor.
Chapter 19: Jurgis finds a midwife and goes to a saloon where he receives
some free food and drink. He returns home to bad news about Ona and the
baby.
Chapter 20: Jurgis stays continually drunk and finds a job at a harvester
works plant that lasts only nine days.
Chapter 21: A social worker offers to help with food for the family and helps
Jurgis get a job at a steel mill plant.
Chapter 22: Jurgis' young son, Antanas, dies. Jurgis walks out of the house
and gets on a passing freight train which carries him into the country, far from
the horrors and problems of Packingtown.
Chapter 23: Jurgis returns to Chicago and is seriously injured in an accident.
The injuries force him to beg for food on the streets.
Chapter 24: Jurgis meets a wealthy young man collecting illegal wages from
companies to give to an Irish politician named Halloran.
Chapter 26: Jurgis becomes the boss in the killing rooms at the Durham Plant
during a strike.
Chapter 27: The police raid the house where Marija works as a prostitute, and
Jurgis is taken to the police station.
Chapter 28: Jurgis is released and stops at a hall where a meeting is being
held. He is fascinated by what the speaker is saying.
Chapter 29: Jurgis learns that the Socialists want to fight the power of the
Beef Trust.
Chapter 30: Jurgis becomes enthusiastic about the concepts and prospects of
Socialism helping workers in the packing plants.
Chapter 31: Jurgis is asked to attend a meeting at the home of a Socialist
millionaire named Fisher. The Socialists make huge gains in the election.
121
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Descriptive
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Compare and Contrast
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Persuasive
English Literature X
Grade Level 10
Lesson Title
Introduction
1
Act I, Scenes 1-3
2
Act II, Scenes 1-4
3
Act III, Scenes 1-3
4
Act IV, Scenes 1-3
5
Act V, Scenes 1-5
Introduction
1
Chapters 1-4
Lesson Content
Julius Caesar
Julius Caesar is in a powerful position to seize control of the country, yet he
must deal with the suspicions of the Senate and the constant fighting between
other military leaders before he achieves his ambitious goals.
Caesar celebrates his military defeat of Pompey but receives a warning from a
soothsayer about future events.
Men plot Caesar's assassination and meet with Brutus. Caesar's wife persuades
him not to go to the Senate, but one of the conspirators convinces him to
change his mind.
Although both Artemidorus and the soothsayer try to warn Caesar, their
warnings are of no use and Caesar goes to the senate. He is murdered by a
conspirator.
The Roman Empire is in a state of confusion as the supporters and enemies of
Caesar prepare to fight each other.
The leaders of both sides meet to discuss a peaceful settlement, but the
fighting begins and some of the leaders commit suicide.
Great Expectations
In Great Expectations, the main character of the story, Pip, learns to value
friendship over wealth and power.
Chapter 1: Pip lives with his older sister and her husband. He is visiting the
graves of his parents and is threatened by an escaped convict.
Chapter 2: When Pip gets home, his sister is angry because he has worried
her. The next morning Pip gathers supplies for the convict.
Chapter 3: Pip finds the convict and gives him the supplies.
Chapter 4: Pip lies to his sister about where he has been, and no one has
discovered that he has stolen anything.
122
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Expository
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Descriptive
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Persuasive
English Literature X
Grade Level 10
Lesson Title
2
Chapters 5-9
3
Chapters 10-11
4
Chapters 12-15
5
Chapters 16-18
6
Chapters 19-20
Lesson Content
Chapter 5: Pip's sister discovers the missing food. Pip is afraid the convict will
reveal his secret.
Chapter 6: When Pip and his brother-in-law return home, they tell the family
about their adventure.
Chapter 7: Pip goes to school where he meets a girl named Biddy. Pip's sister
returns from the market with news that a wealthy woman named Miss
Havisham needs a playmate for her ward.
Chapter 8: Pip goes to Miss Havisham's home and meets her beautiful ward,
Estella, who is about Pip's age.
Chapter 9: Pip's sister is curious about his visit to Miss Havisham's home, but
he is reluctant to tell her the story.
Chapter 10: Pip wants Estella to like him, and he wants to become educated.
Chapter 11: Pip visits Miss Havisham's house again where Estella introduces
him to some of her other relatives. Pip goes into the garden where he gets into
a fight with another boy.
Chapter 12: Pip goes to Miss Havisham's house every other day and tells her
that he wants to be better educated. Miss Havisham eventually decides Pip
needs to become Joe's apprentice.
Chapter 13: Joe and Pip go to see Miss Havisham and she gives Joe money
for Pip's services.
Chapter 14: Pip begins to work as an apprentice and realizes he is ashamed
of his home.
Chapter 15: Pip stops going to school, but he continues to find ways to learn.
He discovers his sister has been badly injured in an accident.
Chapter 16: Pip's sister must stay in bed because of her injuries. Biddy comes
to live with the family and help with chores and care for Mrs. Joe.
Chapter 17: Pip becomes friends with Biddy, who tells Pip she thinks Orlick
likes her, which disturbs Pip.
Chapter 18: After Pip has been an apprentice for four years, a lawyer, Mr.
Jaggers, tells him that someone has offered to support him financially.
Chapter 19: Pip goes to the tailor, Mr. Trabb, to get some new clothes and
then goes to visit Miss Havisham to say goodbye.
Chapter 20: When Pip arrives in London, he goes directly to Mr. Jaggers' busy
office.
123
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Descriptive
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Expository
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Compare and Contrast
English Literature X
Grade Level 10
Lesson Title
7
Chapters 21-23
8
Chapters 24-26
9
Chapters 27-29
10
Chapters 30-32
11
Chapters 33-35
Lesson Content
Chapter 21: Pip finds a place to live and meets Herbert Pocket, whom he
thinks he has met somewhere before.
Chapter 22: Herbert and Pip become friends, and Herbert tells Pip about Miss
Havisham's background.
Chapter 23: Pip meets the Pocket family and two students, Drummle and
Startop.
Chapter 24: Pip goes back to London and meets with Mr. Jaggers about his
living arrangements. He is invited to visit Wemmick's home.
Chapter 25: Pip tells Herbert how he feels about the two students he met at
the family dinner.
Chapter 26: Pip and Herbert are invited to dinner at Mr. Jaggers' house,
where Drummle and Startop are also guests.
Chapter 27: Joe sends a letter to Pip telling him he and Mr. Wopsle are
coming to London, and he wants to visit. Joe tells Pip that Miss Havisham
wants to see him and that Estella is back in town.
Chapter 28: Pip goes by coach to see Miss Havisham and recognizes two of
the other passengers as convicts. He avoids talking to them.
Chapter 29: Pip finds Miss Havisham visiting with a woman he later
recognizes as Estella.
Chapter 30: Pip tells Herbert about his visit with Miss Havisham and Estella
and confesses he has always loved Estella.
Chapter 31: Pip and Herbert watch Mr. Wopsle's play, which turns out to be
quite bad, and they have dinner together.
Chapter 32: Pip receives word that Estella will be arriving the next day on a
coach. He plans to meet her at the station.
Chapter 33: Estella tells Pip she will be staying with a family in Richmond and
asks him to visit her as much as possible. Pip is sad when he has to leave.
Chapter 34: Pip and Herbert are deeply in debt. Pip gets a letter telling him
that his sister has passed away, and he leaves for her funeral.
Chapter 35: After the funeral, Pip takes a walk with Biddy. She tells him of
her plans to become the mistress of the new school.
124
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Descriptive
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Expository
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Expository
English Literature X
Grade Level 10
Lesson Title
12
Chapters 36-38
13
Chapters 39-40
14
Chapters 41-43
15
Chapters 44-46
16
Chapters 47-49
Lesson Content
Chapter 36: On his twenty-first birthday, Pip visits Mr. Jaggers and asks the
identity of his benefactor. Jaggers refuses to tell him.
Chapter 37: Pip goes to Mr. Wemmick's house for dinner, where he meets a
woman named Miss Skiffins.
Chapter 38: Pip visits Estella in Richmond and escorts her and the women she
lives with to parties and other social gatherings.
Chapter 39: Several years later, while Pip is at home, an old man comes to
his door asking for Pip. Pip soon recognizes him as the convict and realizes this
man is his benefactor.
Chapter 40: The next morning, Pip stumbles over someone lying at the
bottom of the stairs, but the man runs away before Pip can talk to him.
Chapter 41: Herbert helps Pip find a place for the convict to live, and the two
discuss what to do next.
Chapter 42: The convict, Magwitch, talks about his childhood and the events
that caused his prison term.
Chapter 43: Pip decides to leave the country with Magwitch but first goes to
visit Estella. He finds she has gone back to Miss Havisham's.
Chapter 44: Pip arrives at Miss Havisham's home and confronts her with the
information he learned from Magwitch. He professes his love to Estella.
Chapter 45: Pip goes to visit Wemmick the next morning, and Wemmick
warns Pip about Magwitch's safety.
Chapter 46: Pip and Herbert go to the apartments where Magwitch stays,
telling the others he is Mr. Campbell.
Chapter 47: Pip decides to go to a play that Mr. Wopsle is in. After the show,
Wopsle tells Pip some disturbing news.
Chapter 48: Pip goes to dinner at Mr. Jaggers' house, who tells Pip that Miss
Havisham wants to see him about a business matter.
Chapter 49: Pip goes to Miss Havisham's house, and she tells him she is sorry
for the way she treated him. Later, Pip finds Miss Havisham's life is in danger.
125
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Expository
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Persuasive
English Literature X
Grade Level 10
Lesson Title
17
Chapters 50-53
18
Chapters 54-56
19
Chapters 57-59
Introduction
1
Chapters 1-3
Lesson Content
Chapter 50: Pip is injured trying to help Miss Havisham. Herbert tells him
Magwitch revealed the story of the woman he would not talk about earlier.
Chapter 51: Pip goes to see Mr. Jaggers and tells him of his business with
Miss Havisham and the revelation of Estella's parentage.
Chapter 52: Pip plans to see Wemmick, but a note arrives saying he must go
alone to the marshes back in his own village.
Chapter 53: Pip obeys the instructions and goes to the marshes, where he is
attacked and tied up.
Chapter 54: Pip and Magwitch plan to leave the country by boat and spend
the night at a public house. Some men come who are looking for Magwitch.
Chapter 55: Herbert tells Pip he is now a partner in the business and will
move to Cairo, Egypt, and offers Pip a job in the company.
Chapter 56: Pip visits Magwitch often in prison. Magwitch tells Pip something
very important and dies.
Chapter 57: Pip is very ill for several days and Joe comes to care for him. He
realizes what a good friend Joe has been to him.
Chapter 58: Pip returns to his village to help Joe at the forge and finds that
things have changed. Pip joins Herbert at the firm in Egypt.
Chapter 59: Years later, Pip comes back to see Joe and Biddy and their
growing family. Pip tells Biddy that he is over Estella, although it is untrue.
The Adventures of Huckleberry Finn
Huck Finn is a young man accustomed to having the freedom to set his own
schedule and do what he wants to do. Huck's life changes dramatically when
the Widow Douglas adopts him with the intention to make him a proper
gentleman.
Chapter 1: Huck sneaks out at night with Tom Sawyer at the first opportunity.
Chapter 2: Miss Watson's slave, Jim, hears Huck and Tom Sawyer leave the
house. They plan to start a robber band with some of their friends.
Chapter 3: Huck hears that a drowned man was found floating in the river.
Some people believe the dead man is Huck's father.
126
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Narrative
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Descriptive
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Compare and Contrast
English Literature X
Grade Level 10
Lesson Title
2
Chapters 4-7
3
Chapters 8-10
4
Chapters 11-13
5
Chapters 14-16
6
Chapters 17-18
7
Chapters 19-20
Lesson Content
Chapter 4: Huck lives with the Widow Douglas for four months and attends
school on a regular basis before he realizes his father (Pap) has returned.
Chapter 5: Huck is surprised to see Pap when he returns to his room. Pap is
upset because Huck is going to school and wearing good clothes.
Chapter 6: The Widow Douglas tells Pap to leave her property. Pap kidnaps
Huck and takes him to a log cabin on the river.
Chapter 7: Pap locks Huck in the cabin and leaves for town. Huck manages to
escape and floats down the river in a canoe to Jackson Island.
Chapter 8: People from town believe Huck has drowned. Huck finds Miss
Watson's runaway slave Jim is living on the island.
Chapter 9: Jim and Huck explore the house they found floating down the river
during a flood and find many items they can use on their trip.
Chapter 10: Huck decides to go to town to find out some news and stops at a
house. He disguises himself as a girl so no one will recognize him.
Chapter 11: A lady in town says people believe Jim killed Huck and are going
to search Jackson Island.
Chapter 12: During a terrible storm, Huck and Jim spot a wrecked steamboat.
They sneak on board and hear the voices of robbers.
Chapter 13: Jim and Huck lose their raft in a storm but manage to steal a
small boat.
Chapter 14: Huck and Jim find time to relax for a few days. Huck tells Jim
stories about King Solomon and his great wisdom.
Chapter 15: Jim wants to reach Cairo, Illinois, where the Ohio River empties
into the Mississippi River and seek refuge in the free states.
Chapter 16: A steamboat strikes Huck and Jim's raft and tosses them
overboard. Huck swims to shore and is unable find Jim.
Chapter 17: Huck finds a family who befriends him when they determine Huck
is not from the Shepherdson family.
Chapter 18: Huck discovers Jim asleep in the swamp. They take a raft and
head downriver.
Chapter 19: Huck and Jim float downriver and encounter two men claiming to
be the Duke of Bridgewater and the son of the King of France.
Chapter 20: Huck tells the king and duke he is the son of a farmer and Jim is
his family's slave. The group attend a revival.
127
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Compare and Contrast
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Descriptive
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Expository
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Persuasive
English Literature X
Grade Level 10
Lesson Title
8
Chapters 21-23
9
Chapters 24-26
10
Chapters 27-29
11
Chapters 30-32
12
Chapters 33-35
Lesson Content
Chapter 21: The king and duke practice their parts in the Shakespeare play
they will present, and they rent the courthouse.
Chapter 22: Only twelve people attend the Shakespeare play performed by
the duke and the king.
Chapter 23: During the performance, the king appears on stage completely
naked. They hastily leave the upset townspeople.
Chapter 24: The king and duke learn of a recently deceased man named Peter
Wilks. The men plan to defraud the estate of the money.
Chapter 25: The king and duke meet the three Wilks sisters. They study the
six thousand dollars and house the girls inherit from the estate.
Chapter 26: Huck decides to stop the king and duke from stealing the girls'
money. He takes the money from the mattress.
Chapter 27: Huck hides the money in Peter Wilks' coffin. The king and duke
decide to sell everything including the Wilks family's slaves.
Chapter 28: Huck makes plans to save the girls' money as two men from
England arrived in town who claimed to be the real brothers of Peter Wilks.
Chapter 29: The two men from England have lost their luggage and cannot
prove their identity. One of the brothers from England claims he can identify
the tattoo on the chest of his deceased brother. They proceed to the cemetery
and dig up the coffin. They find the money put there by Huck. The king, duke,
and Huck manage to escape during the confusion that follows.
Chapter 30: The king is angry at Huck for trying to get away from him, and
the king and duke have an argument about losing the money.
Chapter 31: The group arrives at Pikesville, a village along the Mississippi
River. Huck learns Jim was sold to a farmer named Phelps.
Chapter 32: Huck arrives at the Phelps farm to find Jim and learns that Tom
Sawyer is on his way. Huck tells the family he will get his luggage and heads
back to the village to meet up with Tom.
Chapter 33: Huck meets Tom on the way back to Pikesville. Tom thought
Huck had been murdered and is glad to see him. The duke and king end up
being punished by people in the village.
Chapter 34: Huck and Tom work on a plan to help Jim escape.
Chapter 35: Tom plans to use case knives instead of a shovel and pick to dig
a hole.
128
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Expository
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Expository
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Persuasive
English Literature X
Grade Level 10
Lesson Title
13
Chapters 36-39
14
Chapters 40-43
Lesson Content
Chapter 36: Huck and Tom begin to dig the hole and steal items from the
house including tin plates and a brass candlestick.
Chapter 37: Aunt Sally notices several items missing from the house, and
Tom develops a plan to confuse her.
Chapter 38: Tom's strange plan continues as he decides Jim should have a
coat-of-arms. Jim helps them get an old grindstone.
Chapter 39: Huck and Tom catch several rats to put in Jim's cell. Aunt Sally's
son frees the rats. Aunt Sally beats Tom and Huck for bringing rats into the
house.
Chapter 40: Fifteen armed men arrive at the Phelps farm on the night of Jim's
escape. Tom is wounded in the escape. Huck gets help while Jim stays with
Tom.
Chapter 41: Huck finds a doctor to help Tom. The doctor goes to the raft
alone while Huck meets Uncle Silas. Huck tells him that Sid (Tom) has gone
out to find news about what happened.
Chapter 42: The doctor returns the next day with Jim and Tom. Aunt Polly
arrives and tells everyone the true identity of Huck and Tom.
Chapter 43: Tom reveals Jim is a free man because Miss Watson died and set
him free in her will.
129
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Compare and Contrast
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Descriptive
English Literature XI
Grade Level 11
Lesson Title
Introduction
1
Chapters 1-4
2
Chapters 5-13
Lesson Content
Moby Dick
Herman Melville, the author of Moby Dick, presents a characterization of Ahab,
the captain of the whaling ship Pequod, as a man who truly has an obsession
with a great white whale known as Moby Dick.
Chapter 1 - Loomings: The narrator, Ishmael, introduces himself at the
beginning of the novel as a simple sailor who goes to sea from time to time.
Chapter 2 - The Carpet-Bag: Ishmael is headed for Nantucket and plans to
join a whaling voyage.
Chapter 3 - The Spouter-Inn: The Spouter-Inn, operated by Peter Coffin, is
dirty, run down, and crowded. Ishmael is informed that he will have to share a
bed with a harpooner from New Zealand.
Chapter 4 - The Counterpane: Ishmael wakes up and meets Queequeg, his
roommate, the harpooner from New Zealand.
Chapter 5 – Breakfast: Ishmael goes downstairs to eat breakfast and notices
the sailors look out of place on land.
Chapter 6 - The Street: After breakfast, Ishmael takes a walk around New
Bedford. He sees people in the streets from many foreign countries on their
way to Nantucket because of the whaling industry.
Chapter 7 - The Chapel: Ishmael enters a chapel in New Bedford dedicated to
whalemen with memorials honoring sailors who lost their lives at sea.
Chapter 8 - The Pulpit: Father Mapple, a former harpooner turned preacher,
enters the chapel and climbs into the pulpit.
Chapter 9 - The Sermon: After calling the congregation to order, Father
Mapple begins the sermon, which focuses on the story of Jonah and the whale.
Chapter 10 - A Bosom Friend: Ishmael returns to the Spouter-Inn and
becomes friends with Queequeg. He joins Queequeg in his idol worship in
hopes that Queequeg will join him in Christian worship.
Chapter 11 – Nightgown: The two new friends share a smoke from
Queequeg's tomahawk pipe as Queequeg tells Ishmael the story of his life.
Chapter 12 – Biographical: Queequeg relates to Ishmael that he is the son of
a king and the nephew of a High Priest from the island of Kokovoko. He left his
island to see the world and learn about Christianity.
Chapter 13 – Wheelbarrow: The next morning Ishmael and Queequeg put
their belongings in a wheelbarrow and board a ship that will take them to
Nantucket.
130
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Expository
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Descriptive
English Literature XI
Grade Level 11
Lesson Title
3
Chapters 14-19
Lesson Content
Chapter 14 - Nantucket: Ishmael and Queequeg stop at an inn recommended
by Peter Coffin.
Chapter 15 - Chowder: Ishmael and Queequeg stop at the Try Pots Inn and
meet Hosea Hussey and Mrs. Hussey. Hosea is the owner of the inn and the
cousin of Peter Coffin.
Chapter 16 - The Ship: Ishmael and Queequeg arrive at the Nantucket docks
and talk to the owner of the whaling ship Pequod and join the crew.
Chapter 17 - The Ramadan: Queequeg stays in his room all day at the Try
Pots Inn observing the feast of Ramadan. Ishmael becomes worried when
Queequeg does not answer the door, so he asks Mrs. Hussey to unlock it.
Chapter 18 - His Mark: The owners of the Pequod are hesitant to sign
Queequeg on to the crew because he is a cannibal, but allow him to join after
he demonstrates his skill of throwing a harpoon.
Chapter 19 - The Prophet: A man named Elijah warns Ishmael and Queequeg
about sailing on the Pequod and tells them about Ahab, the captain.
131
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Descriptive
English Literature XI
Grade Level 11
Lesson Title
4
Chapters 20-29
Lesson Content
Chapter 20 - All Astir: The Pequod is prepared for the voyage, and Ishmael is
concerned about sailing with a captain he does not know.
Chapter 21 - Going Aboard: Elijah again stops Ishmael and attempts to talk
him out of sailing with Captain Ahab, but Ishmael and Queequeg finally board
the Pequod. Ishmael believes he has seen shadowy figures on the Pequod.
Chapter 22 - Merry Christmas: The Pequod leaves Nantucket early Christmas
morning, and the Pequod's owners guide the ship out of the harbor.
Chapter 23 - The Lee Shore: Ishmael sees a man named Bulkington, whom
he had met at the Spouter-Inn, at the helm of the ship guiding it out of port.
Chapter 24 - The Advocate: Ishmael relates the importance of the whaling
industry and how the whale represents the unknown mysteries of the sea.
Chapter 25 - Postscript: Ishmael continues his description of the importance
of whaling and explains the value of whale oil.
Chapter 26 - Knights and Squires: Starbuck, a Quaker and a native of
Nantucket, is the chief mate of the Pequod. The other officers of the ship are
also identified in this chapter.
Chapter 27 - Knights and Squires: Stubb is the second mate of the Pequod, a
man named Flask is third mate, and Queequeg is selected as Starbuck's
harpooner.
Chapter 28 - Ahab: The mysterious Captain Ahab finally makes an appearance
on deck. He has one artificial leg fashioned from the bone of a whale.
Chapter 29 - Enter Ahab; to Him, Stubb: The Pequod reaches the water of the
tropics, and Ahab has an argument with Stubb, the second mate.
132
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Persuasive
English Literature XI
Grade Level 11
Lesson Title
5
Chapters 30-35
6
Chapters 36-42
Lesson Content
Chapter 30 - The Pipe: Captain Ahab gets his pipe after the confrontation with
Stubb, but smoking the pipe doesn't soothe him, and he throws it in the sea.
Chapter 31 - Queen Mab: Stubb tells Flask of his dream about Ahab. Captain
Ahab shouts to the crew to be on the lookout for whales.
Chapter 32 - Cetology: The narrator discusses the subject of cetology, the
study of whales. Ishmael classifies whales into three books: the Folio, Octavo,
and Duodecimo.
Chapter 33 - The Specksynder: Ishmael describes the daily operations of the
Pequod and how the harpooners are very important members of the crew of a
whaling ship.
Chapter 34 - The Cabin-Table: The eating arrangements of the crew are a
reminder of the levels of authority on the Pequod, as the harpooners eat in the
cabin of the captain.
Chapter 35 - The Mast-Head: Ishmael makes his first visit to the mast-head,
an area located at the top of one of the ship's masts where men are stationed
to constantly look for whales.
Chapter 36 - The Quarter-Deck: Captain Ahab calls his crew together on the
quarter deck and offers an ounce of gold to anyone who spots Moby Dick, the
white whale that took off his leg.
Chapter 37 - Sunset: Captain Ahab sits alone in his cabin and explains the
struggle to find and kill the whale.
Chapter 38 - Dusk: Starbuck is worried about his relationship with Ahab, but
feels pity for him. He also fears what Ahab might do to get the white whale.
Chapter 39 - First Night-Watch: This chapter is written from the viewpoint of
Stubb, an easy-going, light-hearted person who thinks that events are
predestined to happen in a certain manner.
Chapter 40 - Midnight, Forecastle: The crew is cheerful and looks forward to
the hunt of the white whale, but there is still a mood of tension on the ship.
Chapter 41 - Moby Dick: The author foreshadows the grave danger the crew
will face in the hunt for Moby Dick. Captain Ahab believes that Moby Dick
represents the evil in the world.
Chapter 42 - The Whiteness of the Whale: The author and the narrator
describe the significance of Moby Dick's whiteness, which can be a symbol of
purity or innocence, but Ishmael also sees white as terrifying because it is not
really a color, but rather the absence of color.
133
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Descriptive
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Short Answer
English Literature XI
Grade Level 11
Lesson Title
7
Chapters 43-48
8
Chapters 49-54
Lesson Content
Chapter 43 - Hark!: Men on night watch are standing in a line passing water
buckets to each other. One of the crew hears a noise below the deck that
sounds like a cough and believes there are people sleeping below deck.
Chapter 44 - The Chart: Captain Ahab sits in his cabin studying a variety of
sea charts and plans the hunt for Moby Dick.
Chapter 45 - The Affidavit: Ishmael describes how whales can be harpooned
and still escape. Some attack and destroy whaling ships, killing the crew.
Chapter 46 - Surmises: Captain Ahab has to balance his focus on Moby Dick
and the hunt for other whales as he has an obligation to the Pequod's owners
and crew to make money.
Chapter 47 - The Mat-Maker: Queequeg and Ishmael construct a sword mat
that attaches to the side of the whaleboats for additional protection. The
lookout calls out that a sperm whale is sighted.
Chapter 48 - The First Lowering: Each of the three mates command a
whaleboat, but the hunt is unsuccessful.
Chapter 49 - The Hyena: Ishmael is thrown into the sea during the first hunt
and laughs at the irony of the situation because he is an experienced sailor. He
is frightened enough to write up a will naming Queequeg as the beneficiary.
Chapter 50 - Ahab's Boat and Crew. Fedallah: Stubb is impressed that Ahab
will go on a whale hunt with only one leg, and there is some question about
whether or not a captain should risk his life hunting whales in a small boat.
Chapter 51 - The Spirit-Spout: The Pequod crew is excited about the
possibility of a hunt when a spout is sighted.
Chapter 52 - The Albatross: The Pequod meets another whaling ship called
the Goney (Albatross). A storm approaches and the two ships' captains are
unable to communicate with each other.
Chapter 53 - The Gam: A meeting (gam) of two whaling ships is a common
event. The captains of the ships often exchange information about the
locations of whales, but Ahab's only interest in contact with other ships is to
get information about the white whale.
Chapter 54 - The Town-Ho's Story: The Pequod meets the Town-Ho, a
Polynesian whaling ship, and the captain has information about Moby Dick.
134
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Persuasive
English Literature XI
Grade Level 11
Lesson Title
9
Chapters 55-63
Lesson Content
Chapter 55 - Of the Monstrous Pictures of Whales: Ishmael relates
information about whale art and the lack of accurate pictures of whales.
Chapter 56 - Of the Less Erroneous Pictures of Whales, and the True Pictures
of Whaling Scenes: The discussion of whale art continues.
Chapter 57 - Of Whales in Paint; in Teeth; in Wood; in Sheet-iron; in Stone;
in Mountains; in Stars: The author describes how whale art is present in all
cultures and societies so all people can relate to the search for Moby Dick.
Chapter 58 - Brit: The Pequod sails through a yellow substance called brit, a
primary food of the Right Whale.
Chapter 59 - Squid: The Pequod goes to the island of Java, and Daggoo
shouts that he has spotted the white whale. It turns out to be a giant squid.
Chapter 60 - The Line: The importance of the whale line which is attached to
a harpoon and connects the whale to the boat is described.
Chapter 61 - Stubb Kills a Whale: Ishmael spots a sperm whale, and Ahab
orders the boats into the water. Stubb's crew makes the first kill.
Chapter 62 - The Dart: The author describes the whale hunt and the grave
danger in the final stages of killing a whale.
Chapter 63 - The Crotch: The crotch of a boat is a notched stick that attaches
to one end of the boat where the harpooner rests the harpoons.
135
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Persuasive
English Literature XI
Grade Level 11
Lesson Title
10
Chapters 64-72
Lesson Content
Chapter 64 - Stubb's Supper: The dead whale is tied to the side of the
Pequod, and Stubb orders Daggoo to cut some whale meat for supper.
Chapter 65 - The Whale as a Dish: Ishmael describes how whale meat is
eaten by many different cultures, but most people don't eat it because it is
fatty.
Chapter 66 - The Shark Massacre: A number of sharks attack the whale tied
to the ship. Queequeg escapes serious injury trying to fight off the sharks.
Chapter 67 - Cutting In: The author provides an account of how a whale is
butchered. The Pequod nearly capsizes while the whale is being butchered.
Chapter 68 - The Blanket: The description of the butchering process
continues.
Chapter 69 - The Funeral: The whale is beheaded after the skin is removed,
and the head is tied to the side of the ship.
Chapter 70 - The Sphynx: Ahab goes out on deck to look at the head of the
whale tied to the ship and attempts to communicate with the whale.
Chapter 71 - The Jeroboam's Story: The Pequod comes upon the Jeroboam, a
whaling ship from Nantucket with an epidemic on board.
Chapter 72 - The Monkey-Rope: Ishmael again describes the process of
butchering a whale. Queequeg and Ishmael work to skin the whale.
136
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Persuasive
English Literature XI
Grade Level 11
Lesson Title
11
Chapters 73-81
12
Chapters 82-87
Lesson Content
Chapter 73 - Stubb and Flask Kill a Right Whale; and Have a Talk over Him:
Flask tells Stubb a ship with the head of a sperm whale on the starboard side
and the head of a right whale on her other side will not capsize.
Chapter 74 - The Sperm Whale's Head - Contrasted View: The right whale is
killed and towed to the ship. The whale's head is tied to the side of the Pequod.
Chapter 75 - The Right Whale's Head - Contrasted View: The differences in
the right whale and the sperm whale are described.
Chapter 76 - The Battering Ram: The head of the sperm whale is compared to
a battering ram, the skull being very thick and hard to penetrate.
Chapter 77 - The Great Heidelburgh Tun: Ishmael notes the case and the
junk, upper parts of a whale's head.
Chapter 78 - Cistern and Buckets: Tashtego falls into the hole at the top of
the whale's skull and disappears. Queequeg saves Tashtego.
Chapter 79 - The Prairie: Once again, Melville and Ishmael discuss the
appearance of the sperm whale.
Chapter 80 - The Nut: The skull of an adult sperm whale is at least twenty
feet long, its brain is small compared to the size of the skull, and its spine is
large.
Chapter 81 - The Pequod meets the Virgin: The Pequod meets the Jungfrau
(Virgin in German), a German ship, and both ships hunt whales.
Chapter 82 - The Honor and Glory of Whaling: Ishmael relates the history of
whaling and states that Perseus was the first whaler.
Chapter 83 - Jonah Historically Regarded: Some people from Nantucket do
not believe the story of Jonah and the whale.
Chapter 84 - Pitchpoling: A pitchpole is a long lance attached to a rope. It is
lighter than a harpoon and is used to secure a whale after it is harpooned.
Chapter 85 - The Fountain: A whale can remain underwater for extended
times, and when it surfaces, it sends a fountain of water from its spout.
Chapter 86 - The Tail: The tail of the sperm whale can be as large as fifty
square feet.
Chapter 87 - The Grand Armada: The Pequod sails into the Indian Ocean and
the Java Sea. A whale is sighted, and the hunt begins again. A pirate ship is
sighted following the Pequod during the hunt.
137
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Compare and Contrast
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Persuasive
English Literature XI
Grade Level 11
Lesson Title
13
Chapters 88-96
Lesson Content
Chapter 88 - Schools and Schoolmasters: Large herds of whales are not
common. They are usually found in groups of twenty to fifty, called schools.
Chapter 89 - Fast-Fish and Loose Fish: Sometimes a whale is harpooned but
the wounded animal will somehow escape.
Chapter 90 - Heads or Tails: There is a law with regard to killing a whale off
the coast of England; the head must go to the king and the tail to the queen.
Chapter 91 - The Pequod Meets the Rose-Bud: The Pequod meets the RoseBud, a French whaling ship with two dead whales tied to the sides of the ship.
Chapter 92 - Ambergris: Ishmael describes ambergris and explains how it is
used. He denies that all whales smell bad.
Chapter 93 - The Castaway: Not all of the crew members go on the whale
hunts, as some of the men stay behind to man the main ship.
Chapter 94 - A Squeeze of the Hand: Stubb's crew kills a sperm whale, and
the Pequod's crew removes the sperm from the whale.
Chapter 95 - The Cassock: The anatomy of the sperm whale and other
aspects of the butchering process is described.
Chapter 96 - The Try-Works: The try-works of the whaling ship, a large
furnace used to melt whale blubber, is described.
138
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Persuasive
English Literature XI
Grade Level 11
Lesson Title
14
Chapters 97-104
Lesson Content
Chapter 97 - The Lamp: Ishmael describes the crew's living conditions on the
Pequod and states the men can use all the whale oil they need to light this
area.
Chapter 98 - Stowing Down and Clearing Up: The oil from the whale is stored
in barrels and placed into the hold of the ship.
Chapter 99 - The Doubloon: Any sailor who spots Moby Dick will get a
doubloon, a gold coin from Ecuador.
Chapter 100 - Leg and Arm. The Pequod, of Nantucket, Meets the Samuel
Enderby, of London: The Pequod meets the British whaling ship Samuel
Enderby. The captain of the Samuel Enderby, Boomer, says he has lost an arm
to Moby Dick.
Chapter 101 - The Decanter: Samuel Enderby is the founder of a famous
whaling company in England. The crews of the two ships share a meal.
Chapter 102 - A Bower in the Arsacides: Ishmael discusses the details of the
of the whale's skeleton.
Chapter 103 - Measurement of the Whale's Skeleton: The size of the sperm
whale is described and compared to the size of a whaling ship.
Chapter 104 - The Fossil Whale: Ishmael states that fossil remains of whales
are found all over the world.
139
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Compare and Contrast
English Literature XI
Grade Level 11
Lesson Title
15
Chapters 105-113
Lesson Content
Chapter 105 - Does the Whale's Magnitude Diminish? - Will He Perish?:
Ishmael discusses how the size of the whale has increased over time.
Chapter 106 - Ahab's Leg: Captain Ahab cracks his ivory leg as he leaves the
Samuel Enderby and calls on the carpenter to make him a new leg.
Chapter 107 - The Carpenter: Ishmael introduces the carpenter of the
Pequod, a very skilled man who performs many duties.
Chapter 108 - Ahab and the Carpenter: The carpenter measures Ahab for his
new leg, but Captain Ahab has a low opinion of the carpenter.
Chapter 109 - Ahab and Starbuck in the Cabin: The Pequod is sailing for
Japan, but some of the barrels holding the whale oil are leaking.
Chapter 110 - Queequeg in his Coffin: Queequeg becomes ill with a high
fever. His condition worsens, and he thinks he is going to die.
Chapter 111 - The Pacific: The Pequod sails into the Pacific Ocean as Ahab
becomes even more obsessed with finding and killing Moby Dick.
Chapter 112 - The Blacksmith: The carpenter finishes working on Ahab's new
leg, and the blacksmith now fashions a buckle for the leg.
Chapter 113 - The Forge: Ahab asks the blacksmith to make a large harpoon
out of the hard steel used in horseshoes.
140
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Compare and Contrast
English Literature XI
Grade Level 11
Lesson Title
16
Chapters 114-128
Lesson Content
Chapter 114 - The Gilder: The Pequod's crew hunts the waters around Japan
but is unable to find any whales.
Chapter 115 - The Pequod Meets the Bachelor: The Pequod meets the
Bachelor, whose crew is very happy after several successful whale kills.
Chapter 116 - The Dying Whale: The crew of the Pequod has a successful
hunt, killing four whales. Captain Ahab kills one of the whales.
Chapter 117 - The Whale Watch: Fedallah and Ahab sit in their whaleboat
waiting for the fourth whale to die.
Chapter 118 - The Quadrant: It is time for the Pequod to head toward the
equator because the migrating whales will be gathering in that area.
Chapter 119 - The Candles: The Pequod is struck by a powerful typhoon. The
sail canvas is torn from the mast, and lightning strikes the ship.
Chapter 120 - The Deck Towards the End of the First Night Watch: Starbuck
tells Ahab the ship is not in safe condition.
Chapter 121 - Midnight - The Forecastle Bulwarks: Stubb and Flask tie down
the anchor and argue about the danger the ship faces from the storm.
Chapter 122 - Midnight Aloft - Thunder and Lightning: Tashtego attempts to
tie down the main sails at the top of the masts.
Chapter 123 - The Musket: The typhoon finally ends, and the crew assesses
the damage to the Pequod and its equipment.
Chapter 124 - The Needle: The Pequod readies to sail the next morning, and
Ahab sets the new course for the steersman.
Chapter 125 - The Log and Line: Ahab must find a new navigation tool for the
Pequod, so the crew uses a log and line to navigate.
Chapter 126 - The Life-Buoy: The Pequod continues toward the equator. One
of the sailors falls overboard and drowns.
Chapter 127 - The Deck: Starbuck asks the carpenter to make a new life buoy
out of Queequeg's coffin. Ahab comes on deck and mocks the carpenter.
Chapter 128 - The Pequod Meets the Rachel: The Pequod meets the whaling
ship Rachel that encountered Moby Dick the previous day.
141
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Persuasive
English Literature XI
Grade Level 11
Lesson Title
17
Chapters 129-135
Introduction
1
Chapters 1-5
2
Chapters 6-9
Lesson Content
Chapter 129 - The Cabin: Ahab leaves his cabin to prepare for the hunt to
find and kill Moby Dick. He tells Pip to stay in the cabin.
Chapter 130 - The Hat: Captain Ahab paces the deck looking for Moby Dick.
Fedallah and Ahab keep watch for the white whale around the clock. A hawk
swoops down and takes Captain Ahab's hat.
Chapter 131 - The Pequod Meets the Delight: The Pequod meets the Delight,
a whaling ship damaged by an encounter with Moby Dick.
Chapter 132 - The Symphony: The Pequod nears the equator. Ahab thinks
about his family and what he gave up for whaling.
Chapter 133 - The Chase - First Day: Ahab sees Moby Dick swimming near
the Pequod. Moby Dick turns around and attacks Ahab's boat.
Chapter 134 - The Chase - Second Day: The crew finds Moby Dick again the
next day, and Moby Dick attacks the whaleboats.
Chapter 135 - The Chase -Third Day: The pursuit of Moby Dick continues on
the third day, and the scene is set for the climax of the novel.
The Last of the Mohicans
The Last of the Mohicans is an adventurous story about a group of individuals
whose paths cross in the depths of the wilderness.
Chapter 1: The French and English are fighting a war in North America, and
there is news that a large French force is approaching Fort William Henry.
Chapter 2: The English army secures the services of Magua to guide the
sisters Cora and Alice, and Heyward to Fort William Henry.
Chapter 3: Hawkeye, Uncas, and Chingachgook discuss life as they travel
through the forest.
Chapter 4: The party heads for Fort William Henry and meets Hawkeye and
the two Mohicans. The honesty of Magua as a guide comes into question.
Chapter 5: Magua disappears into the forest after an altercation with
Hawkeye. Hawkkeye offers to help guide the party to the fort.
Chapter 6: The group decides to stay at a cave for the night.
Chapter 7: Some of the group members leave the cave to determine the
source of a sound they heard. Hurons suddenly attack the men.
Chapter 8: The members of the group retreat to the cave and make plans for
an escape.
Chapter 9: Heyward, David, and the two sisters stay in the cave and are
captured.
142
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Descriptive
Study: EB Learning Material
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Persuasive
English Literature XI
Grade Level 11
Lesson Title
3
Chapters 10-13
4
Chapters 14-17
5
Chapters 18-21
6
Chapters 22-25
Lesson Content
Chapter 10: The Hurons treat the captives well and continue to look for
Hawkeye.
Chapter 11: Magua and Heyward have a meeting regarding Munro's
daughters. Cora becomes angry and announces the captives will die.
Chapter 12: Hawkeye and the Mohicans arrive in time to save the group, and
they resume their trip to Fort William Henry.
Chapter 13: The group makes good time on the journey and stops to rest at a
Mohican burial site. The Hurons come to the site but soon leave.
Chapter 14: The group leaves the Mohican burial site and continues toward
the fort. French forces and a dense fog hinder their arrival.
Chapter 15: Cora and Alice stay at the fort with their father. News arrives that
the French have captured Hawkeye.
Chapter 16: Montcalm meets with Munro and gives him a letter from General
Webb in which a surrender is offered and a treaty is signed.
Chapter 17: The English forces begin their evacuation from the fort when an
incident occurs that initiates a massacre.
Chapter 18: Cora and Alice are kidnapped, and David Gamut follows them.
Hawkeye and his friends search for the two girls the following day.
Chapter 19: Hawkeye and his men stay the night at the fort to discuss their
plans. An Oneida Indian stalks the men but is killed by Uncas.
Chapter 20: The men leave the fort on their search for the two girls and
discover Huron Indians are following them; gunfire is exchanged.
Chapter 21: The trip has been exhausting for Hawkeye and his men so they
divide into two groups and find David Gamut.
Chapter 22: Gamut has news about the status of Cora and Alice, and the men
discuss how they will rescue the girls.
Chapter 23: The disguised Heyward and Gamut enter the Indian village where
Alice is being held, and some children spot the two men.
Chapter 24: The chief wants Heyward to help a sick woman of the tribe.
Magua is at the Indian village but does not recognize Heyward.
Chapter 25: Hawkeye is in disguise at the cavern where Heyward is trying to
help the sick woman, so Heyward does not recognize him.
143
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Persuasive
English Literature XI
Grade Level 11
Lesson Title
7
Chapters 26-29
8
Chapters 30-33
Introduction
1
Chapters 1-2
2
Chapters 3-4
3
Chapters 5-6
Lesson Content
Chapter 26: Hawkeye returns to the village to find Gamut. The two men
devise a plan to rescue Uncas, then Hawkeye and Uncas escape into the forest.
Chapter 27: The villagers find that Gamut has taken the place of Uncas, and
Magua plans to recover Cora from the Delaware village.
Chapter 28: Magua contacts members of the Delaware tribe that are holding
Cora captive and also asks about Hawkeye and his men.
Chapter 29: The prisoners are brought before the entire tribe, and Magua
makes plans to leave the village with Cora.
Chapter 30: Uncas comes before the Delaware tribe and the warriors attack
him. Circumstances change when Tamenund recognizes Uncas.
Chapter 31: Uncas and Hawkeye prepare to rescue Cora, and Gamut reveals
where Cora is being held prisoner.
Chapter 32: A fight between the Huron and the Delaware tribes ensues and
Uncas finally reaches Cora, but a tragic confrontation occurs.
Chapter 33: There is agonizing news about Cora and Uncas. Hawkeye bids
farewell to Gamut, Heyward, Munro, and Alice to be with Chingachgook.
The Red Badge of Courage
Henry Fleming is youthful, energetic, and patriotic; however, he is also
inexperienced. He learns about courage during the Civil War in the heat of
battle.
Chapter 1: A group of Union soldiers is awaiting the start of battle as rumors
are spreading that they will be moving the next day.
Chapter 2: The men are wondering where they will be sent as young Henry
Fleming thinks about what will happen when the battle begins.
Chapter 3: The troops are moved from one position to another which creates
feelings of uneasiness and fright among the men.
Chapter 4: The men see others moving away from the battle and the veteran
soldiers yell at the retreating soldiers.
Chapter 5: The battle finally begins. There is much confusion during the
fighting, but Henry's regiment drives back the enemy.
Chapter 6: The enemy soldiers regroup and again attack Henry and his friends
who eventually retreat.
144
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Expository
Study: EB Learning Material
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Persuasive
English Literature XI
Grade Level 11
Lesson Title
4
Chapters 7-8
5
Chapters 9-10
6
Chapters 11-12
7
Chapters 13-14
8
Chapters 15-16
9
Chapters 17-18
10
Chapters 19-20
11
Chapters 21-22
Lesson Content
Chapter 7: Henry is embarrassed because he left the battle that his comrades
won. He runs into the woods making a horrifying discovery.
Chapter 8: Henry hears sounds of battle and moves toward to the sounds. He
meets many wounded men who were involved in the fight.
Chapter 9: Henry stays with the wounded men and sees his friend Jim
Conklin, who is critically wounded. He tries to help him.
Chapter 10: Henry grieves when his friend Jim dies, and the tattered soldier
now becomes disoriented and confused.
Chapter 11: Henry remains in the area to seek news of the battle. He is
ashamed for abandoning his troop, and wonders if he should rejoin them.
Chapter 12: Retreating soldiers suddenly come running out of the woods.
Henry is injured in the confusion, but a man with a cheery voice helps him.
Chapter 13: Henry's friends welcome him into the camp. He is treated for his
injuries by a soldier named Wilson, who gives his blanket to Henry so he can
rest.
Chapter 14: The next morning, Henry visits with Wilson and notices that
Wilson is no longer loud and arrogant.
Chapter 15: Henry and his friends wait for orders. Wilson asks Henry to return
the packet of papers he had asked him to hold the day before.
Chapter 16: Henry is surprised that his friends do not realize what had
actually happened on the previous day. They are ordered back to the woods.
Chapter 17: As Henry is getting ready for the battle, he becomes angry with
the enemy soldiers. He is praised for his valor when the enemy retreats.
Chapter 18: Henry and Wilson overhear that the enemy might overrun the
Union line, and many casualties are expected.
Chapter 19: Henry is in front leading the troops. He and Wilson grab the flag
from the fallen color sergeant.
Chapter 20: Henry's regiment mounts another charge when they are hit with
tremendous firepower. He is surprised by the actions of the enemy.
Chapter 21: For now, the battle is over, with only a small amount of ground
gained as a result of the fighting.
Chapter 22: The battle begins again. Henry makes a decision about what he
will do during the battle, as his regiment is getting weaker.
145
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Narrative
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Expository
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Expository
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Compare and Contrast
English Literature XI
Grade Level 11
Lesson Title
12
Chapters 23-24
Introduction
1
Chapter 1
2
Chapters 2-3
3
Chapters 4-5
4
Chapters 6-7
5
Chapters 8
Lesson Content
Chapter 23: When Henry's regiment is ordered to charge, the men move
forward to meet the enemy with Henry leading them. The battle ends and
prisoners are taken.
Chapter 24: Henry's regiment moves back from the battlefield. Henry knows
that he has atoned for his actions in the first battle.
The House of the Seven Gables
The House of the Seven Gables was cursed when it was constructed and had
affected generations of the Pyncheon family for 160 years.
Chapter 1 - The Old Pyncheon Family: The House of the Seven Gables was a
deteriorating old house in a New England town built by Colonel Pyncheon. For
generations the Pyncheon family suffered many hardships.
Chapter 2 - The Little Shop-Window: Hepzibah Pyncheon was an old maid who
lived in seclusion in the house for almost thirty years. She had to open a shop
in the house because she needed money.
Chapter 3 - The First Customer: Hepzibah's first customer in the shop was Mr.
Holgrave, a young man in his early twenties, a daguerreotypist who lived in
one of the gables in the house.
Chapter 4 - A Day Behind the Counter: Judge Jaffrey Pyncheon, Hepzibah's
cousin and the owner of the house, was standing outside the house, which
concerned Hepzibah. That night, Phoebe, a distant cousin of the Pyncheon
family, arrived at the House of the Seven Gables.
Chapter 5 - May and November: Phoebe Pyncheon was a girl of seventeen
who had grown up in the country. Hepzibah did not want Phoebe to stay at the
house, so she told Phoebe the legend of Colonel Pyncheon and Matthew Maule.
Chapter 6 - Maule's Well: Phoebe went out to the garden, which had become
overgrown from neglect, and Holgrave came into the garden and talked to her.
Chapter 7 - The Guest: The next morning, Phoebe came into the kitchen
where Hepzibah was making breakfast. She told Phoebe that Clifford, her
brother, was coming to live in the house.
Chapter 8 - The Pyncheon of To-day: A little boy named Ned Higgins came
into the shop and asked Phoebe about Clifford. Judge Jaffrey Pyncheon also
visited the shop and introduced himself to Phoebe. She drew back when the
judge tried to kiss her.
146
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Descriptive
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Compare and Contrast
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Descriptive
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Persuasive
English Literature XI
Grade Level 11
Lesson Title
6
Chapters 9-10
7
Chapters 11-12
8
Chapters 13-14
9
Chapters 15-16
10
Chapters 17-18
Lesson Content
Chapter 9 - Clifford and Phoebe: Hepzibah was very happy that Clifford had
come to the house, and since Clifford enjoyed being around Phoebe, Hepzibah
asked Phoebe to care for Clifford.
Chapter 10 - The Pyncheon Garden: Phoebe read books to Clifford in the
garden. Holgrave loaned Phoebe some poetry and fiction books.
Chapter 11 - The Arched Window: Clifford spent time sitting next to the
arched window in front of the house. He longed for the good old days and was
sad that stagecoaches were no longer used.
Chapter 12 - The Daguerreotypist: Phoebe was able to pursue her own
interests when Clifford was asleep. She talked to Holgrave and learned he had
held many jobs including schoolmaster, salesman, and newspaper editor.
Chapter 13 - Alice Pyncheon: This chapter is a flashback to a time forty years
after the construction of the House of the Seven Gables when Gervayse
Pyncheon was the occupant of the house.
Chapter 14 - Phoebe's Goodbye: Holgrave finished his story about Gervayse
and Alice, then Phoebe and Holgrave talked about Hepzibah and Clifford.
Chapter 15 - The Scowl and Smile: Both Clifford and Hepzibah missed
Phoebe. Hepzibah was losing customers in her shop, so Judge Pyncheon visited
the house and offered financial assistance, which Hepzibah refused.
Chapter 16 - Clifford's Chamber: Hepzibah had a foreboding that something
was going to happen between Clifford and Jaffrey Pyncheon. She went to
Clifford's room, but he was not there. She called out for Jaffrey to help her find
Clifford and was shocked when she discovered Jaffrey dead in the parlor.
Chapter 17 - The Flight of Two Owls: Hepzibah and Clifford made plans to
leave the House of the Seven Gables. They went to the train station and
boarded a train. Clifford became more outgoing and alert on the train.
Chapter 18 - Governor Pyncheon: The body of Judge Pyncheon remained in
the House of the Seven Gables. Jaffrey had a busy day planned, including
seeing a doctor and meeting with his political supporters to announce that he
was going to run for governor.
147
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Narrative
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Compare and Contrast
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Persuasive
English Literature XI
Grade Level 11
Lesson Title
11
Chapters 19-21
Lesson Content
Chapter 19 - Alice's Posies: Uncle Venner came to the House of the Seven
Gables the day after Jaffrey's death. People wondered why the shop wasn't
open and why Judge Pyncheon was not keeping his appointments.
Chapter 20 - The Flower of Eden: Holgrave told Phoebe of Jaffrey's death and
the departure of Hepzibah and Clifford. Holgrave also revealed to Phoebe that
he was in love with her. Clifford and Hepzibah then returned from their trip.
Chapter 21 - The Departure: The author uses the character Holgrave and the
element of flashback to explain the mystery of Clifford's imprisonment. Judge
Jaffrey Pyncheon had destroyed the will which left the estate to Clifford, so
when he died, the estate went to Clifford and Hepzibah and they became rich.
Holgrave reveals his true identity.
148
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Persuasive
English Literature XII
Grade Level 12
Lesson Title
Introduction
1
Chapters 1-6
2
Chapters 7-11
Lesson Content
Jane Eyre
In Jane Eyre, Jane searches for independence and acceptance and learns
important lessons as she develops into a young woman with a strong sense of
compassion and forgiveness.
Chapter 1: Jane Eyre is an orphaned child living at Gateshead, the home of
her aunt, Mrs. Reed, and is not allowed to play with Mrs. Reed's children. After
an argument with her cousin John, Jane is sent to the red-room.
Chapter 2: Being sent to the red-room terrifies Jane. She is so frightened by
some of the objects in the room that she cries out for help and then faints.
Chapter 3: Mr. Lloyd, the apothecary, is called to check on Jane's health. Mr.
Lloyd suggests that Jane be sent to a school.
Chapter 4: Jane recovers from the experience in the red-room. The Reed
family still mistreats Jane, and she learns that she will be attending a school.
Chapter 5: Jane travels to the school, Lowood, alone. She is introduced to a
kind lady, Miss Temple, and also meets another student named Helen Burns.
Helen tells her that Lowood is a charity school.
Chapter 6: Jane begins her term at Lowood School. She and Helen share
many conversations. Jane does not agree with Helen's philosophy of "always
love your enemy" as life is harsh at Lowood. Helen continues to be the object
of abuse by Miss Scatcherd.
Chapter 7: Mr. Brocklehurst visits Jane's classroom and reprimands Jane in
front of the other students for dropping her slate.
Chapter 8: Jane feels sorry for herself after being humiliated by Mr.
Brocklehurst. Helen is supportive of Jane's problems, and Miss Temple listens
to Jane's story. Miss Temple writes to Dr. Lloyd to verify Jane's truthfulness
and clears Jane's name of being branded a liar.
Chapter 9: Jane is finally enjoying her time at Lowood, but springtime brings
an epidemic of typhus to the school afflicting nearly half the students. Helen
develops consumption and becomes gravely ill.
Chapter 10: The public becomes concerned with the conditions at the school.
Many positive changes occur, but Jane has spent eight years at Lowood and
now feels she needs a change. She applies for a governess position.
Chapter 11: Jane accepts a position at Thornfield as governess to eight-year
old Adèle. Jane is informed that Mr. Rochester is her employer and that he
travels often.
149
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Persuasive
English Literature XII
Grade Level 12
Lesson Title
3
Chapters 12-16
4
Chapters 17-19
5
Chapters 20-23
Lesson Content
Chapter 12: Jane is happy living at Thornfield and has a positive relationship
with Adèle. Jane witnesses a horse slipping on an icy spot and assists the rider.
She later finds out that it was Mr. Rochester, her employer.
Chapter 13: Mr. Rochester, Adèle, Mrs. Fairfax, and Jane have dinner
together. Mr. Rochester is impatient with Jane but is impressed with her
paintings.
Chapter 14: When Mr. Rochester returns from his long trips, he gives Adèle
gifts. He and Jane have a candid and pleasant discussion about a variety of
topics.
Chapter 15: Upon learning more about Adèle's background, Jane understands
her better. Jane hears strange laughter outside her door and sees smoke
coming from Mr. Rochester's room, and he asks Jane to keep it a secret.
Chapter 16: Mr. Rochester offers an explanation for the cause of the fire and
then leaves Thornfield for a social engagement that Blanche Ingram will also be
attending.
Chapter 17: Mr. Rochester is returning to Thornfield with a group of guests,
and Jane finally meets Blanche Ingram. Jane acknowledges her growing
affection for Mr. Rochester.
Chapter 18: The guests at Thornfield play charades. Jane considers her
feelings for Mr. Rochester. A man from the West Indies, Richard Mason, arrives
at Thornfield looking for Mr. Rochester.
Chapter 19: A gypsy fortune teller, Mother Bunches, arrives at Thornfield to
tell fortunes, and Jane is told about her future.
Chapter 20: Jane and the guests hear a loud cry from the upstairs of the
house. Mr. Rochester reassures the guests, sends them back to bed, and asks
Jane for her help.
Chapter 21: Jane returns to Gateshead to visit with the ailing Mrs. Reed, who
gives Jane a letter from her Uncle John Eyer that she has kept secret for three
years.
Chapter 22: Mrs. Reed passes away, and Jane stays with her cousins for a
while after the funeral. She returns to Thornfield expecting wedding
preparations for Mr. Rochester and Blanche Ingram.
Chapter 23: Jane and Mr. Rochester visit in the garden at Thornfield, and Mr.
Rochester teasingly tells Jane she must leave Thornfield. He then surprises
Jane by revealing his feelings for her.
150
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Persuasive
English Literature XII
Grade Level 12
Lesson Title
6
Chapters 24-26
7
Chapters 27-30
8
Chapters 31-34
Lesson Content
Chapter 24: Mr. Rochester and Jane are to be married in one month, but Mrs.
Fairfax is not excited about the proposal. Jane informs Mr. Rochester that she
will continue to tutor Adèle.
Chapter 25: The time for the wedding has arrived. Jane tells Mr. Rochester of
a frightening dream and occurrence that she experienced the night before. Mr.
Rochester tries to calm her fears.
Chapter 26: Jane and Mr. Rochester go to the church for their wedding, but a
stranger speaks out during the ceremony with information that prevents the
marriage from taking place. Mr. Rochester takes Jane and the others back to
Thornfield to reveal an unusual secret.
Chapter 27: Jane is confused by the events of the day, so Mr. Rochester tells
her about his past. He still professes his love for her, but Jane makes the
decision to leave Thornfield.
Chapter 28: Jane travels by coach to a place called Whitcross. She
accidentally leaves her parcel on the coach and now has no money. She is
forced to beg for food, and the Rivers family takes her in.
Chapter 29: Jane is exhausted from her travels and has spent three days with
the Rivers family. She wants to stay at the Rivers' home until she can find
work.
Chapter 30: Jane becomes friends with Diana and Mary Rivers who are also
governesses and will soon be returning to their positions. St. John offers Jane a
position directing a charity school called Morton.
Chapter 31: Jane begins her job as headmistress of Morton and moves into
the school cottage. She then meets a beautiful woman named Rosamond
Oliver.
Chapter 32: Jane is happier in her new position and is well liked and accepted
by the community, but she is puzzled by St. John's reaction to a portrait she is
painting of Rosamond Oliver.
Chapter 33: Later, St. John returns and reveals to Jane that he knows about
her past and tells her of her Uncle John Eyer's death and the news of her
inheritance.
Chapter 34: Jane waits for Mary and Diana Rivers to arrive at Moor House. St.
John asks Jane to go on a mission to India with him. She is confused by St.
John's peculiar offer.
151
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Expository
English Literature XII
Grade Level 12
Lesson Title
9
Chapters 35-38
Introduction
1
Act I, Scenes 1-7
2
Act II, Scenes 1-4
3
Act III, Scenes 1-6
4
Act IV, Scenes 1-3
5
Act V, Scenes 1-8
Introduction
Lesson Content
Chapter 35: St. John waits for Jane's decision. He has become very cold and
controlling. Jane suddenly thinks she hears the voice of Mr. Rochester calling
her name.
Chapter 36: Jane returns to Thornfield after being gone for a year and is
shocked by what she finds when she arrives. She goes to a nearby inn to
inquire about what happened at Thornfield and to the whereabouts of Mr.
Rochester.
Chapter 37: Jane goes to Ferndean where Mr. Rochester is living and
surprises Mr. Rochester by serving his tea. Once again, Mr. Rochester asks
Jane to marry him.
Chapter 38: Jane and Mr. Rochester marry in a quiet ceremony, and Adèle is
moved to a closer school. Jane is very happy with her life and the decisions she
has made.
Macbeth
Macbeth is a play that shows how the lust for power leads to destruction as
Macbeth's greed corrupts his spirit and creates a negative outlook on life.
Three witches visit Macbeth and Banquo on the battlefield telling them of their
futures. Lady Macbeth creates a plot to kill King Duncan.
Macduff and Lennox arrive at the castle to discover King Duncan has been
murdered. Macbeth appears very upset about what has happened.
Banquo suspects Macbeth for the murder of King Duncan, so Macbeth arranges
for the murder of Banquo and his son. Macbeth is visited by a ghost.
Once again, Macbeth meets with the witches and seeks reassurance for his
future. He learns that Macduff has gone to England, which angers him.
Lady Macbeth has gone mad with guilt, and Macbeth believes he cannot be
killed because of the witches' prophecy.
Wuthering Heights
As a result of his childhood experiences, Heathcliff puts revenge into action and
makes life miserable for those he hates in Wuthering Heights.
152
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material
Study: EB Learning
Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning
Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning
Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning
Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning
Essay: Narrative
Material
Material
Material
Material
Material
Study: EB Learning Material
English Literature XII
Grade Level 12
Lesson Title
1
Chapters 1-6
2
Chapters 7-10
Lesson Content
Chapter 1: Mr. Lockwood meets with Heathcliff, his new landlord. Mr.
Lockwood is concerned for his safety at Heathcliff's home, Wuthering Heights,
after being left in a room with ferocious dogs.
Chapter 2: The next day, Mr. Lockwood makes another visit to Wuthering
Heights. A blizzard occurs and he asks for directions on how to return home
but is refused assistance. He is forced to spend the night at Wuthering Heights.
Chapter 3: Lockwood has nightmares and refuses to stay in the room for fear
it is haunted.
Chapter 4: Lockwood asks his housekeeper, Nelly, about the history of
Wuthering Heights. She tells about former owners, the Earnshaw family.
Chapter 5: Heathcliff is adopted by the Earnshaws. Hindley Earnshaw is sent
away to school. Mr. Earnshaw becomes ill and later dies. Catherine Earnshaw
and Heathcliff mourn his loss and Hindley returns home.
Chapter 6: Hindley takes over the household and forces Heathcliff to work in
the fields. Heathcliff and Catherine run off to play. Heathcliff explains to Nelly
that Catherine was bitten by the Lintons' dog and was carried into their house
by a servant.
Chapter 7: Catherine stays at Thrushcross Grange for five weeks. When she
returns home, she is rude to Heathcliff and embarrasses him. The Linton family
is invited to Wuthering Heights for dinner. Heathcliff is locked in the attic.
Chapter 8: Hindley's wife gives birth to a son, Hareton, and she dies shortly
after. Heathcliff grows jealous about Catherine's relationship with Edgar Linton
and confronts her about it.
Chapter 9: Catherine tells Nelly that she and Edgar are engaged and admits to
loving Heathcliff but says she could never marry him. Heathcliff overhears this
and leaves Wuthering Heights.
Chapter 10: Heathcliff returns to Wuthering Heights shortly after Catherine's
marriage and visits the Lintons, where Isabella develops an interest in him.
153
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Expository
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Persuasive
English Literature XII
Grade Level 12
Lesson Title
3
Chapters 11-15
4
Chapters 16-20
5
Chapters 21-24
Lesson Content
Chapter 11: Catherine confronts Heathcliff about his feelings for Isabella. She
locks herself in a room and refuses to eat after Edgar tells her that she must
choose between him and Heathcliff.
Chapter 12: Catherine becomes delirious and is upset that Edgar has not
come in to ask for her forgiveness. Isabella and Heathcliff elope.
Chapter 13: Catherine is still weak and feverish and learns that she is
pregnant. Isabella regrets her decision to marry Heathcliff.
Chapter 14: Nelly goes to Wuthering Heights. Heathcliff asks about Catherine
and threatens to hold Nelly captive until she agrees to help him.
Chapter 15: Catherine, who is still very ill, and Heathcliff finally meet with
each other. Catherine collapses after a heated discussion.
Chapter 16: Catherine gives birth to a daughter, also named Catherine, and
the mother dies shortly after. Nelly tells Heathcliff the sad news.
Chapter 17: Isabella goes to London and gives birth to a son who she names
Linton. Hindley dies six months later.
Chapter 18: Edgar raises his daughter Cathy and does not allow her to
explore the surrounding area, but when he is gone to London to visit Isabella
Cathy wanders to Wuthering Heights.
Chapter 19: Edgar returns home from London after Isabella dies and brings
twelve-year-old Linton with him. Heathcliff now wants custody of his son.
Chapter 20: Nelly brings Linton to Wuthering Heights, and Heathcliff meets
his son for the first time.
Chapter 21: Cathy and Nelly visit Linton at Wuthering Heights. Cathy is quite
taken with Linton but is unkind to Hareton. Edgar forbids Cathy to see Linton
again, but they continue to correspond through letters.
Chapter 22: Edgar is sick most of the following winter, and Cathy's
correspondence with Linton has ceased. Heathcliff makes her feel guilty so she
visits Linton.
Chapter 23: Linton tries to coax Cathy into marrying him, which aggravates
her into shoving his chair. He develops a coughing fit. Nelly catches a cold and
Cathy must now care for her and Edgar during the day. At night, she sneeks
out to see Linton at Wuthuring Heights.
Chapter 24: Edgar forbids Cathy from returning to Wuthering Heights, but
Linton can visit Cathy at Thrushcross Grange.
154
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Descriptive
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Persuasive
English Literature XII
Grade Level 12
Lesson Title
6
Chapters 25-29
7
Chapters 30-34
Introduction
Lesson Content
Chapter 25: Catherine obeys her father and does not visit Linton. Due to
Linton's failing health, Edgar considers letting Cathy marry Linton and
arrangements are made for Cathy and Linton to meet on the moors.
Chapter 26: Nelly and Cathy have to assist Linton because of his weak
physical condition, and they agree to meet again the next Thursday.
Chapter 27: Cathy and Nelly go to visit Linton in the moors. Heathcliff
convinces them to come to Wuthering Heights and locks them in the house.
Chapter 28: Cathy and Linton are now married, and Linton is proud that he
will soon claim Cathy's inheritance. Cathy visits Edgar who is on his deathbed.
Chapter 29: Heathcliff forces Cathy to return to Wuthering Heights and tells
Nelly some disturbing information about Edgar's burial.
Chapter 30: Cathy cares for Linton until his death and remains distant from
Hareton. Nelly wants to help Cathy leave Wuthering Heights.
Chapter 31: Mr. Lockwood goes to Wuthering Heights to tell Heathcliff that he
is moving out and returning to London. He slips a note to Cathy from Nelly.
Chapter 32: After six months, Lockwood returns to Thrushcross Grange on a
hunting trip and learns that Nelly has moved to Wuthering Heights.
Chapter 33: Cathy and Heathcliff have an argument and he nearly strikes her.
Chapter 34: Heathcliff dies, which gives Cathy control of both Wuthering
Heights and Thrushcross Grange, and Hareton and Cathy have grown closer.
Lockwood leaves.
Pride and Prejudice
The two main characters in Pride and Prejudice, Elizabeth Bennet and
Fitzwilliam Darcy, are introduced to each other at a ball in Meryton. Their first
impressions of each other are not favorable.
155
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Compare and Contrast
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Compare and Contrast
Study: EB Learning Material
English Literature XII
Grade Level 12
Lesson Title
1
Volume I Chapters
1-14
Lesson Content
Chapter 1: The Bennet family members are discussing the expected arrival of
Mr. Bingley, a wealthy man who will live at a neighboring estate.
Chapter 2: Mrs. Bennet does not know that Mr. Bennet has already visited Mr.
Bingley. Mrs. Bennet and the girls have many questions about Mr. Bingley.
Chapter 3: Mrs. Bennet and the girls meet Mr. Bingley and his friend, Mr.
Darcy, at a ball in Meryton. Mr. Bingley makes a good impression on the
Bennet family women, while Mr. Darcy is considered to be quite arrogant.
Chapter 4: Jane tells Elizabeth that she likes Mr. Bingley. Elizabeth agrees
that Mr. Bingley is friendly, but she does not approve of his sisters' behavior.
Chapter 5: The Lucas family lives near Longbourn. Charlotte Lucas and her
mother visit the Bennet family the day after the ball in Meryton.
Chapter 6: Jane and Elizabeth visit with Mr. Bingley and his sisters. Mr. Darcy,
who is staying with the Bingleys, is attracted to Elizabeth. Elizabeth is not
attracted to him.
Chapter 7: The Bingleys invite Jane to dinner at their estate. Jane is caught in
a rainstorm and becomes ill and must stay at the Bingley's home. Elizabeth
visits Jane at the Bingley's home.
Chapter 8: The Bingley sisters harshly criticize Elizabeth and her family
because of their social position. This does not bother Mr. Bingley, but Mr. Darcy
considers it to be a problem.
Chapter 9: Mrs. Bennet visits Jane and Elizabeth at Netherfield, the Bingley
home, and Elizabeth is embarrassed by her mother's behavior.
Chapter 10: Elizabeth visits with the Bingleys and Mr. Darcy in the drawing
room and notices that Mr. Darcy is continually staring at her. She believes Mr.
Darcy disapproves of her and her family.
Chapter 11: Jane joins the others in the drawing room after dinner. Elizabeth
is pleased by the attention Mr. Bingley pays to Jane.
Chapter 12: Elizabeth and Jane return to their home at Longbourn. Mr.
Bingley is sad to see them go, but. Mr. Darcy and the Bingley sisters are glad.
Chapter 13: Mr. Bennet tells his family that his cousin, Mr. Collins, is coming
to visit Longbourn. Mr. Collins will eventually inherit Longbourn.
Chapter 14: Mr. Bennet asks Mr. Collins to tell the family of his wealthy
patroness, Lady Catherine de Bourgh. Mr. Bennet thinks Mr. Collins is a fool.
156
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Narrative
English Literature XII
Grade Level 12
Lesson Title
2
Volume I Chapters
15-23
Lesson Content
Chapter 15: Mr. Collins announces that he is interested in marrying one of the
Bennet girls. The Bennet ladies and Mr. Collins go for a walk and meet two
soldiers, Mr. Wickham and Mr. Denny.
Chapter 16: Elizabeth visits with Mr. Wickham and is impressed with the
young soldier but wonders about the animosity between Mr. Darcy and Mr.
Wickham.
Chapter 17: Elizabeth tells Jane about her conversation with Mr. Wickham.
Mr. Bingley announces that there will be a ball at his home, Netherfield.
Chapter 18: The Bennet family attends the ball at Netherfield. Elizabeth,
disappointed that Mr. Wickham is not present, reluctantly dances with Mr.
Collins.
Chapter 19: Mr. Collins proposes to Elizabeth, and she adamantly declines his
offer of marriage. Mr. Collins does not believe her refusal is sincere.
Chapter 20: Mrs. Bennet asks her husband to talk to Elizabeth about Mr.
Collins' proposal, and he tells Elizabeth that she has made the right choice.
Charlotte comes to visit and meets Mr. Collins.
Chapter 21: Jane receives a note stating the Bingley family is leaving
Netherfield to go to London and that Mr. Bingley will marry Georgiana Darcy.
Chapter 22: Mr. Collins asks Charlotte Lucas to marry him.
Chapter 23: Sir William Lucas arrives at Longbourn announcing the wedding
plans to the Bennet family. The announcement affects Elizabeth's and
Charlotte's friendship.
157
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Compare and Contrast
English Literature XII
Grade Level 12
Lesson Title
3
Volume II Chapters
1-10
Lesson Content
Chapter 1: Miss Bingley sends Jane a letter stating that the Bingleys will not
return to Netherfield until the end of the winter. Jane and Elizabeth talk about
Mr. Bingley and Mr. Darcy.
Chapter 2: Mrs. Bennet's brother and his wife, Mr. and Mrs. Gardiner, arrive
at Longbourn for a visit and offer to take Jane to London.
Chapter 3: Mrs. Gardiner warns Elizabeth not to get involved with Wickham.
Mr. Collins returns for his wedding, and Charlotte invites Elizabeth to visit them
at Hunsford.
Chapter 4: Elizabeth accompanies William Lucas on a trip to Hunsford where
Charlotte and Mr. Collins live. They stop in London to visit Jane and the
Gardiners.
Chapter 5: Sir William, his daughter Maria, and Elizabeth arrive at Hunsford.
Miss de Bourgh invites everyone to dinner at Rosings the following day.
Chapter 6: Mr. Collins describes the grandeur of the estate at Rosings, but
Elizabeth is unimpressed by Mr. Collins' descriptions.
Chapter 7: Elizabeth stays at Hunsford after the departure of Sir William and
Maria and learns that Mr. Darcy and his cousin, Colonel Fitzwilliam, will be
visiting Rosings.
Chapter 8: Colonel Fitzwilliam and Elizabeth visit with each other following
dinner at Rosings, but Lady Catherine de Bourgh interrupts their conversation.
Chapter 9: Mr. Darcy comes to Hunsford to visit Elizabeth. They discuss the
departure of the Bingleys and Mr. Darcy the previous November.
Chapter 10: Elizabeth meets Colonel Fitzwilliam while she is on a walk. He
tells her Mr. Darcy recently saved Mr. Bingley from an ill-advised marriage.
Elizabeth becomes ill over the news.
158
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Compare and Contrast
English Literature XII
Grade Level 12
Lesson Title
4
Volume II Chapters
11-19
Lesson Content
Chapter 11: Mr. Darcy tells Elizabeth he is in love with her and asks her to
marry him, but she refuses due to his attitude toward her family.
Chapter 12: Mr. Darcy finds Elizabeth while she is out on a walk and hands
her a letter describing his reasons for stopping the marriage of Jane to Mr.
Bingley. It also describes the relationship between Mr. Darcy and Mr. Wickham.
Chapter 13: Elizabeth reads the letter and at first does not believe Mr. Darcy's
account of Mr. Bingley and Jane and is confused about Mr. Wickham.
Chapter 14: Lady Catherine invites Elizabeth, Maria, and the Collins to dinner.
Lady Catherine asks Elizabeth and Maria to stay another two weeks, but
Elizabeth tells Lady Catherine that her father wants her to return home.
Chapter 15: Elizabeth and Maria stop at the Gardiner home for a few days on
their trip home. Jane plans to join them.
Chapter 16: Elizabeth is glad the soldiers will soon be leaving Meryton, but
Kitty and Lydia hope to vacation in Brighton to be near the soldiers.
Chapter 17: Elizabeth tells Jane about Mr. Darcy's marriage proposal and Mr.
Wickham. They decide not to reveal the contents of the letter. Elizabeth does
not tell Jane about the information in the letter concerning Mr. Bingley.
Chapter 18: Mrs. Forster, the wife of the colonel of the regiment, asks Lydia
to go with her to Brighton, and Elizabeth urges her father not to allow Lydia to
go.
Chapter 19: The relationship between Mr. Bennet and Mrs. Bennet is
described in this chapter. Elizabeth goes on a vacation with Mr. and Mrs.
Gardiner.
159
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Descriptive
English Literature XII
Grade Level 12
Lesson Title
5
Volume III Chapters
1-10
Lesson Content
Chapter 1: Elizabeth and the Gardiners visit Pemberley, Mr. Darcy's estate.
Both Elizabeth and Mr. Darcy are uncomfortable in each other's company.
Chapter 2: Elizabeth meets Mr. Darcy's sister. Mr. and Mrs. Gardiner believe
Mr. Darcy is in love with Elizabeth.
Chapter 3: Mr. Darcy's sister Georgiana approves of Elizabeth, but Miss
Bingley tells both Mr. Darcy and Georgiana that she does not like Elizabeth.
Chapter 4: Jane sends two letters to Elizabeth telling her that Lydia has
eloped with Wickham. They are believed to be in London. Elizabeth asks Mr.
Gardiner to help her look for her sister.
Chapter 5: The Gardiners and Elizabeth arrive at Longbourn. Elizabeth regrets
not revealing what she knew of Wickham's character.
Chapter 6: The Bennet family is disgraced over the actions of Lydia, and Mr.
Bennet returns home.
Chapter 7: Mr. Gardiner finds Wickham and Lydia. Wickham wants money
from Mr. Bennet before he will marry Lydia.
Chapter 8: Mr. Bennet suspects that Mr. Gardiner paid Wickham so he would
agree to marry Lydia and announces that he will not welcome the couple.
Chapter 9: Lydia and Wickham arrive at Longbourn, and Lydia is not ashamed
of what she has done to the reputation of the Bennet family. Lydia tells
Elizabeth that Mr. Darcy attended the wedding. Elizabeth writes a letter to Mrs.
Gardiner asking for more details concerning Mr. Darcy's role in the wedding.
Chapter 10: Mrs. Gardiner sends a letter. Elizabeth now realizes that Mr.
Darcy was responsible for arranging the wedding of Lydia and Wickham.
Elizabeth alludes to Wickham that she is aware of his past dealings with Mr.
Darcy but is careful to not provoke him.
160
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Descriptive
English Literature XII
Grade Level 12
Lesson Title
6
Volume III Chapters
11-19
1
Gulliver's Travels: A
Voyage to Lilliput
2
The Adventure of
the Speckled Band
Lesson Content
Chapter 11: Lydia and Wickham leave for Newcastle, where the new regiment
is stationed. Mrs. Bennet invites both Mr. Bingley and Mr. Darcy to dinner.
Chapter 12: Elizabeth observes Jane and Mr. Bingley at the dinner party. She
is convinced that Mr. Bingley is still interested in a relationship with Jane. Mr.
Darcy leaves for London.
Chapter 13: Mr. Bingley is invited to dinner at Longbourn, and Mr. Bingley
talks to Mr. Bennet about his intentions toward Jane.
Chapter 14: Lady Catherine makes a visit to Longbourn the next morning and
tries to discourage Elizabeth against becoming involved with Mr. Darcy.
Elizabeth refuses to listen.
Chapter 15: Mr. Bennet talks to Elizabeth and tells her that Mr. Collins sent
him a letter concerning Mr. Darcy.
Chapter 16: Mr. Bingley and Mr. Darcy come to Longbourn to visit, and Mr.
Darcy proposes to Elizabeth.
Chapter 17: Elizabeth tells Jane about her engagement to Mr. Darcy, and Mrs.
Bennet is happily preparing for another wedding.
Chapter 18: Lady Catherine is very angry that Mr. Darcy and Elizabeth are
going to be married, but the marriage takes place and the couple moves to
Pemberly.
Chapter 19: Elizabeth and Mr. Darcy settle in at Pemberly after their
marriage, and Jane and Mr. Bingley move to Derbyshire, which is near
Pemberly. The Bennet sisters remain in close contact. Lydia and Wickham
experience financial trouble and seek assistance from Elizabeth and Mr. Darcy.
Short Stories
A medical doctor named Lemuel Gulliver is shipwrecked and awakens on the
shore in the land of Lilliput. Here he meets a race of miniature people who are
only six inches tall. Gulliver has many adventures as he becomes involved in
the everyday lives of the Lilliputians.
Helen Stoner contacts the famous detective Sherlock Holmes, recalling to him
the mysterious death of her twin sister several years before. Helen does not
trust her stepfather and is fearful for her own life.
161
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Compare and Contrast
Essay: Persuasive
Essay: Persuasive
English Skills IX - XII
Grade Levels 9 - 12
A+LS English Skills IX - XII introduces students a variety
of topics including:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
common expressions
clauses and phrases
vowel sounds and spellings
story details and sequences
folklore
inferences
parts of speech
clauses and diagramming
blends and silent letters
infinitives
digraphs
etymology
genres and literature
farce and satire
literary devices
propaganda and bias
infinitives and clauses
root words
verbals
syllables and pronunciations
words in context
reading strategies
characterization
classifying information
162
English Skills IX
Grade Level 9
Lesson Title
1
Reading Alphabetization
2
Reading - Analogies
3
Reading - Antonyms
4
Reading - Common
Expressions
5
6
Reading Connotation and
Denotation
Reading - Greek and
Latin Words
7
Reading - Greek
Literature
8
Reading Homonyms and
Homophones
9
Reading - Language
Arts Terms 1
Lesson Content
Reading Skills
Use of a dictionary to alphabetize words, importance of alphabetizing in the
card catalog: alphabetizing by title, author, and subject; telephone directories,
encyclopedia, thesaurus, atlases, periodicals, alphabetizing in bibliographies
Definition of an analogy, students practice completing analogies, strategies for
recognizing analogous relationships: (specific to general, synonyms, antonyms,
cause and effect, part to whole, item to category, time to process, object to
action, object to function, part to whole, performer to action)
Improving vocabulary through the use of antonyms, identifying antonyms in a
dictionary or thesaurus
Everyday sayings, idioms, common expressions, euphemisms, implied
meanings, clichés, folklore: (epic, folktales, fables, fairy tales, myths, parables,
tall tales)
Using denotation and connotation to determine the context word meaning,
using a dictionary and thesaurus to choose the correct word definition and use
Examples and definitions of words with Greek and Latin derivatives, using
prefixes and suffixes to form words
Greek literature: lyric and epic poetry, drama, philosophy, histories, Homer:
(Iliad, Odyssey), Hesiod, didactic, epic, melic, elegiac, iambic, choral poetry,
hexameter, pentameter, Golden Age, Athens, Aeschylus, Sophocles, Oedipus,
Euripides, Drama, Dionysus, Old Comedy, Middle Comedy, New Comedy,
Menander, prose, Sophists, Socrates, Plato, Aristotle, Macedonia, Phillip II,
Alexander the Great, Hellenistic Age, Epicurus, pastoral poetry, Polybius,
Greco-Roman Age, Neoplatonic School of philosophy
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Paragraph
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Short Answer
Essay: Short Answer
Essay: Illustration
Essay: Short Answer
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Expository
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Persuasive
Recognizing the correct use of homonyms and homophones
Essay: Short Answer
Allegory, alliteration, allusion, description, epic, irony: (dramatic irony, irony of
situation, verbal irony) metaphor, paradox, personification, rhyme, rhyme
scheme, satire, simile, stanza: (couplet, tercet, quatrain, cinquain, sestet,
heptastich, octave), symbols and symbolism, verse
Study: EB Learning Material
163
English Skills IX
Grade Level 9
Lesson Title
10
11
12
Reading - Language
Arts Terms 2
Reading - Multiple
Meaning Words
Reading ParaphrasingSummarizing
13
Reading - Poetry
14
Reading - Purpose in
Writing
15
Reading - Reading
Strategies
16
Reading - Story
Details & Sequence
Lesson Content
Antagonist, character, characterization, dialogue, flashback, foreshadowing,
imagery, mood, plot: (exposition, inciting incident, central conflict, climax,
resolution, rising action, denouement, falling action) point of view: (first
person, third person, omniscient, limited), protagonist, sequence of events,
setting, soliloquy, theme, tone
Using a dictionary to identify the multiple meanings of words
Direct quotations, paraphrasing, summarizing, plagiarizing, examples of
paraphrasing and summarizing, the SQ3R method for learning new material
(survey, question, read, recite, review)
Poetry definition, imagery, figurative language, rhyme, lines, stanzas, basic
forms of poetry: (ballad, sonnet, lyric, narrative, limerick), Shakespearean
sonnet, line break, setting, theme
Writing process, points to consider when selecting an audience, writing:
(narrative, persuasive, descriptive, expository), transitional words: (further
information, directional change, sequence and order, explanation, emphasis,
location and setting, compare and contrast, summary and conclusion, time),
order: (spatial order, chronological order, order of importance, logical order),
point of view
Answer who, what, when, where, why, and how questions in a reading
selection; increase reading comprehension through the use and examination of
the following: (vocabulary words, pronouns, cause and effect, story sequence,
compare and contrast, author's tone, predicting outcomes); transitional words:
(further information, directional change, sequence and order, explanation,
emphasis, location and setting, compare and contrast, summary and
conclusion, time)
Writing style: (word choice, tone, degree of formality, figurative language,
rhythm, grammatical structure, sentence length, organization), story elements:
(characterization, setting, plot, conflict, point of view), conflict: (man versus
man, character versus self, man versus nature, man versus society, man
versus fate or destiny), recall details from stories, put story parts in order or
sequence, using visualization, story pattern, chronology, flashback and
foreshadowing, plot routes, the SWBS technique, transitional words: (further
information, directional change, sequence and order, explanation, emphasis,
location and setting, compare and contrast, summary and conclusion, time)
164
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Short Answer
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Short Report
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Short Answer
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Letter Writing
Essay: Short Answer
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Narrative
English Skills IX
Grade Level 9
Lesson Title
17
Reading - Synonyms
18
Reading - Word
Recognition
19
Usage Abbreviations
20
Usage - Appositives
21
Usage Capitalization
22
Usage - Clauses
23
Usage - Compound
Words
24
Usage - Nouns
25
Usage - Parts of
Speech
26
Usage - Phrases
27
Usage - Pronouns
Lesson Content
Improving vocabulary through the use of synonyms, identifying synonyms in a
dictionary or thesaurus
Strategies for critical recognition of small words in larger words, using context,
prefixes, suffixes, and roots to identify unknown words
Usage Skills
Identify and correctly use abbreviations for states, countries, addresses,
measurement, months, days of the week, time, titles, government
departments and offices, organizations
Definition and use of appositives and appositive phrases, punctuation with
appositives
Rules for capitalizing names, dates, geographic names, government
departments and offices, organizations, seasons, days of the week, months,
holidays, title or rank, historic events, historic periods, historic documents,
geographic directions, planets, proper adjectives
Definition and use of independent and subordinate (dependent) clauses,
relative pronouns, clauses that act as adjectives
Definition and examples of compound words, students identify compound
words, hyphenated compound words, compound nouns, compound personal
pronouns, unjoined compound words, gerunds
Parts of speech: (noun, pronoun, verb, adjective, adverb, preposition,
conjunction, interjection), definition and use of nouns, common and proper
nouns, concrete and abstract nouns
Definition and use of prepositions and direct objects, prepositional phrases,
compound prepositions, objective case pronouns, conjunctions: (coordinating,
correlative conjunctions), use of interjections
Definition of a phrase, types of phrases: (verb, noun, prepositional, adjective,
adverb), object of the preposition, modifiers
Definition of a pronoun, pronoun types: (personal, relative, interrogative,
demonstrative, indefinite), antecedents and personal pronouns, singular and
plural pronouns, first, second and third person pronouns, pronoun cases:
(nominative, objective, possessive), pronoun genders: (masculine, feminine,
neutral), reflexive pronouns
165
Essays & Media
Essay: Paragraph
Essay: Short Answer
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Letter Writing
Essay: Short Answer
Essay: Paragraph
Essay: Paragraph
Essay: Short Answer
Essay: Descriptive
Essay: Paragraph
Essay: Short Answer
Essay: Paragraph
English Skills IX
Grade Level 9
Lesson Title
28
Usage - Punctuation
1
29
Usage - Punctuation
2
30
Usage - Sentence
Construction
31
Usage Problems
32
Usage - Verbs 1
33
Usage - Verbs 2
34
Usage - Writing
Process Overview
35
36
37
38
39
40
Vocab - Final
Consonant Blends
Vocab - Initial
Blends
Vocab - Short Vowel
Review
Vocab - Silent
Letters
Vocab - Spelling
Review
Vocab - Vowel
Diphthong Review
Lesson Content
Use of end marks in sentences: (period, question mark, exclamation point),
use of punctuation: (to enclose, to link, to show omission, to separate),
sentence types: (declarative sentence, imperative, exclamatory, interrogative),
use of periods in abbreviations
Use of a comma in a compound sentence, commas used with other
punctuation; use of a comma to separate introductory words, transitional
words, introductory participial phrases, long introductory prepositional phrases,
introductory adverb clauses
Definition of a sentence; fragment; run-on; declarative, interrogative,
exclamatory, and imperative sentences
Correct use of subject verb agreement, phrases: (verb, prepositional,
adjective), pronouns, collective nouns, use of singular and plural, review of
most grammar rules
Definition and use of verbs, action verbs: (physical action, mental action),
transitive verbs, intransitive verbs, and linking verbs
Verb tenses, regular and irregular verbs, action verbs, linking verbs, helping
verbs, verb phrases, transitive and intransitive verbs, main verbs
Overview of the writing process, writing activity, prewriting, clustering,
brainstorming, five senses chart, six big questions, free writing, looping,
chronological order, spatial order, order of importance, transitional words:
(further information, directional change, sequence and order, explanation,
emphasis, location, compare and contrast, summary and conclusion, time)
Vocabulary Skills
Review of ending blends /ld/, /lt/, /nd/, /nt/, /ry/, /ty/, and /nk/; students
complete words with the correct consonant blend
Definition and review of consonant blends using /bl/, /br/, /cl/, /cr/, /dr/, /fl/,
/fr/, /gl/, /gr/, /pl/, and /pr/
Students identify short vowel sounds
Essays & Media
Essay: Short Answer
Essay: Paragraph
Essay: Narrative
Essay: Descriptive
Essay: Short Answer
Essay: Descriptive
Essay: Descriptive
Essay: Paragraph
Essay: Paragraph
Introduction of words that use silent letters /kn/, /wr/, and /gn/; students
complete words with the correct sounds
Using a dictionary, adding suffixes to words, understanding changes with
plurals, verbs, vowel sounds, syllabification as a spelling aid, spelling guidelines
Diphthongs that use the letters /ou/, /oi/, and /ow/; students complete words
using correct vowel combinations
166
Essay: Short Answer
Study: EB Learning Material
English Skills X
Grade Level 10
Lesson Title
1
Reading - Analogies
2
Reading - Antonyms
3
Reading - Dictionary
4
Reading - Fact and
Opinion
5
Reading - Folklore
6
Reading - Language
Arts Terms 1
7
Reading - Language
Arts Terms 2
8
9
Reading - Latin and
Greek Roots 1
Reading - Latin and
Greek Roots 2
Lesson Content
Reading Skills
Definition of analogies, students practice completing analogies, strategies for
recognizing analogous relationships including the following: compare and
contrast, synonyms, antonyms, cause and effect, part to whole, character to
member, time to process, object to characteristic, worker to tool, product to
worker
Definition of antonyms; students practice finding antonyms for words; using
the thesaurus as a source for antonyms
How to use a dictionary, parts of the dictionary and dictionary entry,
syllabication, pronunciation, superscript numbers, word forms, parts of speech,
definitions, thesaurus, guide words, reference materials
Identify facts, opinions and sense words, choose significant details which do or
do not support the main idea, identify information which gives support for
opinions, using judgment, appealing to emotions; logic, loaded words,
literature: (poems, short stories, novels, essays, plays), transitional words,
order: (spatial order, chronological order, order of importance, logical order),
writing: (narrative, persuasive, descriptive, expository), drawing conclusions
Folklore, definition and examples of fable, folktales, tall tale, myth, fantasy,
parable, heroes, proverb, fairy tale, symbolism, Greek gods and goddesses
(Zeus, Hera, Poseidon, Hestia), epic, Homer, Iliad, and Odyssey
Definition of literary terms: autobiography, ballad, biography, fiction,
nonfiction, fantasy, fable, tall tale, myth, tragedy, genre, parable, literary
style, motif, persona, epiphany, figures of speech, literal language, figurative
language
Definition of poetry terms: anapest, blank verse, caesura, couplet, dactyl, foot,
iamb, meter, monologue, poetry, prosody, pyrrhic, refrain, repetition, rhythm,
scansion, sonnet, spondee, trochee, terza rima, versification
Expanding vocabulary through the study of common Latin and Greek roots
Expanding vocabulary through the study of common Latin and Greek roots
167
Essays & Media
Essay: Short Answer
Essay: Paragraph
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Short Answer
Essay: Paragraph
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Narrative
Study: EB Learning Material
Study: EB Learning Material
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Expository
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Short Answer
English Skills X
Grade Level 10
Lesson Title
10
Reading - Latin
Literature
11
Reading - Main Idea
12
13
Reading - Making
Inferences
Reading - Multiple
Meaning Words
14
Reading - Poetry
15
Reading - Prefixes
16
Reading - Story
Elements
17
Reading - Suffixes
18
Reading - Synonyms
19
Reading - Words in
Context
Lesson Content
Roman Empire, Latins, Etruscans, Roman Republic, Greco-Roman Age,
Plutarch, Lucian, Stoicism, Epictetus, Ptolemy, Galen, Latin literature: (Early
Period, Golden Age, Age of Cicero, Augustan Age, Silver Age), Livius
Andronicus, Gnaeus Naevius, Latin tragedies, Quintus Ennius, Latin comedies,
Plautus, Golden Age of Roman Literature, Cicero, orations, Julius Caesar,
Sallust, Catullus, Lucretius, Varro, Epicurus, Zeno, Virgil, Aeneid, Horace,
elegiac poetry, Pliny the Elder, fall of Rome
Identify main idea and details, recognize the title as a source of the main idea,
determine the key words and topic sentence, supporting sentences including
anecdotes, facts, and statistics, clincher sentences, theme, fiction, historical
fiction, nonfiction
Make an inference based on feelings and motives, mannerism, definitions and
examples of feelings and motives, drawing conclusions, characterization
Using a dictionary to identify the multiple meanings of words, parts of speech,
thesaurus
Types of poetry: (lyric, dramatic, narrative), stanza: (couplet, tercet, quatrain,
cinquain, sestet, heptastich, octave), theme, rhyme, rhyme scheme, figurative
language: (personification, simile, metaphor), imagery, sonnet: (Elizabethan,
Shakespearean, English), iambic pentameter, rhythm, heroic couplet, haiku,
dramatic monologue, narrative poetry, ballad, epic, in media res, metrical
romances, concrete poem, diamante poem
Using prefixes from the Greek, French, and Latin languages to determine word
meaning, suffixes, and roots; using a dictionary to determine word origin
(etymology)
Narrative writing: (creative nonfiction, historical fiction, nonfiction),
characterization, plot, setting, point of view, fiction, nonfiction, historical
fiction, creative fiction, autobiography, biography, conflict, novella, novel, short
story
Using suffixes from the Greek, French, and Latin languages to determine word
meaning, prefixes, roots, suffixes that create nouns and adjectives
Definition and identification of synonyms; sources: dictionary and thesaurus;
examples of synonyms
Using denotation and connotation to determine the context word meaning,
using a dictionary and thesaurus to choose the correct word definition,
euphemisms
168
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Compare and Contrast
Essay: Short Answer
Essay: Paragraph
Essay: Paragraph
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Expository
Essay: Short Answer
Study: EB Learning Material
CV Video
Essay: Short Answer
Essay: Paragraph
Essay: Paragraph
Essay: Persuasive
English Skills X
Grade Level 10
Lesson Title
20
Usage - Adjectives
21
Usage Capitalization
22
Usage - Clauses
23
Usage - Nouns
24
Usage - Parts of a
Sentence
25
Usage - Parts of
Speech
26
27
28
29
Usage - Pronouns
Usage - Punctuation
1
Usage - Punctuation
2
Usage - Usage
Problems
30
Usage - Verbals 1
31
Usage - Verbals 2
32
Usage - Verbs 1
33
Usage - Verbs 2
Lesson Content
Usage Skills
Definition and use of adjectives, articles, proper adjectives and predicates,
demonstrative adjectives, interrogative pronouns as adjectives, indefinite
pronouns as adjectives, possessive nouns, common and proper nouns
Capitalization of proper nouns and proper adjectives, review of rules for
capitalizing names, titles, locations, historical events, historic periods,
movements, documents, special events, days of the week, months, holidays,
buildings, monuments, awards, ships, planets and other heavenly bodies
Definition and use of adjective and adverb clauses, noun clauses, subjects,
direct objects, predicate nominatives, indirect objects, appositives, objects of
prepositions, prepositional phrases, clauses: (independent, subordinate,
dependent); sentence structure: (simple, compound, complex, compoundcomplex)
Common and proper nouns, collective and compound nouns, concrete and
abstract nouns, one word, two word, and hyphenated words
Identify the simple and complete subject in a sentence
Parts of speech: (noun, pronoun, adjective, verb, adverb, preposition,
conjunction, interjection), recognize and use the eight parts of speech in
sentences, verb phrase
Pronouns: (relative, interrogative, indefinite, relative, personal), antecedents
Comma use, commas in bibliographic references, parenthetical expression, use
of punctuation in direct quotations, abbreviations, dates, addresses
Use a colon: (time of day, salutation in a business letter; the use of
semicolons)
Avoiding shifts in tense, redundancies, eliminating unnecessary words,
producing effective writing
Definition and use of participles, participial phrases, phrases that act as
adjectives
Definition and use of gerunds
Principle parts of verbs: present tense, past tense, past participle, and present
participle
Transitive and intransitive verbs; identify the mood and voice of verbs;
indicative, imperative, and subjunctive moods; active and passive voice
169
Essays & Media
Essay: Descriptive
Essay: Brochure
Essay: Expository
Essay: Persuasive
Essay: Scavenger Hunt
Essay: Short Answer
Essay: Expository
Essay: Descriptive
Essay: Letter Writing
Essay: Paragraph
Essay: Paragraph
Essay: Descriptive
Essay: Short Answer
Essay: Short Answer
English Skills X
Grade Level 10
Lesson Title
34
35
36
37
38
Vocab - Final
Consonant Blends
Vocab - Initial 3Letter Blends
Vocab - Letters and
Pronunciation
Vocab - Silent
Letters
Vocab - Vowel
Sounds Review
Lesson Content
Vocabulary Skills
Review of ending blends /ct/, /st/, /sk/, /rm/, and /rn/
Examples of words having /scr/, /spr/, /spl/, /squ/, /sch/, and /thr/ blends,
students complete words with the correct blends
Identify initial, medial, and final single consonant sounds and sound-letter
correspondences, blends and digraphs, troublesome consonant sounds,
clusters, diacritical marks
Introduction of words that use silent letters /gh/, /sc/, /rh/, and /dge/,
students complete words with the correct sounds
Use of vowel consonant vowel clusters to create long /a/, /e/, /i/, and /u/
vowel sounds, silent letter, students identify long /a/, /e/, /i/, and /u/ words
170
Essays & Media
Essay: Short Answer
Essay: Short Answer
Essay: Activity
Essay: Short Answer
English Skills XI
Grade Level 11
Lesson Title
1
Reading - American
Literature 1
2
Reading - American
Literature 2
3
Reading - Cause and
Effect
4
Reading Characterization
5
Reading - Classifying
Information
6
7
8
9
Reading - Context
Clues and Reading
Reading - Farce and
Satire
Reading - Foreign
Terms
Reading Homophones &
Homographs
10
Reading - Language
Arts Terms 1
11
Reading - Language
Arts Terms 2
Lesson Content
Reading Skills
Periods of American Literature: Exploration Period and Colonial Period to 1763,
Revolutionary Period - 1763 to 1787, National Period - 1787 to 1820, Romantic
Period - 1820 to 1860
Periods of American Literature: Realism Period - 1860 to 1914, Modernism
Period 1914 to the end of World War II in 1945, Post-Modernism Period - 1945
to the present
Writing strategies: (narration, description, step by step instruction),
comparison and contrast, cause and effect, students identify various causes
and effects by reading clues, analyzing historical events, tips for writing cause
and effect analyses, linking words and phrases
Make an inference based on character traits using description and dialogue,
examples of how authors use characterization
Definition of classifying information, students classify various groups of items,
newspapers, library, yellow pages, Dewey Decimal System, atlases,
encyclopedias, almanacs
Select the correct meaning for unfamiliar words using definition restatement,
comparison, contrast, cause and effect, using synonyms as context clues
Identify the elements of farce and satire; identify and correctly use oxymorons,
parody, types of irony, and foil
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Descriptive
Essay: Short Answer
Essay: Paragraph
Essay: Research Plan Writing
Essay: Short Answer
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Descriptive
Foreign terms that enrich and extend vocabularies
Essay: Short Report
Definition and examples of homophones and homographs
Essay: Short Answer
Antonym, apostrophe, aside, chorus, comedy, dialect, diction, euphemism,
farce, folklore, homograph, homonym, homophone, Horation satire, idiom,
Jouvenalian satire, melodrama, moral, onomatopoeia, oxymoron, parody,
proverb, saga, synonym, syntax, treatise
Assonance, consonance, dramatic poetry, elegy, end-stopped line,
enjambment, epinikion, epistle, fixed poetry, free verse, haiku, heroic couplet,
iambic pentameter, iambic poetry, in media res, kenning, limerick, lyric poetry,
melic poetry, narrative poetry, ode, parallelism, rhyme types: (end, true, slant,
eye, internal rhyme)
171
Study: EB Learning Material
Study: EB Learning Material
English Skills XI
Grade Level 11
12
13
Lesson Title
Reading - Latin and
Greek Roots 1
Reading - Latin and
Greek Roots 2
14
Reading - Mood and
Tone
15
Reading - Poetry
16
Reading - Point of
View
17
Reading - Prefixes
18
Reading - Suffixes
19
Reading - Thesaurus
20
Reading - Universal
Themes in Literature
21
Usage - Adjectives
Lesson Content
Expanding vocabulary through the study of common Latin and Greek roots
Expanding vocabulary through the study of common Latin and Greek roots
Identify elements of mood and tone, flashback, foreshadowing, imagery;
creating the mood in writing, how to identify the mood and tone in a reading
selection
Stanzas: (couplet: two line stanza; tercet: three line stanza; quatrain: four line
stanza; cinquain: five line stanza; sestet: six line stanza; heptastich: seven
line stanza; octave: eight line stanza), theme, setting, imagery, figurative
language, figures of speech: (hyperbole, metaphor, personification, simile,
symbol), rhyme types: (masculine, feminine, end, true, slant, eye, internal),
rhyme scheme, alliteration, consonance, assonance, parallelism,
onomatopoeia, kenning, free verse, caesura
Recognize first-person and third-person points of view, narrator, omniscient
point of view, limited point of view
Using prefixes from the Greek, French, and Latin languages to determine word
meaning, suffixes, and roots, using a dictionary to determine word origin
(etymology)
Using suffixes from the Greek, French, and Latin languages to determine word
meaning, prefixes, and roots, suffixes that create nouns and adjectives,
How to use a thesaurus as a resource to find words with similar meanings
(synonyms)
Definition and examples of conflicts: (man versus man, man versus nature,
man versus self), elements of a plot: (exposition, inciting incident, central
conflict, climax, resolution, rising action, falling action) universal themes of
literature: (individual and self, individual and individual, individual and family,
individual and society, individual and nature, individual and the universe,
individual as a hero)
Usage Skills
Predicate adjectives, suffix endings of adjectives, adjectives as modifiers,
identify and use the positive, comparative and superlative forms of adjectives,
identifying adjectives in relationship to nouns and verbs, irregular forms of
adjectives
172
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Short Answer
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Short Answer
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Expository
Essay: Narrative
Essay: Short Answer
Essay: Paragraph
Essay: Descriptive
Study: CV Videos
Essay: Expository
Essay: Descriptive
English Skills XI
Grade Level 11
22
Lesson Title
Usage Capitalization
23
Usage - Clauses
24
Usage - Infinitives
25
Usage - Nouns
26
Usage - Parts of a
Sentence
27
Usage - Parts of
Speech
28
Usage - Punctuation
1
29
Usage - Punctuation
2
30
Usage - Usage
Problems
31
Usage - Verbs
Tenses
32
33
34
Vocab - Consonants
Vocab - Digraphs
Vocab - R-Controlled
Sounds
Lesson Content
Review of common capitalization rules
Essays & Media
Essay: Letter Writing
Independent and subordinate clauses, definition and use of noun, adverb, and
adjective clauses, diagramming adjective and noun clauses, finding clauses in
compound-complex sentences, predicate nominative, relative pronouns,
coordinating conjunctions
Definition and use of infinitives, infinitive phrase, use of infinitives and infinitive
phrases as direct objects, predicate nominative
Classification of nouns: (common or proper, concrete or abstract, compound
and collective), identifying the determiner of a noun, singular and plural nouns,
suffix endings, plural forms of words with Greek and Latin origins
Identify subject complements, direct and indirect objects, and objective
complements
Review of the eight parts of speech: (noun, verb, pronoun, adjective,
conjunction, adverb, preposition, interjection), how to recognize and use the
eight parts of speech in sentences
Use of punctuation in quotations, when to use a comma, period, colon,
semicolon, question mark, exclamation point, use of quotation marks to
enclose titles of short stories, essays, short poems, songs, magazine articles,
parts of a book, single television programs, slang expressions, nicknames,
Identify when to punctuate using apostrophes, the use of an apostrophe to
show possession or the plural forms of words, possessive case of personal
pronouns, indefinite pronouns
Correct usage of confusing words such as a/an, good/well, discover/invent,
bust/busted, could/have, accept/except, between/among, bring/take,
affect/effect/ beside/besides, anywhere/everywhere, don't/doesn't, fewer/less,
nowhere/somewhere
Conjugation of regular and irregular verbs, present, past and past participle
forms of verbs, helping verbs, transitive and intransitive verbs
Vocabulary Skills
Students place consonants at the beginning or end of words
Review of digraphs, students complete words using /sh/, /ch/, /wh/, and /th/
Review of /er/ and /or/ sounds, students complete words using correct /ar/,
/er/, /ir/, /ur/ and /or/ spelling
173
Essay: Paragraph
Essay: Short Answer
Essay: Short Answer
Essay: Narrative
Essay: Paragraph
Essay: Narrative
Essay: Paragraph
Essay: Narrative
Essay: Descriptive
Essay: Short Answer
Essay: Short Answer
Essay: Short Answer
English Skills XI
Grade Level 11
35
36
Lesson Title
Vocab - SyllablesPronunciation
Vocab - The Sounds
of /oo/
Lesson Content
The identification and use of closed, open and accented syllables, using a
pronunciation key
Review of sounds made by /oo/, students identify /oo/ sounds in words
174
Essays & Media
Essay: Paragraph
Essay: Paragraph
English Skills XII
Grade Level 12
Lesson Title
1
Reading - British
Literature 1
2
Reading - British
Literature 2
3
4
Reading - Compare
& Contrast
Reading Connotation &
Denotation
5
Reading - Drama
6
Reading - Etymology
7
8
9
10
11
12
Reading - Foreign
Phrases 1
Reading - Foreign
Phrases 2
Reading - Foreign
Phrases 3
Reading - Foreign
Terms 1
Reading - Foreign
Terms 2
Reading - Genres
and Literary Periods
Lesson Content
Reading Skills
Periods of English Literature: Classical Period - 1200 B.C. to 455 A.D.; Medieval
Period - 455 A.D. to 1485; Renaissance and the Commonwealth Period - 1485
to 1660
Periods of English Literature: Neoclassical Period - 1660 to 1790; Romantic
Period - 1790 to 1830; Victorian Period - 1832 to 1901; Edwardian Era - 19011910; Modernism - 1914 to 1945; Post-Modernism Period - 1945 to the
present
Definition and examples of comparing and contrasting ideas, events,
characters, etc.; similarities and differences
Recognize the denotation and connotation of a word in a sentence
Elements and types of drama: tragedy, melodrama, comedy, modern drama
History of words derived from names and places
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Persuasive
Essay: Compare and Contrast
Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Persuasive
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Short Answer
Understanding examples of foreign phrases
Essay: Short Answer
Understanding examples of foreign phrases
Essay: Persuasive
Understanding examples of foreign phrases
Essay: Expository
Examples of common foreign terms used in the English language
Examples of common foreign terms used in the English language
Almanac, anecdote, anthology, antithesis, aphorism, carpe diem, character
types (round, flat, static, dynamic), conceit, connotation, convention,
denotation, Electra complex, epigram, epigraph, epilogue, epitaph, epithet, foil,
hamartia, metonymy, mock epic, narration, Oedipus complex, order: (spatial
order, chronological order, order of importance, and logical order), oxymoron,
pastoral, prologue, prose, pseudonym, pun, sarcasm, stream-of-consciousness,
subplot, synecdoche, tragic flaw, universal themes of literature
175
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Letter Writing
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Short Report
Study: EB Learning Material
English Skills XII
Grade Level 12
Lesson Title
13
Reading - Language
Arts Terms
14
Reading - Literary
Devices
15
16
17
18
19
Reading - Metaphors
and Similes
Reading - Outcomes
and Conclusions
Reading - Poetry
Reading - Prefixes
and Suffixes
Reading Propaganda and Bias
20
Reading - Prose
21
Usage - Adverbs
Usage - Clauses
Review
Usage Diagramming
Phrases
Usage Diagramming
Sentences
22
23
24
25
Usage - Nouns
Lesson Content
Genre, Latin literature, Age of Reason, Classical literature, contemporary
literature, diary, didactic literature, dystopian literature, Enlightenment,
epistolary novel, Gilded Age, Gothic novel, Harlem Renaissance, Humanism,
journal, novels of local color, memoirs, Middle Ages, Modernism, Naturalism,
Neoclassicism, novel, novel of manners, novella, picaresque novel, Postmodernism, Realism, regional novel, Renaissance, Romanticism, sentimental
novel, short story, Transcendentalism, and the Victorian Age of literature
Literary devices: alliteration, assonance, onomatopoeia, figurative language,
personification, hyperbole, parallelism, antitheses, apostrophe, epithet,
metonymy, synecdoche
Definition of metaphor and simile; use of metaphors and similes in literature
Definition of outcome and conclusion; using flashback and symbolism to predict
outcomes and conclusions
Elements of poetry; rhyme types; ballad; limerick; haiku; elegy; sonnet; ode;
saga
Essays & Media
Study: EB Learning Material
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Descriptive
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Persuasive
Essay: Narrative
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Persuasive
Definition and examples of commonly used prefixes and suffixes
Essay: Short Answer
Use of propaganda and bias in various forms of written works; loaded words;
name calling; bandwagon; testimonials; statistics
Elements of prose; types of prose: mysteries; short stories; novels;
biographies; autobiographies; formal and informal essays; narrative,
descriptive, expository, and persuasive essays
Usage Skills
Definition and use of adverbs; negative adverbs; degrees of comparison
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Poster
Review of adjective, adverb, and noun clauses
Essay: Descriptive
Review phrases; diagramming of participial phrases, gerunds, and infinitives
Essay: Short Answer
Diagramming imperative sentences and sentences with compound subjects and
verbs
Essay: Short Answer
Nouns as subjects; proper and common nouns; concrete and abstract nouns;
compound nouns
Essay: Short Answer
176
Study: EB Learning Material
Essay: Paragraph
Essay: Short Answer
English Skills XII
Grade Level 12
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
Lesson Title
Usage - Parts of
Speech
Usage - Punctuation
Usage - Usage
Problems
Usage - Verbs
Vocab - Letter
Combinations
Vocab - Root WordsWord Families
Vocab - Two Sounds
for C
Vocab - Two Sounds
for G
Vocab - Two Sounds
for S
Lesson Content
Essays & Media
Review of the eight parts of speech
Essay: Short Answer
Correct usage of italics, parentheses, dash, and hyphen in sentences
Correct usage of grammar including double subjects; learn/teach; leave/let;
some/somewhat; than/then; a/an
Identify action and state of being verbs; verb tenses (past, present, future);
irregular verbs; subject-verb agreement
Vocabulary Skills
Review of sounds made by /au/ and /aw/; students identify /au/ and /aw/
sounds in words
Root words without spelling changes; root words with spelling changes;
changing the first or last letters to form word families
Hard c and soft c explained; examples of words containing both sounds;
students identify hard and soft c in words
Hard /g/ and soft /g/ explained; examples of words containing both sounds;
students identify hard and soft /g/ in words
Essay: Paragraph
Students identify words with the soft sound of s /s/ and the hard sound of s /z/
177
Essay: Letter Writing
Essay: Narrative
Essay: Short Answer
Essay: Narrative
Essay: Short Answer
Essay: Short Answer
Writing I - XII
Grade Levels 1 - 12
A+LS Writing I - XII introduces students to a variety of
topics including:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
learning to write a complete sentence
comprehension, application, analysis, synthesis,
and evaluation of writing
developing ideas
organizing the structure of a story
structure of paragraphs, essays, short reports,
letters, and short stories
drafting, revision, and proofreading
varieties of writing formats
personal narratives
journals
newspaper writing
descriptive writing
comparing and contrasting
sensory words
figurative language
formal and informal language
composing essays
writing resumes
short reports
research papers
expressing opinions
178
Writing I - XII
Grade Levels 1 - 12
The A+LS™ Writing courses are comprehensive, completely integrated courses for grades 1-12. This program directs the
students through the entire writing process from learning to write a complete sentence to expressing themselves creatively
through essays or other forms of writing. The A+LS Writing titles are designed to move students to the comprehension,
application, analysis, synthesis, and evaluation levels of learning.
•
Writing is presented as a collection of year-long
courses.
•
All lessons in the twelve courses contain an
integrated study guide, and essay or constructed
response.
•
Lessons include a variety of essay types such as
descriptive, persuasive, expository, and letter
writing.
•
A+® VIP Bundle customers receive access to
Encyclopædia Britannica® Online School Edition
(EB) workspaces which contain learning materials.
Learning materials may contain articles, games,
images, maps, and/or videos. Clearvue (CV) video
clips may be included as well.
179
Writing I - XII
Grade Levels 1 - 12
•
The content in these courses is designed to meet and exceed the requirements of the National Council of Teachers of
English (NCTE) for the Standards of English Language Arts.
•
The Writing titles emphasize six aspects of writing, including ideas, organization, voice, word choice, fluency and
conventions.
•
Students will learn varieties of writing formats that include personal narratives, journals, newspaper writing, and
descriptive writing.
•
Upper grade level titles develop skills in generating ideas, composing essays, writing resumes, short reports, and
research papers, and expressing opinions in preparation for standardized exit examinations and college entrance
examinations.
•
Due to the interactive nature of the A+ VIP Bundle, there are a few specific software requirements:
o
EB requires web browsers, the following are recommended:
ƒ Microsoft Internet Explorer® versions 6.0 or higher
ƒ Safari® versions 2.0 or higher
Note: EB requires cookies enabled.
o
EB interactive activities require a web browser equipped with the Adobe® Flash® and Shockwave plug-ins.
Available at: www.adobe.com (select Get ADOBE FLASH PLAYER and Get Shockwave Player).
180
Writing I - XII
Grade Levels 1 - 12
o
•
EB video clips are offered in Windows Media® and MPEG-4 formats. You’ll need to have a media player installed
that will support these formats:
ƒ Quicktime® - available at: www.apple.com/quicktime/download
ƒ Windows Media® Player - available at: www.microsoft.com/windows/windowsmedia/download
Numerous links to the Internet are provided in the A+ VIP Bundle. An Internet connection is not required for completion
of this course, but it is required to utilize the EB components of the A+ VIP Bundle.
The A+ VIP Bundle includes the Encyclopædia Britannica Online
School Edition, which has teacher resources and student
learning materials. The materials include a wide range of
interactive lessons, research projects, animations, and
worksheets that support the Writing courses.
•
•
Writing contains EB workspaces.
Each workspace may contain an article, diagram, study
guide, video, or interactive media.
181
Writing I - XII
Grade Levels 1 - 12
The Writing courses each contain a variety of lessons and differ in length, grade level, and available features. Listed below are
the courses found within the curriculum planning manual.
Course
Name
Number of
Lessons
Grade
Levels
Writing I
30
1
Writing II
34
2
Writing III
34
3
Writing IV
38
4
Writing V
45
5
Writing VI
45
6
Writing VII
45
7
Writing VIII
45
8
Writing IX
41
9
Writing X
44
10
Writing XI
46
11
Writing XII
46
12
182
Writing I
Grade Level 1
1
2
Lesson Title
Writing Sentences 1
Writing Sentences 2
3
Writing Sentences 3
4
Paragraphs
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Writing
Writing
Writing
Writing
Writing
Writing
Writing
Writing
13
Writing Formats 9
14
15
Writing Formats 10
Creative Writing 1
16
Creative Writing 2
17
18
19
20
21
Story Elements
Sensory Words
Sketches 1
Sketches 2
Spelling and Writing
22
Personal Information
23
Ideas and Opinions
Variety in
Communication
Sequence
Writing Process 1
Writing Process 2
Writing Process 3
24
25
26
27
28
Formats
Formats
Formats
Formats
Formats
Formats
Formats
Formats
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Lesson Content
Writing complete sentences
Recognizing simple and compound sentences
Defining, identifying, and using declarative, imperative, exclamatory, and
interrogative sentences
Definition and examples of writing paragraphs: descriptive, exploratory,
narrative, instructive, comparative, and contrasting paragraphs
Writing personal narratives
Writing stories, including illustrated books
Writing friendly letters
Journal Writing
Writing about literature
Writing descriptions
Writing newspaper stories
Writing titles for stories and pictures
Writing stories with a logical sequence including a beginning, middle, and
ending
Writing story details
Creative activities and writing
Writing poems using rhyming sounds, word patterns, onomatopoeia, and
alliteration
Writing from a character’s point of view
Using specific words that appeal to the senses
Writing a biographical sketch
Writing autobiographical sketches
Identifying and spelling words used frequently in writing
Writing personal identification data: home address, phone number, parent’s
name
Writing sentences to express personal ideas and opinions
Essay & Media
Essay: Written Response
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Written Response
Written Response
Written Response
Written Response
Illustration
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Activity
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Communicating thoughts using sentences and paragraphs
Organizing written ideas into a chronological sequence
Finding and narrowing a topic
Pre-writing, brainstorming for ideas, using illustrations to generate ideas
Writing, using strategies to produce a draft
183
Essay: Written Response
Writing I
Grade Level 1
Lesson Title
29
Writing Process 4
30
Writing Process 5
Lesson Content
Revising the draft, adding descriptive words, checking the appropriate use of
sentence types, paragraph structure
Proofreading: using a dictionary, editing for grammar, punctuation,
capitalization, and spelling
184
Essay & Media
Writing II
Grade Level 2
1
2
3
4
Lesson Title
Writing Sentences 1
Writing Sentences 2
Writing Sentences 3
Sentence Types 1
5
Sentence Types 2
6
7
8
Writing Process 1
Writing Process 2
Writing Process 3
9
Writing Process 4
10
Writing Process 5
11
Writing Process 6
12
Paragraphs 1
13
Paragraphs 2
14
Paragraphs 3
15
Narratives
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
Letters
Journals
Descriptions
Newspaper Stories
Titles
Story Endings
Details
23
Book Report
24
25
26
Sensory Words
Biography
Autobiography
Lesson Content
Writing complete sentences, subject/predicate
Sentence fragments
Run-on sentences
Recognizing simple and compound sentences
Defining, identifying, and using declarative, imperative, exclamatory, and
interrogative sentences
Finding and narrowing a topic
Pre-writing: brainstorming for ideas, using illustrations to generate ideas
Writing: using strategies to produce a draft
Revising the draft: adding descriptive words, checking the appropriate use of
sentence types, paragraph structure
Proofreading: editing for grammar, punctuation, capitalization, and spelling
Publishing: using a variety of resources including pictures to produce written
work
Definition and examples of writing paragraphs: descriptive, exploratory,
narrative, and instructive
Developing topic sentences, using indention when needed, using supporting
details
Order in paragraphs: main ideas of paragraphs, developing, and organizing
paragraphs
Writing personal narratives and stories with a beginning, middle and end,
narrating events in sequence
Writing friendly letters and addressing envelopes
Using a journal to improve writing skills
Writing a description of people, places, and events
Writing a newspaper story using who, what, where, when, why, and how
Writing a title for stories and pictures
Writing story endings, finishing incomplete stories, and writing sequels
Recognizing and using details to enhance and support writing
Writing a brief summary of a book, providing an opinion about the quality of
the book
Using specific words that appeal to the senses
Writing a biographical paragraph
Writing an autobiographical paragraph
185
Essays & Media
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Illustration
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Written
Written
Written
Written
Response
Response
Response
Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Writing II
Grade Level 2
29
Lesson Title
Expository Writing
Comparison and
Contrast
Ideas and Opinions
30
Literary Conventions
31
32
Figurative Language
Creative Writing 1
33
Creative Writing 2
34
Information
27
28
Lesson Content
Writing a paragraph that explains with facts and examples or gives directions
Writing a paragraph showing the similarities and differences among characters,
settings, or events
Writing sentences to express personal ideas and opinions
Using simple literary conventions in writing: once upon a time, talking animals,
enchanted forests, moral of a story
Reviewing onomatopoeia and alliteration
Using story starters to begin the writing process
Writing poems using rhyming sounds, word patterns, onomatopoeia, and
alliteration
Accessing information from a variety of sources, using a table of contents,
glossary, and index
186
Essays & Media
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Writing III
Grade Level 3
1
2
3
Lesson Title
Writing Sentences 1
Writing Sentences 2
Writing Sentences 3
4
Sentence Types 1
5
Sentence Types 2
6
7
8
Writing Process 1
Writing Process 2
Writing Process 3
9
Writing Process 4
10
Writing Process 5
11
Writing Process 6
12
Paragraphs 1
13
Paragraphs 2
14
Paragraphs 3
15
Narratives
16
17
Letters
Journals
18
Descriptions
19
20
21
22
Newspaper Stories
Titles
Story Endings
Details
23
Book Reports
Lesson Content
Writing complete sentences, subject/predicate
Identifying the subject and predicate in complete sentences
Using periods in complete sentences
Recognizing simple and compound sentences, correctly using commas in
sentences
Defining, identifying, and writing declarative, imperative, exclamatory, and
interrogative sentences
Finding and narrowing a writing topic
Pre-writing: brainstorming for ideas, using illustrations to generate ideas
Writing: using strategies to produce a writing draft
Revising the draft: adding descriptive words, checking the appropriate use of
sentence types, paragraph structure and time order
Proofreading: using a dictionary, editing for grammar, punctuation,
capitalization, and spelling
Publishing: using a variety of resources including pictures to produce written
work
Definition and examples of writing paragraphs: descriptive, expository,
narrative, instructive, comparative, and contrasting paragraphs
Developing topic sentences, using indention when needed, using supporting
details
Order in paragraphs, main ideas of paragraphs, using time-ordered words
Writing personal narratives and stories with a beginning, middle, and end,
narrating events in sequence
Writing friendly letters and addressing envelopes
Using a journal to improve writing skills
Writing a description of people, places and events, using adjectives in writing
assignments
Writing a newspaper story using who, what, where, when, and how
Writing a title for stories, pictures, poems, and songs
Writing story endings, finishing incomplete stories, and writing sequels
Recognizing and using details to enhance and support writing
Writing a brief summary of a book, providing an opinion about the quality of
the book
187
Essays & Media
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Written
Written
Written
Written
Response
Response
Response
Response
Essay: Written Response
Writing III
Grade Level 3
29
30
Lesson Title
Sensory Words
Biography
Autobiography
Expository Writing
Comparison and
Contrast
Ideas and Opinions
Figurative Language
31
Literary Conventions
32
Creative Writing 1
33
Creative Writing 2
34
Information
24
25
26
27
28
Lesson Content
Using specific words that appeal to the senses
Identifying a topic, developing details, writing a biographical paragraph
Identifying a topic, developing details, writing an autobiographical paragraph
Writing a paragraph that explains with facts and examples or gives directions
Writing a paragraph showing the similarities and differences among characters,
settings or events
Writing sentences to express personal ideas and opinions
Reviewing onomatopoeia and alliteration in writing
Using simple literary conventions in writing: once upon a time, talking animals,
enchanted forests, moral of a story
Using story starters to begin the writing process
Writing poems using rhyming sounds, word patterns, onomatopoeia, and
alliteration
Accessing information from a variety of sources, using a table of contents,
glossary, and index
188
Essays & Media
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Activity
Writing IV
Grade Level 4
Lesson Title
1
Writing Sentences 1
2
3
4
Writing Sentences 2
Writing Sentences 3
Sentence Types 1
5
Sentence Types 2
6
7
8
Writing Process 1
Writing Process 2
Writing Process 3
9
Writing Process 4
10
Writing Process 5
11
Writing Process 6
12
Paragraphs 1
13
Paragraphs 2
14
Paragraphs 3
15
Narratives
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
Letters
Journals
Descriptions
Newspaper Stories
Titles
Story Endings
Details
23
Book Reports
24
Short Reports
Lesson Content
Writing complete sentences, identifying and using the subject and predicate in
sentences
Recognizing sentence fragments and improving sentence writing skills
Identifying run-on sentences
Recognizing simple and compound sentences
Defining, identifying, and using declarative, imperative, exclamatory, and
interrogative sentences
Finding and narrowing a topic
Pre-writing: brainstorming for ideas, using illustrations to generate ideas
Writing: using strategies to produce a writing draft
Revising the draft: adding descriptive words, checking the appropriate use of
sentence types and paragraph structure
Proofreading: using a dictionary, editing for grammar, punctuation,
capitalization, and spelling
Publishing: using a variety of resources using illustrations to produce written
work
Definition and examples of writing paragraphs, descriptive, narrative,
instructive, comparative, and contrasting paragraphs
Developing topic sentences, using indention when needed, using supporting
details
Developing sequence and order in paragraphs, main ideas of paragraphs,
organizing paragraphs
Writing personal narratives and stories with a beginning, middle, and end,
narrate events in sequence
Writing a friendly letter
Using a journal to improve writing skills
Writing a description of people, places and events using observation skills
Writing a newspaper story using who, what, where, when, why, and how
Writing a title for stories and pictures
Writing story endings, finishing incomplete stories and writing sequels
Recognizing and using details to enhance and support writing
Writing a brief summary of a book, providing an opinion about the quality of
the book
Reporting of facts and opinions to use in writing a short report
189
Essays & Media
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Activity
Essay: Activity
Essay: Written Response
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Letter Writing
Journal Writing
Written Response
Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Activity
Writing IV
Grade Level 4
30
31
32
33
Lesson Title
Sensory Words
Biography
Autobiography
Expository Writing
Comparison and
Contrast
Imagery
Analogies
Essay
Ideas and Opinions
34
Literary Conventions
25
26
27
28
29
36
Figurative Language
Review
Creative Writing 1
37
Creative Writing 2
38
Information
35
Lesson Content
Using specific words that appeal to the senses
Developing an outline for writing a biography, writing a biographical paragraph
Writing an autobiographical paragraph
Writing a paragraph that explains with facts and examples or gives directions
Writing a paragraph showing the similarities and differences among characters,
settings, or events
Writing a description of a vivid event using all the senses
Recognizing, making, and using analogies in writing
Introduction to the essay structure
Writing sentences to express personal ideas and opinions
Using simple literary conventions in writing: once upon a time, talking animals,
enchanted forests, moral of a story
Essays & Media
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Written
Written
Written
Written
Response
Response
Response
Response
Essay: Narrative Writing
Reviewing onomatopoeia, alliteration, simile, and metaphor
Using story starters to begin the writing process
Writing poems using rhyming sounds, word patterns, onomatopoeia, and
alliteration
Accessing information from a variety of sources, using a table of contents,
glossary, and index
190
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Writing V
Grade Level 5
Lesson Title
1
Writing Process 1
2
3
4
Writing Process 2
Writing Process 3
Writing Process 4
5
Writing Process 5
6
Writing Process 6
7
Writing Process 7
8
9
10
11
12
Writing Process 8
Writing Sentences 1
Writing Sentences 2
Writing Sentences 3
Sentence Types 1
13
Sentence Types 2
14
Journal Writing
15
Paragraphs 1
16
17
18
Paragraphs 2
Paragraphs 3
Paragraphs 4
19
Paragraphs 5
20
21
22
23
24
25
Formal-Informal
Language
Paragraphs 6
Paragraphs 7
Paragraphs 8
Paragraphs 9
Story Endings
Lesson Content
Selecting and narrowing a topic, identifying the audience, writing introductions
and conclusions
Writing introductory and concluding sentences
Brainstorming, preparing a working outline
Pre-writing: developing the overall focus for the writing selection
Writing: using a variety of writing strategies, sequencing ideas, creating a
writing draft
Revising: use a variety of techniques to draft and revise the organization,
format and sequence and create a new draft of the writing selection
Proofreading: checking the writing selection for accuracy of grammar,
punctuation, capitalization, and spelling
Publishing the writing selection for specific audiences
Identifying the subject and predicate in complete sentences
Identifying and correcting sentence fragments
Identifying and correcting run-on sentences
Recognizing simple and compound sentences
Defining, identifying, and using declarative, imperative, exclamatory, and
interrogative sentences
Using a journal to enhance writing skills
Definition and examples of writing paragraphs: descriptive, expository,
narrative, persuasive paragraphs
Writing topic sentences in paragraphs
Developing the paragraph using supporting details and examples
Identifying the concluding sentences in writing examples
Recognizing the chronological sequence, place order, and order of importance
in paragraphs
Essays & Media
Essay: EB Learning Material
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Journal Writing
Essay: Written Response
Using appropriate words and phrases in writing selections
Writing
Writing
Writing
Writing
Writing
a narrative paragraph
an expository paragraph
a descriptive paragraph
a persuasive paragraph
story endings, finishing incomplete stories, and writing sequels
191
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Narrative Writing
Written Response
Written Response
Written Response
Written Response
Writing V
Grade Level 5
Lesson Title
26
Letters
27
Comparing and
Contrasting
28
Library
29
30
Newspaper Stories
Summarizing
31
Book Reports
32
Short Reports
33
Sketches 1
34
Sketches 2
35
Ideas and Opinions
36
Essays 1
37
Essays 2
38
39
40
41
Essays
Essays
Essays
Essays
3
4
5
6
Lesson Content
Writing friendly letters, including the greeting, date, address, and closing,
addressing letters, writing business letters, and addressing envelopes
Recognizing and using comparison and contrast to show the similarities and
differences in characters, settings, and events from literature
Using a library to access information; using a table of contents, glossary, and
index
Writing a newspaper story using who, what, where, when, and why
Summarizing written material from a variety of sources
Writing a brief summary of a book, providing an opinion about the quality of
the book
Reporting of facts and events on a variety of topics
Creating biographical sketches, using appropriate narrative strategies and
sequencing techniques
Creating autobiographical sketches, using appropriate narrative strategies and
sequencing techniques
Expressing personal ideas and opinions in class discussions or individual
situations including reports, letters, journals, and presentations
Identifying and using the essay structure including the thesis, introduction,
body, and conclusion
Recognizing the chronological sequence, place order, and order of importance
in essays
Writing a narrative essay
Writing an expository essay
Writing a descriptive essay
Writing a persuasive essay
42
Creative Writing 1
Writing a short story
43
44
45
Creative Writing 2
Creative Writing 3
Creative Writing 4
Writing various types of poetry
Writing a play
Writing folk literature
192
Essays & Media
Essay: EB Learning Material
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: EB Learning Material
Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Narrative Writing
Written Response
Written Response
Written Response
EB Learning Material
Narrative Writing
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Writing VI
Grade Level 6
Lesson Title
1
Writing Process 1
2
3
4
Writing Process 2
Writing Process 3
Writing Process 4
5
Writing Process 5
6
Writing Process 6
7
Writing Process 7
8
9
10
11
12
Writing Process 8
Writing Sentences 1
Writing Sentences 2
Writing Sentences 3
Sentence Types 1
13
Sentence Types 2
14
Journal Writing
15
Paragraphs 1
16
17
18
Paragraphs 2
Paragraphs 3
Paragraphs 4
19
Paragraphs 5
20
21
22
23
24
25
Formal-Informal
Language
Paragraphs 6
Paragraphs 7
Paragraphs 8
Paragraphs 9
Story Endings
Lesson Content
Selecting and narrowing a topic, identifying the audience, writing introductions
and conclusions
Writing introductory and concluding sentences
Brainstorming: preparing a working outline
Pre-writing: developing the overall focus for the writing selection
Writing: using a variety of writing strategies, sequencing ideas, creating a
writing draft
Revising: use a variety of techniques to draft and revise the organization,
format and sequence, and create a new draft of the writing selection
Proofreading: checking the writing selection for accuracy in regard to grammar,
punctuation, capitalization, and spelling
Publishing the writing selection for specific audiences
Writing complete sentences
Identifying and correcting sentence fragments
Identifying and correcting run-on sentences
Recognizing simple and compound sentences
Defining, identifying, and using declarative, imperative, exclamatory, and
interrogative sentences
Using a journal to enhance writing skills
Definition and examples of writing paragraphs: descriptive, expository,
narrative, persuasive paragraphs
Identifying the topic sentences in writing examples
Developing a paragraph using supporting details and examples
Identifying the concluding sentences in writing examples
Extended order in paragraphs: chronological and spatial importance,
transitional expressions
Essays & Media
Essay: EB Learning Material
Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Journal Writing
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Using appropriate words and phrases in writing selections
Essay: Written Response
Writing
Writing
Writing
Writing
Writing
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
a narrative paragraph
an expository paragraph
a descriptive paragraph
a persuasive paragraph
story endings, finishing incomplete stories, and writing sequels
193
Narrative Writing
Written Response
Written Response
Written Response
Narrative Writing
Writing VI
Grade Level 6
Lesson Title
26
Letters
27
Analogies
28
Library
29
Newspaper Stories
30
Summarizing
31
Book Reports
32
Short Reports
33
Sketches 1
34
Sketches 2
35
Ideas and Opinions
36
Essays 1
37
Essays 2
38
39
40
41
Essays
Essays
Essays
Essays
3
4
5
6
Lesson Content
Writing friendly letters, including the greeting, date, address, and closing,
addressing letters, writing business letters, and addressing envelopes
Recognizing and using comparison and contrast to show the similarities and
differences in persons, places, and things
Using a library to access information; using a table of contents, glossary, and
index
Writing a newspaper story using who, what, where, when, why, and how
Summarizing written material from various sources such as magazines,
journals, and newspapers
Writing a brief summary of a book, providing an opinion about the quality of
the book
Essay: Written Response
Reporting of facts and events on a variety of topics
Essay: EB Learning Material
Written Response
Creating biographical sketches, using appropriate narrative strategies and
sequencing techniques
Creating autobiographical sketches, using appropriate narrative strategies and
sequencing techniques
Expressing personal ideas and opinions in class discussions or individual
situations including reports, letters, journals, and presentations
Identifying and using the essay structure including the thesis, introduction,
body, and conclusion
Extended order in essays: chronological and spatial importance, transitional
expressions
Writing a narrative essay
Writing an expository essay
Writing a descriptive essay
Writing a persuasive essay
42
Creative Writing 1
Writing a short story
43
44
45
Creative Writing 2
Creative Writing 3
Creative Writing 4
Writing different types of poetry
Writing a drama
Writing folk literature
194
Essays & Media
Essay: EB Learning Material
Letter Writing
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Narrative Writing
Written Response
Written Response
Written Response
EB Learning Material
Narrative Writing
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Writing VII
Grade Level 7
Lesson Title
1
Writing Process 1
2
3
4
Writing Process 2
Writing Process 3
Writing Process 4
5
Writing Process 5
6
Writing Process 6
7
Writing Process 7
8
9
10
11
12
Writing Process 8
Writing Sentences 1
Writing Sentences 2
Writing Sentences 3
Sentence Types 1
13
Sentence Types 2
14
Journal Writing
15
Paragraphs 1
16
Paragraphs 2
17
18
Paragraphs 3
Paragraphs 4
19
Paragraphs 5
20
21
22
23
24
25
Formal-Informal
Language
Paragraphs 6
Paragraphs 7
Paragraphs 8
Paragraphs 9
Story Endings
Lesson Content
Selecting and narrowing a topic, identifying the audience, writing for a variety
of audiences
Writing introductions, thesis statements, and conclusions
Brainstorming, preparing a working outline
Pre-writing: developing the overall focus for the writing selection
Writing a first draft using a variety of writing strategies, developing ideas,
creating a writing draft
Revising: use a variety of techniques to draft and revise the organization,
format and sequence and create a new draft of the writing selection
Proofreading: checking the writing selection for accuracy in regard to grammar,
punctuation, capitalization, and spelling
Publishing the writing selection for specific audiences
Recognizing and writing complete sentences
Recognizing and correcting sentence fragments
Recognizing and correcting run-on sentences
Recognizing simple and compound sentences, linking compound sentences
Defining, identifying, and using declarative, imperative, exclamatory, and
interrogative sentences
Using a journal to improve creative thinking and writing skills
Definition and examples of writing descriptive, expository, narrative, and
persuasive paragraphs
Identifying the topic sentence, supporting details, and concluding sentence in
writing examples
Developing the paragraph using sensory, memory, and reflective details
Identifying the concluding sentences in writing examples
Extended order in paragraphs: chronological and spatial importance,
transitional expressions
Essays & Media
Essay: EB Learning Material
Letter Writing
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Journal Writing
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Using appropriate words and phrases in writing selections
Essay: Letter Writing
Writing
Writing
Writing
Writing
Writing
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
a narrative paragraph
an expository paragraph
a descriptive paragraph
a persuasive paragraph
story endings, finishing incomplete stories, and writing sequels
195
Narrative Writing
Written Response
Written Response
Written Response
Narrative Writing
Writing VII
Grade Level 7
Lesson Title
26
Letters
27
Analogies
28
Library
29
30
31
Newspaper Stories
Summarizing
Book Reports
32
Short Reports
33
Sketches 1
34
Sketches 2
35
Ideas and Opinions
36
Essays 1
37
Essays 2
38
39
40
41
Essays
Essays
Essays
Essays
3
4
5
6
Lesson Content
Writing friendly letters, including the greeting, date, address, and closing,
addressing letters, writing business letters, and addressing envelopes
Recognizing and using comparison and contrast to show the similarities and
differences in characters, settings, and events from literature
Using a library to access information; using a table of contents, glossary,
index, encyclopedia, atlas, almanac, and dictionary
Writing a newspaper story using who, what, where, when, why, and how
Summarizing written material from a variety of sources
Identifying the components and the process of writing book reports
Writing a short report using various research materials
Creating biographical sketches, using appropriate narrative strategies and
sequencing techniques
Creating autobiographical sketches, using appropriate narrative strategies and
sequencing techniques
Expressing personal ideas and opinions in writing and discussions
Identifying and using the essay structure including the thesis statement,
introduction, body, and conclusion
Recognizing and using extended chronological and spatial order and transitions
in essays
Writing a narrative essay
Writing an expository essay
Writing a descriptive essay
Writing a persuasive essay
42
Creative Writing 1
Writing a short story using the required elements
43
Creative Writing 2
44
Creative Writing 3
45
Creative Writing 4
Recognizing and composing different forms of poetry
Recognizing the aspects of drama by learning the components of writing and
producing a play
Recognizing and writing folk literature including folk tales, myths, legends, and
fables
196
Essays & Media
Essay: EB Learning Material
Letter Writing
Essay: Written Response
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Written Response
Written Response
Written Response
EB Learning Material
Activity
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Narrative Writing
Written Response
Written Response
Written Response
EB Learning Material
Narrative Writing
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Writing VIII
Grade Level 8
Lesson Title
1
Writing Process 1
2
Writing Process 2
3
Writing Process 3
4
Writing Process 4
5
Writing Process 5
6
Writing Process 6
7
8
Writing Process 7
Writing Process 8
9
Writing Sentences 1
10
11
Writing Sentences 2
Writing Sentences 3
12
Sentence Types 1
13
Sentence Types 2
14
Journal Writing
15
Paragraphs 1
16
Paragraphs 2
17
Paragraphs 3
18
Paragraphs 4
19
Paragraphs 5
20
Formal-Informal
Language
Lesson Content
An overview of the five-step writing process: prewriting, drafting, revising,
editing, and publishing,
Identifying the purpose and audience for a writing selection, selecting and
narrowing a topic
Learning and using different prewriting strategies including freewriting,
brainstorming, preparing a working outline
Writing the first draft using prewriting notes, lists, freewrites and clusters,
determining a topic, purpose, and audience for a writing selection
Revising: use a variety of techniques to draft and revise the organization,
format and sequence, and create a new draft of the writing selection
Proofreading: checking the writing selection for accuracy in regard to grammar,
punctuation, capitalization, and spelling
Publishing a writing selection for a specific audience
Using research skills to develop supporting details for writing selections
Review: parts of a sentence, subjects, predicates, clauses, phrases, and
punctuation
Identifying and writing simple and compound sentences
Distinguishing between complete sentences and sentence fragments
Recognizing declarative, imperative, exclamatory, and interrogative sentences
and their purposes
Identifying and using subordinate phrases within sentences including
prepositional, participial, gerund, infinitive and appositive phrases
Using a journal to enhance writing skills
Definition and examples of writing paragraphs: descriptive, expository,
narrative, and persuasive paragraphs
Identifying the structure of a paragraph and the topic sentences in writing
examples
Developing various types of paragraphs using the topic sentence and
supporting details
Identifying and writing the concluding sentences in paragraphs
Extended order in paragraphs: chronological and spatial importance,
transitional expressions
Using appropriate formal and informal words and phrases in writing selections
197
Essays & Media
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Letter Writing
Essay: Research
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Journal Writing
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Writing VIII
Grade Level 8
21
22
23
24
25
Lesson Title
Paragraphs 6
Paragraphs 7
Paragraphs 8
Paragraphs 9
Story Endings
26
Letters
27
Analogies
28
Library
29
30
Newspaper Stories
Summarizing
31
Book Reports
32
Short Reports
33
Sketches 1
34
Sketches 2
35
Ideas and Opinions
36
Essays 1
37
Essays 2
38
Essays 3
39
Essays 4
40
Essays 5
41
Essays 6
Lesson Content
Writing a narrative paragraph
Writing an expository paragraph
Writing a descriptive paragraph
Writing a persuasive paragraph
Writing story endings for a variety of writing examples
Writing friendly letters, including the greeting, date, address, and closing,
addressing letters, writing business letters, and addressing envelopes
Using analogies to explain, describe or persuade by comparing a complex
process to something simple and easy to understand
Using library references to access information; using an encyclopedia, atlas,
book index, and the Reader/s Guide
Writing a newspaper story using who, what, where, when, why, and how
Summarizing written material from various sources
Writing a summary of a book using different methods including the traditional
book report, journal entry, friendly letter, interview, resume, character
presentation, or newspaper article
Reporting of facts and events from primary and secondary sources, surveys,
and interviews in a short report form
Creating biographical sketches, using appropriate narrative strategies and
sequencing techniques
Creating autobiographical sketches, using appropriate narrative strategies and
sequencing techniques
Expressing ideas and opinions in personal journals, reports, letters, and poems
Identifying and using the essay structure including the thesis statement,
introduction, body, and conclusion
Extended order in essays: chronological and spatial importance, transitional
expressions
Writing a narrative essay with a thesis statement, characters, setting, actions,
a beginning, middle, and end
Writing an expository essay using facts and figures, examples, analysis of a
process, comparison/contrast, definition, classification, and cause and effect
Writing a descriptive essay, using sensory words and figures of speech
Writing a persuasive essay identifying a problem and offering a solution, using
persuasion to call for action
198
Essays & Media
Essay: Narrative Writing
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: EB Learning Material
Letter Writing
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: EB Learning Material
Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Narrative Writing
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Writing VIII
Grade Level 8
Lesson Title
42
Creative Writing 1
43
Creative Writing 2
44
Creative Writing 3
45
Creative Writing 4
Lesson Content
Writing a short story using the elements of setting, main character, conflict,
scenes or episodes, a climax, and end
Writing various types of poetry including haiku, limerick, concrete, and
formula-based poems
Identifying the aspects of drama by learning the components of writing and
producing a play
Identifying and writing various types of folk literature including folk tales, fairy
tales, fables, legends, and myths
199
Essays & Media
Essay: EB Learning Material
Narrative Writing
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Writing IX
Grade Level 9
Lesson Title
1
Writing Process 1
2
3
Writing Process 2
Writing Process 3
4
Writing Process 4
5
Writing Process 5
6
Writing Process 6
7
8
Writing Process 7
Writing Sentences
9
Sentence Types
10
Journal Writing
11
Paragraphs 1
12
Paragraphs 2
13
Paragraphs 3
14
Paragraphs 4
15
Paragraphs 5
17
18
19
20
21
Formal/Informal
Language
Paragraphs 6
Paragraphs 7
Paragraphs 8
Paragraphs 9
Story Endings
22
Letters
16
Lesson Content
Selecting and narrowing a topic, identifying the audience, writing introductions
and conclusions
Writing introductory and concluding sentences
Focusing on the purpose of writing, developing a strong topic sentence
Developing the main focus of writing, sequencing, using transitional words and
phrases
Revising a writing draft: using different writing styles, correcting sentence
structure
Proofreading: checking the writing selection for accuracy in regard to grammar,
punctuation, capitalization, and spelling
Publishing the writing selection for specific audiences
Recognizing complete sentences, avoiding fragment and run-on sentences
Reviewing the basic sentence types: simple, compound, complex sentences;
improving writing style and form
Using a journal to enhance writing skills
Definition and examples of writing paragraphs: descriptive, expository,
narrative, persuasive paragraphs
Identifying the topic sentence, supporting and concluding sentences in writing
samples
Developing the paragraph using supporting details and examples
Extended order in paragraphs: chronological and spatial importance,
transitional expressions
Identifying the structure in Expository Writing: cause and effect, definition,
classification, and process.
Using appropriate words and phrases in writing selections
Writing a narrative paragraph
Writing an expository paragraph
Writing a descriptive paragraph
Writing a persuasive paragraph
Writing story endings, finishing incomplete stories, and writing sequels
Writing friendly letters, including the greeting, date, address, and closing,
addressing letters, writing business letters, and addressing envelopes
200
Essays & Media
Essay: EB Learning Material
Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Expository
Essay: Expository
Essay: Activity
Essay: Journal Writing
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Expository
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Narrative
Expository
Descriptive
Persuasive
Narrative
Essay: Letter Writing
Writing IX
Grade Level 9
Lesson Title
23
Analogies
24
Library
25
Newspaper Stories
26
Summarizing
27
Book Reports
28
Sketches 1
29
Sketches 2
30
Ideas and Opinions
31
Essays 1
32
Essays 2
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
Essays 3
Essays 4
Essays 5
Essays 6
Essay Tests
Creative Writing
Creative Writing
Creative Writing
Creative Writing
1
2
3
4
Lesson Content
Using analogies to explain, describe or persuade by comparing a complex
process to something simple and easy to understand
Using a library to access information; using a table of contents, glossary, and
index
Writing a newspaper story using who, what, where, when, why, and how
Summarizing written material from various sources such as magazines,
journals, and newspapers
Writing a brief summary of a book, providing an opinion about the quality of
the book
Creating biographical sketches, using appropriate narrative strategies and
sequencing techniques
Creating autobiographical sketches, using appropriate narrative strategies and
sequencing techniques
Expressing personal ideas and opinions in class discussions or individual
situations, reports, stories, letters, poetry, journals, and presentations
Identifying and using the essay structure including the thesis, introduction,
body, and conclusion
Extended order in essays: chronological and spatial importance, transitional
expressions
Writing a narrative essay
Writing an expository essay
Writing a descriptive essay
Writing a persuasive essay
Constructing and completing essay test questions
Writing short stories
Writing poetry
Writing drama
Writing folk literature
201
Essays & Media
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Activity
Essay: Narrative
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Short Report
Essay: Narrative
Essay: Narrative
Essay: Persuasive
Essay: Expository
Essay: Expository
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Narrative
Expository
Descriptive
Persuasive
Written Response
Narrative
Written Response
Written Response
Written Response
Writing X
Grade Level 10
1
Lesson Title
Journal Writing
2
Writing Process 1
3
4
Writing Process 2
Writing Process 3
5
Writing Process 4
6
Writing Process 5
7
Writing Process 6
8
Writing Sentences
9
Sentence Types
10
Paragraphs 1
11
Paragraphs 2
12
Paragraphs 3
13
Paragraphs 4
15
16
17
18
Formal-Informal
Language
Paragraphs 5
Paragraphs 6
Paragraphs 7
Paragraphs 8
19
Analogies
20
Correspondence
21
Resumes
22
Learning Logs
14
Lesson Content
Using a journal to enhance writing skills
Using writing strategies to generate ideas
Identifying the audience, organizing text, preparing a working outline
Writing a first draft of text using prewriting and organizing as a guide
Revising: use a variety of techniques to draft and revise the organization,
format and sequence, and create a new draft of the writing selection
Proofreading: checking the writing selection for accuracy in regard to
grammar, punctuation, capitalization, and spelling
Publishing the writing selection for specific audiences
Writing complete sentences, correcting sentence fragments and run-on
sentences
Recognizing simple, compound, complex, and compound-complex sentences
Review of paragraph structure: topic sentence, supporting statements,
concluding sentence
Developing the paragraph using supporting details and examples
Identifying and creating paragraphs using cause and effect, process, and
classification
Extended order in paragraphs: chronological and spatial importance,
transitional expressions
Using appropriate words and phrases in writing selections
Writing a narrative paragraph
Writing an expository paragraph
Writing a descriptive paragraph
Writing a persuasive paragraph
Recognizing and using comparison and contrast to show the similarities and
differences in characters, settings, and events from literature
Writing friendly letters, including the greeting, date, address, and closing,
addressing letters, writing business letters, and addressing envelopes
Creating a resume, gathering personal information, revising, and proofing the
resume
Developing and using a personal learning log using the strategies of
questioning, evaluating, and predicting
202
Essays & Media
Essay: Journal Writing
Essay: EB Learning Material
Expository
Essay: Narrative
Essay: Narrative
Essay: Activity
Essay: Narrative
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Journal Writing
Essay: Journal Writing
Essay: Expository
Essay: Expository
Essay: Expository
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Narrative
Expository
Descriptive
Persuasive
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Letter Writing
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Writing X
Grade Level 10
23
Lesson Title
Newspaper Stories
24
Library
25
Using Sources
26
Summarizing
27
Short Reports
28
Essay Structure
30
31
32
33
Organizing the
Essay
Essays 1
Essays 2
Essays 3
Essays 4
34
Research
35
Sketches 1
36
Sketches 2
37
Ideas and Opinions
38
Literary Analysis
29
39
40
41
42
43
44
Essay Tests
Story Endings
Creative Writing
Creative Writing
Creative Writing
Creative Writing
1
2
3
4
Lesson Content
Writing a newspaper story using who, what, where, when, why, and how
Using a library to access information; using a table of contents, glossary, and
index
Locating and documenting various writing and research sources
Summarizing written material from various sources such as magazines,
journals, and newspapers
Reporting facts and events on a variety of topics
Identifying and creating structural elements in essays, including the thesis
statement, introduction, body, conclusion, and transitional phrases
Developing and organizing essay material addressing chronological and spatial
order
Writing a narrative essay
Writing an expository essay
Writing a descriptive essay
Writing a persuasive essay
Creating a research essay using documented sources
Creating biographical sketches, using appropriate narrative strategies and
sequencing techniques
Creating autobiographical sketches, using appropriate narrative strategies and
sequencing techniques
Expressing personal ideas and opinions in class discussions or individual
situations, reports, stories, letters, poetry, journals, and presentations
Writing a literary analysis expressing an opinion of the quality of a book or
movie
Constructing and completing answers to essay test questions
Writing story endings, finishing incomplete stories, and writing sequels
Writing short stories
Writing poetry
Writing drama
Writing folk literature
203
Essays & Media
Essay: Narrative Writing
Essay: Activity
Essay: Expository
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Short Report
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Activity
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Narrative
Expository
Descriptive
Persuasive
Research Plan
Writing
Essay: Narrative
Essay: Narrative
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Expository
Narrative
Descriptive
Written Response
Written Response
Written Response
Writing XI
Grade Level 11
Lesson Title
1
Writing Process 1
2
3
4
Writing Process 2
Writing Process 3
Writing Process 4
5
Writing Process 5
6
Writing Process 6
7
Writing Process 7
8
Writing Sentences
9
10
Sentence Types
Journal Writing
11
Paragraphs 1
12
13
Paragraphs 2
Paragraphs 3
14
Paragraphs 4
15
Paragraphs 5
17
18
19
20
21
Formal-Informal
Language
Paragraphs 6
Paragraphs 7
Paragraphs 8
Paragraphs 9
Story Endings
22
Correspondence
23
Writing Resumes
24
Analogies
16
Lesson Content
Selecting and narrowing a topic, identifying the audience, writing introductions,
and conclusions
Brainstorming, preparing a working outline
Pre-writing, developing the overall focus for the writing selection
Writing: using a variety of writing strategies, sequencing ideas, creating a draft
Revising: use a variety of techniques to draft and revise the organization,
format and sequence, and create a new draft of the writing selection
Proofreading: checking the writing selection for accuracy in regard to grammar,
punctuation, capitalization, and spelling
Publishing the writing selection for specific audiences
Writing complete sentences, identifying and correcting sentence fragments and
run-on sentences
Recognizing simple, complex, and compound sentences
Using a journal to enhance writing skills
Definition and examples of writing paragraphs: descriptive, expository,
narrative, persuasive paragraphs
Identifying the topic sentences in writing examples
Developing the paragraph using supporting details and examples
Extended order in paragraphs: chronological and spatial importance,
transitional expressions
Methods of structure in Expository Writing: cause/effect, definitions,
classification, and process
Using appropriate words and phrases in writing selections
Writing a narrative paragraph
Writing an expository paragraph
Writing a descriptive paragraph
Writing a persuasive paragraph
Writing story endings, finishing incomplete stories, and writing sequels
Writing friendly letters, including the greeting, date, address, and closing,
addressing letters, writing business letters, and addressing envelopes
Preparing a resume for job, scholarship, and college applications
Recognizing and using comparison and contrast to show the similarities and
differences in characters, settings, and events from literature
204
Essays & Media
Essay: EB Learning Material
Persuasive
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Activity
Essay: Activity
Essay: Activity
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Journal Writing
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Expository
Essay: Written Response
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Narrative
Expository
Descriptive
Persuasive
Written Response
Essay: Letter Writing
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Compare/Contrast
Writing XI
Grade Level 11
Lesson Title
25
Library
26
Newspaper Stories
27
Learning Logs
28
Summarizing
29
Sources
30
31
Literary Analysis
Short Reports
32
Research Paper
33
Sketches 1
34
Sketches 2
35
Ideas and Opinions
36
Essays 1
37
Essays 2
38
39
40
41
42
Essays 3
Essays 4
Essays 5
Essays 6
Essay Tests
43
Creative Writing 1
44
45
Creative Writing 2
Creative Writing 3
46
Creative Writing 4
Lesson Content
Use a library to access information; use a table of contents, glossary, and
index
Writing a newspaper story using who, what, where, when, why, and how
Developing a learning technique that includes the strategies of questioning,
evaluating, and predicting
Summarizing and paraphrasing without plagiarism
Discussing the process of documenting and preparing the Works Cited page for
a research paper
Analyzing various pieces of literature
Writing short reports using information gathered from field research
Identifying the fundamentals of writing a research paper
Creating biographical sketches, using appropriate narrative strategies and
sequencing techniques
Creating autobiographical sketches, using appropriate narrative strategies and
sequencing techniques
Expressing personal ideas and opinions in class discussions or individual
situations, reports, stories, letters, poetry, journals, and presentations
Identifying and using the essay structure including the thesis, introduction,
body, and conclusion
Extended order in essays: chronological and spatial importance, transitional
expressions
Writing a narrative essay
Writing an expository essay
Writing a descriptive essay
Writing a persuasive essay
Organizing information to answer essay test questions
Writing a short story using the elements of plot, characterization, setting, and
theme
Identifying various forms of poetry, writing poetry
Discussing the elements of drama, writing a scene
Recognizing folklore elements, including mysteries, myths, tall-tales, legends,
ballads, and fables
205
Essays & Media
Essay: Activity
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Expository
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Short Report
Essay: Research Plan
Writing
Essay: Narrative
Essay: Narrative
Essay: Persuasive
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Activity
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Narrative
Expository
Descriptive
Persuasive
Written Response
Essay: Narrative
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Writing XII
Grade Level 12
Lesson Title
1
Writing Process 1
2
3
Writing Process 2
Writing Process 3
4
Writing Process 4
5
Writing Process 5
6
Writing Process 6
7
Writing Process 7
8
Writing Sentences
9
10
Sentence Types
Journal Writing
11
Paragraphs 1
12
13
Paragraphs 2
Paragraphs 3
14
Paragraphs 4
15
Paragraphs 5
17
18
19
20
21
Formal-Informal
Language
Paragraphs 6
Paragraphs 7
Paragraphs 8
Paragraphs 9
Story Endings
22
Letters
23
Resumes
16
Lesson Content
Selecting and narrowing a topic, identifying the audience, writing introductions
and conclusions
Brainstorming a topic, preparing a working outline
Pre-writing, developing the overall focus for the writing selection
Writing: using a variety of writing strategies, sequencing ideas, creating a
writing draft
Revising: use a variety of techniques to draft and revise the organization,
format and sequence, and create a new draft of the writing selection
Proofreading: checking the writing selection for accuracy in regard to grammar,
punctuation, capitalization, and spelling
Publishing the writing selection for specific audiences
Writing complete sentences: identifying and correcting sentence fragments and
run-on sentences
Recognizing simple, compound, and complex sentences
Using a journal to enhance writing skills
Definition and examples of writing paragraphs: descriptive, expository,
narrative, persuasive paragraphs
Identifying the topic sentences in writing examples
Developing the paragraph using supporting details and examples
Extended order in paragraphs: chronological and spatial importance,
transitional expressions.
Identifying types of structure such as comparison/contrast, problem and
solution, cause and effect, definition, process, and classification
Using appropriate words and phrases in writing selections for different
audiences
Writing a narrative paragraph
Writing an expository paragraph
Writing a descriptive paragraph
Writing a persuasive paragraph
Writing story endings, finishing incomplete stories, and writing sequels
Writing friendly letters, including the greeting, date, address, and closing,
addressing letters, writing business letters, and addressing envelopes
Preparing a resume for job, scholarship, and college applications
206
Essays & Media
Essay: EB Learning Material
Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Activity
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Journal Writing
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Expository
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Narrative
Expository
Descriptive
Persuasive
Written Response
Essay: Letter Writing
Essay: Written Response
Writing XII
Grade Level 12
Lesson Title
24
Analogies
25
Library
26
Newspaper Stories
27
Learning Logs
28
Summarizing
29
Sources
30
Literary Analysis
31
Short Reports
Writing a Research
Paper
32
33
Sketches 1
34
Sketches 2
35
Ideas and Opinions
36
Essays 1
37
Essays 2
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
Essays 3
Essays 4
Essays 5
Essays 6
Essay Tests
Creative Writing 1
Creative Writing 2
Creative Writing 3
Lesson Content
Recognizing and using comparison and contrast to show the similarities and
differences in characters, settings, and events from literature
Using a library to access information; using a table of contents, glossary, and
index
Writing a newspaper story using who, what, where, when, why, and how
Developing a learning log that includes the strategies of questioning,
evaluating, and predicting
Summarizing written material from various sources such as magazines,
journals, and newspapers
Learning to cite information from formal and informal sources including
speeches, magazines, books, and newspapers
Writing a literary analysis of a piece of literature and providing an opinion on
the quality of work
Reporting of facts and events on a wide range of topics
Writing a research paper using a variety of documented sources
Creating biographical sketches, using appropriate narrative strategies and
sequencing techniques
Creating autobiographical sketches, using appropriate narrative strategies and
sequencing techniques
Expressing personal ideas and opinions in class discussions or individual
situations, reports, stories, letters, poetry, journals, and presentations
Identifying and using the essay structure including the thesis, introduction,
body, and conclusion
Extended order in essays: chronological and spatial importance, transitional
expressions
Writing a narrative essay
Writing an expository essay
Writing a descriptive essay
Writing a persuasive essay
Constructing and completing essay test questions.
Writing short stories
Writing poetry
Writing drama
207
Essays & Media
Essay: Compare/Contrast
Essay: Activity
Essay: Narrative
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Short Report
Essay: Research Plan
Writing
Essay: Narrative
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay: Written Response
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Essay:
Narrative
Expository
Descriptive
Persuasive
Written Response
Narrative
Written Response
Written Response
Writing XII
Grade Level 12
46
Lesson Title
Creative Writing 4
Lesson Content
Writing folk literature
208
Essays & Media
Essay: Written Response
Language Arts Keyboard Companion I - VI
Grade Levels 3 - 12
A+LS Language Arts Keyboard Companion I - VI
introduces students to a variety of topics including:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
practice in the proper use of sentence structure
sentence combination
use of proper grammar in writing
development of student reading, comprehension,
analytic, keyboard, and problem-solving skills
written (keyboard) responses to various
problems
modifying model paragraphs through specific
instructions
writing conventions
proper use of nouns and pronouns
subject/verb agreement
verb tenses
practice with proper English syntax and spoken
grammar
reinforcement of oral language conventions
improved keyboard skills
changing questions into statements
movement of auxiliary verb position
use of contractions
plural and singular nouns
compound verbs
correct punctuation
209
Language Arts Keyboard Companion I
Grade Levels 3-5
1
2
3
4
5
6
Lesson Title
Singular-Plural
Singular-Plural
Singular-Plural
Singular-Plural
Singular-Plural
Singular-Plural
7
Singular-Plural 7
8
Singular-Plural 8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Nouns and Pronouns 1
Nouns and Pronouns 2
Nouns and Pronouns 3
Nouns and Pronouns 4
Nouns and Pronouns 5
Nouns and Pronouns 6
Nouns and Pronouns 7
Nouns and Pronouns 8
Nouns and Pronouns 9
Nouns and Pronouns 10
Nouns and Pronouns 11
Nouns and Pronouns 12
Nouns and Pronouns 13
Nouns and Pronouns 14
Nouns and Pronouns 15
Nouns and Pronouns 16
25
Nouns and Pronouns 17
26
Nouns and Pronouns 18
27
Nouns and Pronouns 19
28
Nouns and Pronouns 20
29
Nouns and Pronouns 21
1
2
3
4
5
6
Lesson Content
Rewriting exercise changing singular nouns to plural nouns.
Students rewrite paragraphs changing plural nouns to singular nouns.
Students rewrite paragraphs changing plural nouns to singular nouns.
Students rewrite paragraphs changing singular nouns to plural nouns.
Students rewrite paragraphs changing plural nouns to singular nouns.
Students rewrite paragraphs changing plural nouns to singular nouns.
Students rewrite paragraphs changing plural nouns to singular nouns, changing the spelling of
words.
Students rewrite paragraphs changing singular nouns to plural nouns, changing the spelling of
singular words
Students rewrite a paragraph changing noun phrases to pronouns.
Students rewrite a paragraph changing noun phrases to pronouns.
Students rewrite a paragraph changing noun phrases to pronouns.
Students rewrite a paragraph changing noun phrases to pronouns.
Students rewrite a paragraph changing plural nouns to pronouns.
Students rewrite a paragraph changing nouns and noun phrases to pronouns.
Students rewrite a paragraph changing nouns and noun phrases to pronouns.
Students rewrite a paragraph changing third person nouns to first person nouns.
Students rewrite a paragraph changing nouns to pronouns.
Students rewrite a paragraph changing nouns and noun phrases to pronouns.
Students rewrite a paragraph changing nouns to pronouns.
Students rewrite a paragraph changing nouns to pronouns.
Students rewrite a paragraph changing nouns and noun phrases to pronouns.
Students rewrite a paragraph changing nouns and noun phrases to pronouns.
Students rewrite a paragraph changing nouns and noun phrases to pronouns.
Students rewrite a paragraph changing nouns and noun phrases to pronouns.
Students rewrite a paragraph changing the gender of the subject and matching the pronouns to
gender.
Students rewrite a paragraph changing the gender of the subject and matching the pronouns to
gender.
Students rewrite a paragraph changing first person pronouns to nouns.
Students rewrite a paragraph changing singular nouns to plural nouns and changing pronouns to
match subject.
Students rewrite a paragraph changing first person pronouns to plural nouns.
210
Language Arts Keyboard Companion I
Grade Levels 3-5
30
Lesson Title
Nouns and Pronouns 22
31
Nouns and Pronouns 23
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
Nouns and Pronouns 24
Nouns and Pronouns 25
Nouns and Pronouns 26
Nouns and Pronouns 27
Nouns and Pronouns 28
Nouns and Pronouns 29
Nouns and Pronouns 30
Nouns and Pronouns 31
Nouns and Pronouns 32
Nouns and Pronouns 33
Nouns and Pronouns 34
Nouns and Pronouns 35
Nouns and Pronouns 36
Nouns and Pronouns 37
Nouns and Pronouns 38
Nouns and Pronouns 39
Nouns and Pronouns 40
Nouns and Pronouns 41
Nouns and Pronouns 42
Nouns and Pronouns 43
Nouns and Pronouns 44
Nouns and Pronouns 45
Nouns and Pronouns 46
Subject-Verb Agreement
1
Subject-Verb Agreement
2
Subject-Verb Agreement
3
Subject-Verb Agreement
4
55
56
57
58
Lesson Content
Students rewrite a paragraph changing first person pronouns to plural nouns.
Students rewrite a paragraph changing third person singular pronouns to third person plural
pronouns.
Students rewrite a paragraph changing plural nouns to singular nouns.
Students rewrite a paragraph changing plural nouns to singular nouns.
Students rewrite a paragraph changing plural nouns to singular nouns.
Students rewrite a paragraph changing plural nouns to singular nouns.
Students rewrite a paragraph changing plural nouns to singular nouns.
Students rewrite a paragraph changing plural nouns to singular nouns.
Students rewrite a paragraph changing plural nouns to singular nouns.
Students rewrite a paragraph changing plural nouns to singular nouns.
Students change plural nouns to singular pronouns, changing pronouns to agree with subject.
Students change nouns to possessive pronouns.
Students change proper nouns to possessive pronouns.
Students change proper nouns to possessive pronouns.
Students change possessive pronouns agree with subject.
Students change first person possessive pronouns to third person possessive pronouns.
Students change masculine possessive pronouns to feminine possessive pronouns.
Students change proper nouns to third person possessive pronouns.
Students change proper nouns to third person possessive pronouns.
Students change third person masculine pronouns to third person feminine pronouns.
Students change third person possessive pronouns to first person possessive pronouns.
Students change proper nouns to plural possessive pronouns.
Students change first person pronouns to third person pronouns.
Students change third person possessive pronouns to agree with subject.
Students change singular pronouns to plural pronouns.
Students change third person noun to first person pronoun.
Students change first person noun to agree with subject.
Students change third person singular noun to third person plural pronouns.
Students change third person singular nouns to third person plural pronouns.
211
Language Arts Keyboard Companion I
Grade Levels 3-5
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
Lesson Title
Subject-Verb Agreement
5
Subject-Verb Agreement
6
Subject-Verb Agreement
7
Subject-Verb Agreement
8
Subject-Verb Agreement
9
Subject-Verb Agreement
10
Subject-Verb Agreement
11
Subject-Verb Agreement
12
Subject-Verb Agreement
13
Subject-Verb Agreement
14
Subject-Verb Agreement
15
Verb Tense 1
Verb Tense 2
Verb Tense 3
Verb Tense 4
Verb Tense 5
Verb Tense 6
Verb Tense 7
Verb Tense 8
Verb Tense 9
Verb Tense 10
Verb Tense 11
Verb Tense 12
Lesson Content
Students change third person plural pronouns to third person singular pronouns
Students change plural to singular nouns, match verbs and pronouns.
Students change first person singular noun to third person singular noun.
Students change third person singular nouns to first person singular pronouns.
Students change plural nouns to singular pronouns.
Students change third person singular nouns to first person singular pronouns.
Students change third person singular nouns to third person plural nouns.
Students change first person singular pronouns to third person singular pronouns.
Students change first person singular pronouns to third person plural pronouns.
Students change third person singular pronouns to third person plural pronouns.
Students change third person singular noun to third person plural pronouns.
Students
Students
Students
Students
Students
Students
Students
Students
Students
Students
Students
Students
change
change
change
change
change
change
change
change
change
change
change
change
present to past tense, adding time referent.
present to past tense, adding time referent.
present to past tense, adding time referent.
present to past tense, adding time referent.
present to past tense, adding time referent.
past to present tense, changing time referent.
past to present tense, changing time referent.
past to present tense, changing time referent.
plural past to singular past.
plural past to singular past.
past perfect to present perfect, adding time referent.
present to past tense, adding time referent.
212
Language Arts Keyboard Companion I
Grade Levels 3-5
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
Lesson Title
Verb Tense 13
Verb Tense 14
Verb Tense 15
Verb Tense 16
Verb Tense 17
Verb Tense 18
Verb Tense 19
Verb Tense 20
Students
Students
Students
Students
Students
Students
Students
Students
change
change
change
change
change
change
change
change
Lesson Content
past to present tense, adding time referent.
present to past tense, adding time referent.
present to past tense, adding time referent.
present to past, using plurals, adding time referent.
plural present to plural past, changing spelling.
present to past, adding time referent.
present to past tense, adding time referent.
present to past tense, adding time referent.
213
Language Arts Keyboard Companion II
Grade Levels 3-5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Lesson Title
Positive and Negative 1
Positive and Negative 2
Positive and Negative 3
Positive and Negative 4
Positive and Negative 5
Positive and Negative 6
Positive and Negative 7
Positive and Negative 8
Questions & Statements
1
Questions & Statements
2
Questions & Statements
3
Questions & Statements
4
Questions & Statements
5
Questions & Statements
6
Questions & Statements
7
Questions & Statements
8
Questions & Statements
9
Questions & Statements
10
Questions & Statements
11
Questions & Statements
12
Questions & Statements
13
Students
Students
Students
Students
Students
Students
Students
Students
change
change
change
change
change
change
change
change
Lesson Content
positive statements
positive statements
positive statements
positive statements
positive statements
positive statements
positive statements
positive statements
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
negative
negative
negative
negative
negative
negative
negative
negative
statements.
statements.
statements.
statements.
statements.
statements.
statements.
statements.
Students change statement to question, changing verb position.
Students change statement to question, changing verb position.
Students change statement to question, changing verb position.
Students change statement to question, changing verb position.
Students change statement to question, changing verb position.
Students change statement to question, changing verb position.
Students change statement to question, changing verb position.
Students change question to statement, changing verb position.
Students change question to statement changing verb position.
Students change statement to question changing verb position.
Students change question to statement, moving auxiliary verb.
Students change statement to question changing verb position.
Students change statement to question changing verb position.
214
Language Arts Keyboard Companion II
Grade Levels 3-5
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
Lesson Title
Questions & Statements
14
Questions & Statements
15
Questions & Statements
16
Questions & Statements
17
Questions & Statements
18
Questions & Statements
19
Questions & Statements
20
Questions & Statements
21
Questions & Statements
22
Questions & Statements
23
Questions & Statements
24
Questions & Statements
25
Questions & Statements
26
Questions & Statements
27
Questions & Statements
28
Sentence Construction 1
Sentence Construction 2
Sentence Construction 3
Sentence Construction 4
Lesson Content
Students change statement to question changing verb position.
Students change statement to question changing verb position.
Students change question to statement, moving auxiliary verb.
Students change question to statement, moving auxiliary verb.
Students change question to statement, moving auxiliary verb.
Students change statement to question, moving verb.
Students change question to statement.
Students change statement to question, moving verb.
Students change statement to question, moving verb.
Students change question to statement.
Students change statement to question.
Students change statement to question.
Students change statement to question.
Students change question to statement, changing verb.
Students change question to statement.
Students
Students
Students
Students
construct
construct
construct
construct
correct
correct
correct
correct
sentences
sentences
sentences
sentences
215
from
from
from
from
words.
words.
words.
words.
Language Arts Keyboard Companion II
Grade Levels 3-5
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
Lesson Title
Sentence Construction 5
Sentence Construction 6
Sentence Construction 7
Sentence Construction 8
Sentence Construction 9
Sentence Construction
10
Sentence Construction
11
Sentence Construction
12
Sentence Construction
13
Sentence Construction
14
Sentence Combination 1
Sentence Combination 2
Sentence Combination 3
Sentence Combination 4
Sentence Combination 5
Sentence Combination 6
Sentence Combination 7
Sentence Combination 8
Sentence Combination 9
Sentence Combination
10
Sentence Combination
11
Sentence Combination
12
Sentence Combination
13
Sentence Combination
14
Students
Students
Students
Students
Students
Lesson
construct correct
construct correct
construct correct
construct correct
construct correct
Content
sentences
sentences
sentences
sentences
sentences
from
from
from
from
from
words.
words.
words.
words.
words.
Students construct correct sentences from words.
Students construct correct sentences from words.
Students construct correct sentences from words.
Students construct correct sentences from words.
Students construct correct sentences from words.
Students
Students
Students
Students
Students
Students
Students
Students
Students
combine
combine
combine
combine
combine
combine
combine
combine
combine
sentences,
sentences,
sentences,
sentences,
sentences,
sentences,
sentences,
sentences,
sentences,
adding
adding
adding
adding
adding
adding
adding
adding
adding
/and/ where necessary.
/and/ where necessary.
/but/ where necessary.
/and/ or /but/ where necessary.
/and/ where necessary.
correct punctuation.
/and/ where necessary.
correct punctuation.
correct punctuation.
Students combine sentences, adding correct punctuation.
Students combine sentences, adding correct punctuation.
Students combine sentences, adding correct punctuation.
Students combine two sentences with compound subject, changing verb to agree with subject.
Students combine sentences, adding correct punctuation.
216
Language Arts Keyboard Companion II
Grade Levels 3-5
65
Lesson Title
Sentence Combination
15
Lesson Content
Students combine four sentences into two sentences, compound predicate, adding and/or.
217
Language Arts Keyboard Companion III
Grade Levels 6-8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
Lesson Title
Singular-Plural 1
Singular-Plural 2
Singular-Plural 3
Singular-Plural 4
Singular-Plural 5
Singular-Plural 6
Singular-Plural 7
Nouns and Pronouns 1
Nouns and Pronouns 2
Nouns and Pronouns 3
Nouns and Pronouns 4
Nouns and Pronouns 5
Nouns and Pronouns 6
Nouns and Pronouns 7
Nouns and Pronouns 8
Nouns and Pronouns 9
Nouns and Pronouns 10
Nouns and Pronouns 11
Subject-Verb Agreement
1
Subject-Verb Agreement
2
Subject-Verb Agreement
3
Subject-Verb Agreement
4
Subject-Verb Agreement
5
Subject-Verb Agreement
6
Subject-Verb Agreement
7
Subject-Verb Agreement
8
Lesson Content
Students change singular to plural.
Students change plural nouns to singular nouns, adding articles.
Students change singular nouns to plural nouns.
Students change singular nouns to plural nouns.
Students change indefinite amounts to specified quantities.
Student change indefinite amounts to specified quantities.
Students use /much/ or /many/ to change indefinite amounts to specified quantities.
Students change noun phrases to pronouns.
Students change masculine pronouns to feminine pronouns.
Students change plural nouns to pronouns.
Students change noun phrases to pronouns.
Students change pronouns to agree with subject.
Students change singular nouns to plural pronouns.
Students change noun phrases to pronouns.
Students change pronouns to agree with subject.
Students change singular nouns to plural pronouns.
Students change pronouns to agree with subject.
Students change pronouns to agree with subject.
Students change plural pronouns to singular pronouns.
Students change singular nouns to plural pronouns.
Students change plural nouns to singular nouns.
Students change singular to plural nouns.
Students change singular nouns to plural pronouns.
Students change third person noun to first person pronoun.
Students change third person noun to first person pronoun.
Students change first person pronouns to third person noun.
218
Language Arts Keyboard Companion III
Grade Levels 6-8
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
Lesson Title
Subject-Verb Agreement
9
Subject-Verb Agreement
10
Verb Tense 1
Verb Tense 2
Verb Tense 3
Verb Tense 4
Verb Tense 5
Verb Tense 6
Verb Tense 7
Verb Tense 8
Verb Tense 9
Verb Tense 10
Verb Tense 11
Lesson Content
Students change plural to singular nouns.
Students change plural to singular nouns.
Students
Students
Students
Students
Students
Students
Students
Students
Students
Students
Students
change
change
change
change
change
change
change
change
change
change
change
present to past
present to past
present to past
present to past
past to present
past to present
past to present
present to past
present to past
present to past
present to past
219
tense,
tense,
tense,
tense,
tense,
tense,
tense,
tense,
tense,
tense,
tense,
changing time and matching
changing time and matching
changing time and matching
changing time and matching
matching time and verb.
matching time and verb.
matching time and verb.
matching time and verb.
matching time and verb.
matching time and verb.
matching time and verb.
verbs.
verbs.
verbs.
verbs.
Language Arts Keyboard Companion IV
Grade Levels 6-8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Lesson Title
Positive and Negative 1
Positive and Negative 2
Positive and Negative 3
Positive and Negative 4
Positive and Negative 5
Positive and Negative 6
Positive and Negative 7
Positive and Negative 8
Positive and Negative 9
Positive and Negative 10
Questions and
Statements 1
Questions & Statements
2
Questions & Statements
3
Questions & Statements
4
Questions & Statements
5
Questions & Statements
6
Questions & Statements
7
Questions & Statements
8
Questions & Statements
9
Questions & Statements
10
Sentence Construction 1
Sentence Construction 2
Sentence Construction 3
Sentence Construction 4
Students
Students
Students
Students
Students
Students
Students
Students
Students
Students
change
change
change
change
change
change
change
change
change
change
Lesson Content
positive statement
positive statement
positive statement
positive statement
positive statement
positive statement
positive statement
positive statement
positive statement
positive statement
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
negative
negative
negative
negative
negative
negative
negative
negative
negative
negative
statement.
statement.
statement.
statement.
statement,
statement,
statement,
statement,
statement,
statement,
using
using
using
using
using
using
Students change statement to question, moving verb.
Students change statement to question, moving verb.
Students change statement to question, moving verb.
Students change statement to question, moving verb.
Students change statement to question, moving verb.
Students change question to statement, moving auxiliary verb.
Students change statement to question, moving verb.
Students change statement to question.
Students change questions to statement.
Students change questions to statement.
Students create sentence from word list.
Students create sentence from word list.
Students create sentence from word list.
Students create sentence from word list.
220
contractions.
contractions.
contractions.
contractions.
contractions.
contractions.
Language Arts Keyboard Companion IV
Grade Levels 6-8
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
Lesson Title
Sentence Construction 5
Sentence Combination 1
Sentence Combination 2
Sentence Combination 3
Sentence Combination 4
Sentence Combination 5
Sentence Combination 6
Sentence Combination 7
Sentence Combination 8
Sentence Combination 9
Sentence Combination
10
Sentence Combination
11
Sentence Combination
12
Sentence Combination
13
Sentence Combination
14
Sentence Combination
15
Students
Students
Students
Students
Students
Students
Students
Students
Students
Students
combine
combine
combine
combine
combine
combine
combine
combine
combine
combine
Lesson Content
sentences.
sentences.
sentences.
sentences.
sentences.
sentences.
sentences.
sentences.
sentences.
sentences.
Students combine sentences.
Students combine sentences.
Students combine sentences.
Students combine sentences.
Students combine sentences.
Students combine sentences.
221
Language Arts Keyboard Companion V
Grade Levels 9-12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
Lesson Title
Singular-Plural 1
Singular-Plural 2
Singular-Plural 3
Singular-Plural 4
Singular-Plural 5
Singular-Plural 6
Singular-Plural 7
Singular-Plural 8
Nouns and Pronouns 1
Nouns and Pronouns 2
Nouns and Pronouns 3
Nouns and Pronouns 4
Nouns and Pronouns 5
Nouns and Pronouns 6
Nouns and Pronouns 7
Nouns and Pronouns 8
Nouns and Pronouns 9
Nouns and Pronouns 10
Nouns and Pronouns 11
Nouns and Pronouns 12
Subject-Verb Agreement
1
Subject-Verb Agreement
2
Subject-Verb Agreement
3
Subject-Verb Agreement
4
Subject-Verb Agreement
5
Subject-Verb Agreement
6
Subject-Verb Agreement
7
Students
Students
Students
Students
Students
Students
Students
Students
Students
Students
Students
Students
Students
Students
Students
Students
Students
Students
Students
Students
Lesson Content
change singular nouns to plural nouns, changing
change plural nouns to singular nouns, changing
change singular nouns to plural nouns, changing
change plural nouns to singular nouns, changing
add quantities to nouns.
add quantities to nouns.
fill in blanks with /much/ or /many./
fill in blanks with /much/ or /many./
change noun phrases to pronouns.
change nouns to pronouns.
change proper nouns to pronouns.
change singular to plural nouns.
change nouns to pronouns.
change nouns and noun phrases to pronouns.
change nouns and noun phrases to pronouns.
change proper nouns to pronouns.
change plural to singular nouns.
change proper nouns to pronouns.
complete blanks using who or whom.
complete blanks using who or whom.
Students change pronouns to nouns.
Students change pronouns to nouns.
Students change plural to singular nouns.
Students change plural to singular nouns.
Students change plural to singular nouns.
Students change nouns to pronouns.
Students change plural to singular nouns.
222
spelling.
spelling.
spelling.
spelling.
Language Arts Keyboard Companion V
Grade Levels 9-12
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
Lesson Title
Subject-Verb Agreement
8
Subject-Verb Agreement
9
Subject-Verb Agreement
10
Verb Tense 1
Verb Tense 1
Verb Tense 3
Verb Tense 4
Verb Tense 5
Verb Tense 6
Verb Tense 7
Verb Tense 8
Verb Tense 9
Verb Tense 10
Verb Tense 11
Verb Tense 12
Verb Tense 13
Verb Tense 14
Verb Tense 15
Lesson Content
Students change plural to singular nouns.
Students change singular to plural nouns.
Students change singular to plural nouns.
Students
Students
Students
Students
Students
Students
Students
Students
Students
Students
Students
Students
Students
Students
Students
change
change
change
change
change
change
change
change
change
change
change
change
change
change
change
present to past tense.
present to past tense.
present to past tense.
tense of verb, adding time referent, if necessary.
tense of verb, adding time referent, if necessary.
tense of verb, adding time referent, if necessary.
tense of irregular verb, adding time referent, if necessary.
tense of verb, adding time referent, if necessary.
tense of verb, adding time referent, if necessary.
tense of verb, adding time referent, if necessary.
tense of verb, adding time referent, if necessary.
tense of verb, adding time referent, if necessary.
tense of verb, adding time referent, if necessary.
tense of verb, adding time referent, if necessary.
tense of verb, adding time referent, if necessary.
223
Language Arts Keyboard Companion VI
Grade Levels 9-12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
Lesson Title
Positive and Negative 1
Positive and Negative 2
Positive and Negative 3
Questions & Statements
1
Questions & Statements
2
Questions & Statements
3
Questions & Statements
4
Questions & Statements
5
Questions & Statements
6
Sentence Construction 1
Sentence Construction 2
Sentence Construction 3
Sentence Construction 4
Sentence Construction 5
Sentence Construction 6
Sentence Construction 7
Sentence Construction 8
Sentence Combination 1
Sentence Combination 2
Sentence Combination 3
Sentence Combination 4
Sentence Combination 5
Sentence Combination 6
Sentence Combination 7
Sentence Combination 8
Sentence Combination 9
Sentence Combination
10
Lesson Content
Students change positive statements to negative statements.
Students change positive statements to negative statements.
Students change positive statements to negative statements.
Students change statements to questions, moving verb.
Students change statements to questions, moving verb.
Students change statement to question.
Students change questions to statement.
Students change questions to statement.
Students change questions to statement.
Students
Students
Students
Students
Students
Students
Students
Students
Students
Students
Students
Students
Students
Students
Students
Students
Students
construct sentences from word lists.
construct sentences from word lists.
construct sentences from word lists.
construct sentences from word lists.
construct sentences from word lists.
construct sentences from word lists.
construct sentences from word lists.
construct sentences from word lists.
construct correctly punctuated paragraphs.
construct correctly punctuated paragraphs.
construct correctly punctuated paragraphs.
construct correctly punctuated paragraphs.
combine sentences using correct punctuation.
combine sentences using correct punctuation.
combine sentences using correct punctuation.
combine sentences using correct punctuation.
combine sentences using correct punctuation.
Students combine sentences using correct punctuation.
224
Language Arts Keyboard Companion VI
Grade Levels 9-12
28
29
30
31
32
Lesson Title
Sentence Combination
11
Sentence Combination
12
Sentence Combination
13
Sentence Combination
14
Sentence Combination
15
Lesson Content
Students combine sentences using correct punctuation.
Students combine sentences using correct punctuation.
Students combine sentences and compound subject using correct punctuation.
Students combine three sentences into two sentences, with compound predicate.
Students combine three sentences into one sentence with compound verb.
Copyright © 2008 The American Education Corporation. A+, A+LS, and A+nyWhere Learning System
are either trademarks or registered trademarks of The American Education Corporation.
Adobe, Acrobat Reader, and Flash are registered trademarks of the Adobe Systems Incorporated.
MetaMetrics and Lexile are registered trademarks of MetaMetrics, Inc.
Safari and QuickTime are registered trademarks of Apple Inc.
Windows Media and Internet Explorer are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
225